NCR Counterpoint Course 306 Configuring Counterpoint

NCR Counterpoint Course 306 Configuring Counterpoint
NCR Counterpoint
Course 306 Configuring Counterpoint
©NCR Corporation 2012
©NCR Corporation 2012
For Your Information...
Here is some logistical information about this training class:
CLASS HOURS
Class starts promptly at 8:00 am and runs until 5:00 pm each day.
BREAKS
Normally, there is at 15-minute break during the morning and afternoon.
LUNCH
The instructor will stop class for approximately one hour to allow
participants to enjoy their lunch. There are several restaurants within
walking distance of the Memphis training facility.
PHONES
Please turn off your cell phone while in class. You can handle calls and
text messages while on breaks and at lunch.
CONFIGURING NCR COUNTERPOINT
Version 8.5
Agenda
Table of Contents
For Your Information
Overview of class format, training materials, and the training facility.
General Information
Section 1. Installing NCR Counterpoint
Covers the procedure for installing the components needed to run Counterpoint,
creating a new database, and additional installation information.
Section 2.
Setting Up System Data
Covers the process of configuring Counterpoint, including registration, security,
workgroups, batches, taxes, accounting interface, and more.
Section 3.
Setting Up Inventory Data
Covers setting up locations, inventory control, categories, sub-categories,
barcodes, and more.
Section 4.
Setting Up Customer Data
Covers customer setup and control.
Section 5.
Setting Up Purchasing Data
Covers setting up purchasing control and vendors.
Section 6.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
Covers Point of Sale setup, for both regular ticket entry and Touchscreen, setting
up stores and devices, use of form groups, configuring electronic draft capture
for credit cards, and more.
Section 7.
Customizing Dictionaries
Covers making changes in the Data Dictionary and Text Dictionary.
Section 8.
Database Utilities
Covers exporting and importing database tables, backing up and restoring a
database, and more.
Appendix 1: Account Numbers Worksheet
Appendix 2: Constructing Column Constraints
Appendix 3: Using Picture Masks
Appendix 4: Avoiding Multi-Site Replication Errors
Appendix 5: Legacy Device Setup
Appendix 6: Form Editor OPOS .xml Format
Copyright 1995 – 2017 by NCR Corporation.
PROPRIETARY RIGHTS NOTICE: All rights reserved. No part of this material may be
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, or
otherwise, without permission in writing from NCR Corporation.
SYNCHRONICS and the Synchronics designs are registered trademarks of NCR
Corporation.
Other products mentioned are trademarks of their respective manufacturers
REV: 061617
SECTION 1: INSTALLING NCR COUNTERPOINT
Components Used to Run NCR Counterpoint ............................................ 1
Hardware/Software Requirements.............................................................. 2
Database Engine Comparison.................................................................... 3
SQL Server 2005 Upgrades ....................................................................... 4
Installation Sequence - Server ................................................................... 6
Installation Sequence - Workstation ........................................................... 7
Installing Counterpoint Prerequisites on a Server ....................................... 8
Configuring for Remote Connections: SQL 2008/2012 ............................. 12
Installing NCR Counterpoint on a Server .................................................. 14
Starting NCR Counterpoint Services on a Server ..................................... 24
Installing Prerequisites on a Workstation .................................................. 25
Installing NCR Counterpoint on a Workstation ......................................... 27
Configuring Workstation Connection ........................................................ 31
Installing Service Packs ........................................................................... 32
Version Controls ....................................................................................... 33
CPSystem Database ................................................................................ 34
Folders and File Locations ....................................................................... 35
Updating to a New Release ...................................................................... 38
Sequence for Creating a New Company Database .................................. 39
Additional SQL Settings ........................................................................... 45
Additional Installation Information ............................................................. 51
Setting Up New SQL Users ...................................................................... 52
Forcing Login to a Specific Company ....................................................... 54
Viewing Environment Settings .................................................................. 55
Viewing Resources and Locks ................................................................. 59
PCI DSS-Compliance Features ................................................................ 60
<This page intentionally left blank>
Components Used to Run NCR Counterpoint
SQL Database
Manager
Handles access to SQL database
MSSQL Server 2005 w/SP2 or 2008 R2
SQL Server Express 2005 w/SP2 or SQL Server 2008 R2 Express
(installable from CPSQL Prerequisites)
Install on SQL server; separate installation from Counterpoint
Install SSE 2005 or SSE 2008 R2 on workstation, if workstation also
has local database
Counterpoint
“program”
CounterPoint.exe
Server and workstation files
Counterpoint
Services
("CPServices")
Handles zooms, validated returns, timecards, emailing reports and
receipts, Data Sync (Offline Ticket Entry), and FileSync (Multi-Site
and Offline Ticket Entry)
Installed on server and offline workstations when Counterpoint is
installed
Definition of Counterpoint tables, columns, and indexes
Installed on server when Counterpoint is installed
User-modifiable
Data Dictionary
Text Dictionary
Definition of group box, button, and tab labels, and message text
Installed on server when Counterpoint is installed
User-modifiable
Company Database
Two server files that contain a company’s data
*.mdf = data
*.ldf = transaction log
Specific to and managed by SQL Database Server
System Database
Two server files that contain Counterpoint system level data
*.mdf = data
*.ldf = transaction log
Specific to and managed by SQL Database Server
Crystal Reports
Used to create all provided standard reports, and forms
Runtime (Version 10) provided with Counterpoint
Purchase Crystal Reports 9, 10 (Professional or Advanced), XI, or
2008 to modify standard reports or to build your own reports
NiceLabel
Used to create or modify labels
Print Engine provided with Counterpoint
Purchase NiceLabel Pro 5 or later to modify pre-defined label
formats or to create your own
Perfect Keyboard
A keyboard macro program used to program keystrokes for
specialized applications
Install from 3rdParty folder of NCR CP Complete Download
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-1
07/07/15
Hardware/Software Requirements
Server
Operating
System
Windows Server 2012 R2 (64-bit)
Windows Server 2008 (32-bit or 64-bit)
Windows 8.1 (64-bit)
Windows 7 (32-bit or 64-bit)
Citrix Metaframe and Microsoft Windows Terminal Services/Remote
Desktop Services
Processor
2 GHz Pentium 4 or better
Memory
4 GB RAM or more
Internet
Internet connection
Database
Engine
MSSQL 2012 Standard, Business, or Enterprise Edition
MSSQL 2008 R2 Standard, Workgroup, or Enterprise Edition
SQL Server 2012 Express
SQL Server 2008 Express R2 (installable from CP Prerequisites)
Workstation
Operating
System
Windows 7 (32- or 64-bit)
Windows 8.1 (64-bit)
Windows Embedded POSReady 2009 (on POS workstations only)
Processor
1.3 GHz Celeron M or better (WAN)
1.6 GHz Pentium M or better (LAN)
Memory
1 GB RAM (2 GB for Offline Ticket Entry workstations)
Browser
Internet Explorer 6.0 or later
Database
Engine
(Offline Ticket Entry workstations only)
MSSQL 2012 Standard, Business, or Enterprise Edition
MSSQL 2008 R2 Standard, Workgroup, or Enterprise Edition
SQL Server 2012 Express
SQL Server 2008 Express R2 (installable from CP Prerequisites)
Other
Workstations that will access Online Help or Dashboard will need an
active Internet connection.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-2
07/07/15
Database Engine Comparison
SQL Server 2008 Express R2
SQL Server Express 2012
MSSQL 2012 or 2008 R2
Included with Counterpoint
Prerequisites
Free download from Microsoft
website
Purchase separately
(Standard, Business/
Workgroup, or Enterprise)
Performance may be impacted
by more than 5 concurrent
users
Performance may be impacted
by more than 5 concurrent
users
6+ concurrent users
Up to 10 GB database
Up to 10 GB database
4GB+ database
Graphical interface with SQL
Server Management Studio
(included with CP Prerequisites
installation)
Graphical interface with SQL
Server Management Studio
Express (available as separate
download)
Graphical interface
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-3
(32,000 max)
07/07/15
SQL Server 2005 Upgrades
SQL Server 2005 no longer supported
Beginning with NCR Counterpoint V8.5, SQL Server 2005 is no longer supported.
If you are upgrading from Counterpoint V8.4.6 and you have been using SQL Server
2005, upgrade to SQL Server 2008 R2 or SQL Server 2012 before installing
Counterpoint V8.5.
Your current database compatibility level is 90 (MSSQL2005) message
If you receive a message similar to this when starting Counterpoint V8.5:
you will need to fix your database compatibility. Follow these steps:
1. Ensure the database is attached to the database engine for either SQL Server 2008
R2 or SQL Server 2012.
2. In SQL Server Management Studio, right-click
the database and select Properties.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-4
07/07/15
Select Options in the Database Properties window.
Then change Compatibility level to either SQL Server 2008 (100) or SQL Server 2010 (110).
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-5
07/07/15
Installation Sequence - Server
Standalone and LAN Environments
On the server
Step
Comments
1.
Disable Windows User Access Control
Re-enable UAC after you finish installing
Counterpoint and all third-party components.
2.
Log in as the system administrator
You must have Administrator rights to your server
and each of your workstations to install NCR
Counterpoint.
3.
Install MSSQL Server software
(Optional)
MSSQL is purchased and installed separately.
4.
Install prerequisites
Before you install NCR CP, you must install CP
prerequisites which will install the following
components:





Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1
Microsoft SQL Server Native Client
SQL Server Management Objects
SQLXML4
SQL Server 2008/2012 Shared Management
Objects (SMO)
 SQL Server 2008/2012 System CLR Types
If a default instance of MSSQL is not detected, the
installer will also prompt you to install SSE 2008 R2.
5.
Configure remote connections in SQL
Server Management Studio
Configure your SQL server to allow remote
connections using both TCP/IP and named pipes.
For SQL 2012, grant the NT AUTHORITY\SYSTEM
login sysadmin rights to your server. For Windows
8.1, your Windows login must also have sysadmin
rights to your server.
6.
Install NCR Counterpoint Files
Run Setup.exe on the server to install NCR
Counterpoint server files. Workstation files are also
automatically installed on a server.
Optionally, select to install Demo data
(TestGolf database) and/or Starter data
or a pre-attached database
Demo data is a complete database for a golf pro
shop. Starter data is pre-defined data that can be
used for a new company to minimize setup time.
7.
If available, download, unzip and install
Counterpoint Service Pack
Download from Support area of NCR Counterpoint
Partner Portal or User Portal
8.
Verify NCR CP Services is running
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-6
07/07/15
Installation Sequence - Workstation
On each workstation
Step
Comments
1. Disable Windows User Access
Control
Re-enable UAC after you finish installing
Counterpoint and all third-party components.
2. Log in as the system administrator
You must have Administrator rights to install NCR
Counterpoint for the first time on a workstation.
NOTE: Default Administrator User name and
Password for All-in-One POS terminals:
XR7 and P1550: user01 and U5Er01?
P1515 and P1560/P1570: user01 and user01
3. Install prerequisites on the
workstation
Available from the Counterpoint download files
(CPSQLPrerequisites.exe).
4. Install Counterpoint
Select to install Program Files
Optionally, install:

Utilities

Dashboard

Documentation
Browse to the installation folder on server and run
ClientSetup.exe
5. Configure workstation connection to
SQL Server
Use CLICONFG to configure the workstation to
connect to the SQL server using TCP/IP and
named pipes.
Includes a number of database- and system-related
tools, including the SQL Script Utility and the
System Configuration utility.
Installs the necessary components for the
Dashboard, if they are not already installed.
6. Install Perfect Keyboard if you want
From 3rdParty folder of CPSQL Complete
to use this “keyboard macro” program Download, select the Perfect Keyboard folder and
then execute Setup.exe.
on workstation
7. Install SQL Server 2000 Data
Transformation Services (DTS)
runtime if you want to use the Data
Migration utility or an export
accounting interface
If you installed SQL Server 2008 Express R2 from
the CPSQL Prerequisites, DTS is already installed.
If you installed SQL Server 2008 R2 from a different
source, visit Microsoft’s website to download SQL
Server 2000 Data Transformation Services.
If you installed SQL Server 2012, DTS is not
available.
8. Install Counterpoint Service Pack, if
available
After SP is installed on server, next user who starts
Counterpoint at a workstation will be asked to autoinstall service pack.
Administrative rights are NOT required to install a
service pack on a workstation.
Installation Permissions for NCR Counterpoint
New Install or New Release
Minor Release or
Service Pack
Installing NCR Counterpoint
Server
System Administrator
System Administrator
1-7
Workstation
System Administrator
Any Counterpoint user
07/07/15
Installing Counterpoint Prerequisites on a Server
Install SSE or MSSQL Server software (Optional)
A database engine must be installed before Counterpoint can be installed or used. You can use
MSSQL 2012 or 2008, or if you do not install MSSQL, you will be prompted to install SQL
Server 2008 Express R2 when you install the prerequisites on your server. SQL Server 2008
Express R2 is supplied with Counterpoint’s Prerequisites.
To begin the installation process, exit all Windows programs, then install the MSSQL you want
to use. Keep in mind:

When you install SQL Server, choose Mixed Mode as your server’s
Authentication method.

Make sure the SQL Server service is running on your server before deploying
Counterpoint. To start the service, click Start/All Programs/Microsoft SQL
Server/Configuration Tools/SQL Server Configuration Manager. Open the SQL
Server Service. Right-click the service, then select Start

If you intend to install SQL Server 2008 Express R2 on your server, select
Start/Settings/Control Panel, double-click Add or Remove Programs, select
Microsoft SQL Server Native Client, click the Remove button, and then click Yes
from the confirmation dialog.
Install Counterpoint Prerequisites
The Counterpoint Prerequisites installer will install the following required components:
 Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1
 Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0
 Microsoft SQL Server Native Client
 SQL Server Management Objects
 SQLXML4
 SQL Server 2008 or 2012 Shared Management Objects (SMO)
 SQL Server 2008 or 2012 System CLR Types
Additionally, if you have not yet installed a default instance of Microsoft SQL Server, you will be
prompted to install SQL Server 2008 Express R2.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-8
07/07/15
Installing Counterpoint Prerequisites on a Server
For 32-bit systems
If you will install SQL Server 2008 Express R2 during the prerequisites install, make sure you
have removed Microsoft SQL Server Native Client from your server.
For 32-bit and 64-bit systems
Log into your server as Administrator.
Download the Complete Counterpoint file from the Software Downloads section of the Partner
portal to your server’s local hard drive.
In the CPSQLPrereqs folder, right-click CPSQLPrerequisites.exe and select Run as
administrator.
The Installing Windows Setup Files dialog
screen may appear. Click OK to install the
required components. Restart your server if
prompted to do so.
After restarting, if the prerequisites installation
doesn't automatically restart, return to your
download files, and double-click
CPSQLPrerequisites.exe to restart the
Counterpoint Prerequisites installer.
Click Next at the Welcome
screen.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-9
07/07/15
Installing Counterpoint Prerequisites on a Server
Choose whether this is a Standalone Server
or a Multi-Site Server.
If a default instance of SQL Server 2008
Express R2 is not detected on your system,
the SQL Server 2008 dialog will prompt you
to install SQL Server 2008 Express R2.
If SQL Server 2008 or 2012 is not already
installed (as a named instance), select to
install the 2008 R2 Express edition and then
click Next.
Click Next on the Start Installation window.
If you selected to install SQL Server 2008 Express R2, SQL Server 2008 Express R2 and SQL
Server Management Studio Express will be installed automatically.
Other prerequisites installed are:
 Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1
 Microsoft SQL Server Native Client
 SQLXML4
 SQL Server CLR Types
 Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0
 SQL Server Management Objects
 SQL Server 2008 or 2012 Shared
Management Objects
If you are running on a server operating system and .NET
3.5 SP1 is not already installed, a message appears that
you will need to use Server Manager to install .NET 3.5
SP1.
After using Server Manager to install it, run
CPSQLPrerequisites.exe again.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-10
07/07/15
When the Prerequisites install has
completed, the Installation Complete
window appears. Click Finish to close the
Installer.
A .log file for each installed SQL Server Express component is generated in the \Program
Files\Microsoft SQLServer\90\Setup Bootstrap\LOG\Files subdirectory of your local drive..
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-11
07/07/15
Configuring for Remote Connections: SQL 2008/2012
Follow these steps to configure your SQL 2008 or SQL 2012 server to allow remote connections
using both the TCP/IP and named pipes protocols.
1. On your server, click Start and select All Programs/Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 (or
2012)/ Configuration Tools/SQL Server Configuration Manager.
a) In the SQL Server Configuration Manager (Local) tree, click SQL Native Client
10.0 Configuration, and then double-click Client Protocols.
b) Right-click the Shared Memory protocol in the Name column and click Disable.
c) Verify that the TCP/IP and Named Pipes protocols are Enabled.
Remote encrypted
communications
Local unencrypted
communications
d) Repeat steps 2 through 4 for the SQL Server Network Configuration branch and, if
present, the SQL Native Client 10.0 Configuration (32-bit) branch.
If you made any changes, right-click SQL Server Services and select Restart.
Close the SQL Server Configuration Manager window. .
2. Select All Programs/ Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 (or 2012)/SQL Server
Management Studio.
a) Right-click your server name in the Object Explorer and select Facets.
b) Select Surface Area Configuration from the Facets list.
c) Under Facet Properties, set the following facets to True:
AdHocRemoteQueriesEnabled
ClrIntegrationEnabled
OleAutomationEnabled
RemoteDacEnabled
XPCmdShellEnabled
Click OK to save your changes and close the View Facets window.
3. For SQL Server 2012, grant the NT AUTHORITY\SYSTEM login sysadmin rights to your
server.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-12
07/07/15
a) Expand Security and then Logins in the Object Explorer.
b) Right-click the NT AUTHORITY\SYSTEM
login and select Properties.
c) Select Server Roles and enable the
sysadmin check box.
4. For Windows 8.1, your Windows login must also have sysadmin rights to your server.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-13
07/07/15
Installing NCR Counterpoint on a Server
Install NCR Counterpoint Files
After installing the Prerequisites, you are ready to install NCR Counterpoint.
Start the SQL service on your server if you plan to install either Demo Data or Starter Data.
Browse your Counterpoint download file. Right-click Setup.exe and select Run as
administrator.
After reading the Welcome dialog, click
Next.
The Software License Agreement window
displays. After reading the Counterpoint
Software License Agreement, click Agree
and then click Next to continue the
installation.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-14
07/07/15
Installing NCR Counterpoint on a Server
Enter the folder where you want
Counterpoint installed. CPSQL.1 appears
as the default folder name.
The default installation path
(C:\Program Files(x86)\Radiant Systems\
CounterPoint) is shown near the top of this
window.
To use a different installation path, you will
need to set the CPPath environment
variable before installing Counterpoint.
To set the CP Path environment variable:
1. Right-click My Computer and select Properties.
2. Select the Advanced tab and click the Environment Variables button.
3. Under System variables, click New.
4. Enter CPPath in the Variable name field and enter the path you want to use for
Counterpoint installations (e.g., D:\Counterpoint) in the Variable value field.
5. Click OK to close the New System Variable dialog, and then click OK to save your
changes and close the Environment Variables dialog.
Check the I am updating from a previous version check box to update from an existing
V8.4.6 Counterpoint installation.
Click Next to continue.
If you checked the I am updating
from a previous version check box,
select from the detected previous
Counterpoint installations.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-15
07/07/15
Installing NCR Counterpoint on a Server
Enable the Update Company database(s)
to the newer version? check box if you
want the installation process to update your
existing Counterpoint databases to the new
version.
If you plan to manually update the databases
or create entirely new databases for the new
version, leave the check box blank.
Refer to Manually Updating Your Databases
later in this section for instructions on how to
do this.
Select the Primary Server (WAN or
Standalone) as the server role.
Specify whether the server will support
offline workstations.
Supply a friendly name for the server. Use
a unique name on each Multi-Site server.
Click Next to continue the installation.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-16
07/07/15
Installing NCR Counterpoint on a Server
Select the components you want to install
on this server.
Select to install Application Files and at
least one set of data. You cannot select
both Starter Data and Pre-attached
Database.
If you select Pre-attached Database, you
will be prompted for the name of that
database later in the installation process.
Click Next.
If you chose to install Demo Data, the
Demo Data Database Name dialog
appears.
Enter the Database Name (without spaces
or special characters;do not start the name
with a number) and Company Name that
you want to use.
Click Next to use the default names.
NOTE: Later, when you start Counterpoint
for the TestGolf database, login with
User ID MGR and Workgroup 1.
If you chose to install Starter Data, the
New Company Database Name dialog
appears.
Enter a unique Database Name and
Company Name to use for the company
within Counterpoint.
Click Next.
NOTE: Use only letters and numbers in the
Database Name, without spaces, periods,
other punctuation marks, or special
characters, and do not start the name with
a number.
NOTE: Log in to the Starter Data company with User ID MGR and Workgroup 1.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-17
07/07/15
Installing NCR Counterpoint on a Server
Enter the name of the Start Menu
Program Group to which you want to
add the Counterpoint application and
utilities.
The Start Installation dialog
summarizes your installation choices.
Click Next to begin installing
NCR Counterpoint.
Specify the location of your SQL Server:
a. This computer
b. Other computer
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-18
07/07/15
Installing NCR Counterpoint on a Server
Select Other computer if SQL Server is
installed as a named instance (e.g.,
<ServerName>\<InstanceName>), or on a
different server than the one on which you
are installing Counterpoint.
If you selected Other computer, enter the
name of your SQL server (with
\<InstanceName> if it’s not the default
instance).
If your SQL server is only configured to use
Windows Authentication, select the
Windows Authentication check box.
If the SQL server is configured for mixed
mode authentication, you can instead enter
your SQL User ID (sa) and Password
(CounterPoint8).
If you selected This computer and your default
instance is SQL Server 2005, you are notified that it
is no longer supported.
Click
or
to cancel the
installation so that you can upgrade to a newer
version of SQL Server.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-19
07/07/15
Installing NCR Counterpoint on a Server
If you selected This computer and your
default instance, as well as other named
instance(s) are supported versions of SQL
Server, you'll need to select the instance of
SQL Server to use.
If your SQL server is only configured to use
Windows Authentication, select the
Windows Authentication check box.
If the SQL server is configured for mixed
mode authentication, you can instead enter
your SQL User ID (sa) and Password
(CounterPoint8).
Confirm the path to your SQL Server data
files. In most cases, you should accept the
default.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-20
07/07/15
Installing NCR Counterpoint on a Server
If you selected the Pre-attached Database
check box on the Select Components dialog,
choose the database you want to deploy.
Select your company database from the list of
attached SQL Server databases, specify a
"friendly" Company Alias for the database,
and then click Next.
As each of the Counterpoint components is
installed, the progress indicators show the
percentage of completion.
NCR CP Services are then automatically started,
shortcuts are created and folder permissions are
set.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-21
07/07/15
Installing NCR Counterpoint on a Server
A pre-attached database is then provisioned. You can expect this step to take about 10 minutes.
When the server installation is completed, a message appears and provides the port number
that was selected for CP Services.
This section of the
message appears only if
you specified the server
will be supporting offline
workstations.
Make sure this port is open on your firewall, and then close your browser to return to the
Counterpoint installer.
If you are using the Offline Ticket Entry Option, configure your server's firewall to allow access
to the indicated CPServices port via a VPN connection.
When you close the message, the
Installation Complete window appears.
Select Create shortcut on desktop if
you want to add a Counterpoint shortcut
on the server.
Then click Finish to close the window.
When you finish installing NCR
Counterpoint, use SQL Server
Management Studio 2008 R2 to change
the default SSE SQL Password for the
"sa" user.
NOTE: When you install a server, workstation software is automatically installed on that system.
If you are running on a standalone machine, you have everything you need to run Counterpoint.
To install Counterpoint on a separate workstation from the server, you will need to run
ClientSetup.exe (follow the instructions for installing a workstation).
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-22
07/07/15
Manually Updating Your Databases
If you chose to not have Counterpoint
automatically update your V8.4 databases
during the server installation, you can
update them manually yourself when you
are ready.
1. After you have installed Counterpoint V8.5 on the server, use the V8.5 System
Configuration Utility to build a connection string to the database.
2. Start the Counterpoint SQL Script Utility and select the Alias-Company that you want
updated.
3. Load the ServicePackUpdateFor8.4.sql script from the V8.5 Scripts folder and
execute it.
4. Load the UpdateFrom8.4.sql script from the V8.5 Scripts folder and execute it.
5. Load the MSPredefinedData.sql script from the V8.5 Scripts folder and execute it.
6. Provision the database by running the Provision Database utility.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-23
07/07/15
Starting NCR Counterpoint Services on the Server
Before you set up your workstations, you must make sure that the NCR Counterpoint
Services (NCR CP Services) is running on your server.
To ensure that NCR CP Services is running on the server:
On your server, select Start/Programs/NCR Counterpoint/Utilities/Configure Local
Services to show the Configure Local Services dialog. It will show each instance of CP
Services that is installed on the server.
The Status column should indicate that CP Services is Running. If CP Services is
Stopped, click the Start link to start the service.
You can also view details for CP Services by clicking the Service link.
Note: You can only use the Configure Local Services utility to start, stop and access details of
CP Services for the associated version of Counterpoint.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-24
07/07/15
Installing Prerequisites on a Workstation
Before installing Counterpoint on a workstation, the Counterpoint Prerequisites must be installed
on the workstation.
Browse the Counterpoint download files and copy the \CPSQLPrereqs folder to your server.
Log on to the workstation as an
Administrator.
Navigate to the CPSQLPrereqs folder
on the server.
Right-click CPSQLPrerequisites.exe
and select Run as administrator.
Select whether the workstation is a
Non Offline or Offline Workstation.
After reading the Welcome dialog, click Next to proceed with the installation.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-25
07/07/15
Installing Prerequisites on a Workstation
The Start Installation dialog appears.
Click Next.
The Installation Complete dialog
appears after all prerequisites are
installed.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-26
07/07/15
Installing NCR Counterpoint on a Workstation
Workstation Setup
Perform these steps at each workstation. These instructions are for a Non-Offline workstation.
Login as the system administrator.
Browse to the Counterpoint installation folder on the server (e.g., C:\Program Files\Radiant
Systems\CounterPoint\CPSQL.1). Right-click ClientSetup.exe and select Run as
administrator.
CP Services must be running on the server and you must be able to talk to the server through
CP Services to proceed with the installation.
Click Next at the Welcome window.
If the workstation has a fast connection to
your Counterpoint server (i.e., they are on
the same local area network), select the
High-speed network connection option
from the Choose Server Connection
window.
Then specify (or Browse to) the
Counterpoint folder on your server.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-27
07/07/15
If the workstation has a slower connection
to the server (i.e., they are not on the
same network), select the Low-speed
network connection option.
You'll then be asked for the name of the
Counterpoint server and the server's CP
Services port number
At the Select Role window, select the
Never Offline option to indicate that the
workstation will not be using offline ticket
entry.
Select the components that you want to
install on the workstation.
You must install the Program Files on
every workstation.
Select to install Utilities only if the
workstation is used by the system
administrator (these utilities allow
unrestricted access to the database).
Select to install Dashboard if the
workstation will be used to view
Dashboard data.
Click Next to continue.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-28
07/07/15
The Select Server Alias window will
appear if multiple company databases are
located on the server.
Select the company that this workstation
will be associated with.
Click Next to continue.
The Select Start Menu Program
Group window appears.
Specify the Start Menu Program group to
which the Counterpoint icons will be added.
For the first installation of Counterpoint on
a computer, the default group is
NCR Counterpoint.
If Counterpoint has been installed on this
computer before, the default group is the
one you used last time.
Click Next after selecting the group.
The Start Installation dialog shows an
installation summary. The same path is
used for the workstation installation as was
used for the server with “-Station”
appended.
Click Next to begin the installation of
Counterpoint on the workstation.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-29
07/07/15
When the Installation Complete dialog
appears, select whether you want a shortcut
for Counterpoint to be created on the desktop
of this workstation.
If you have an Internet connection on the
workstation, you can select to view the
Release Notes.
Click Finish to exit the workstation setup
program.
Additional Workstation Components
There are some additional components that you may want to install on a workstation.
Perfect Keyboard
If you want to use the “keyboard macro” program on the workstation, run Setup.exe from the
3rdParty\Perfect Keyboard folder on the Counterpoint download.
SQL Server 2005 Backward Compatibility
To use the Data Migration utility or an export accounting interface on the workstation, you will
need the DTS 2000 Runtime (automatically installs if you install SQL Server 2008 Express R2
when installing CP Prerequisites). Otherwise, you can download it from Microsoft’s website.
SQL Server Management Studio Express
Install this to use a graphical interface for managing the Counterpoint offline database on an
offline workstation. This function automatically installs if you install SQL Server 2008 Express
R2 when installing CP Prerequisites on the workstation. Otherwise, you can download it from
Microsoft’s website.
This completes the installation on a workstation.
NOTE: To set up a WAN (Wide Area Network), refer to the Installation Guide.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-30
07/07/15
Configuring Workstation Connection

Use CLICONFG to configure protocols that workstations use to
communicate through the network to the SQL Server

Ships with Windows

Needed for client application (Counterpoint on the workstation)

32-bit version vs 64-bit version:
64 bit: C:\Windows\System32\cliconfg.exe
32 bit: C:\Windows\SysWOW64\cliconfg.exe
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-31
07/07/15
Installing Service Packs
Service Packs

Cumulative updates to NCR Counterpoint programs and utilities

Users can sign up to receive automatic email notification of new Service Packs at
https://userportal.counterpointpos.com/support/software_cpsql.htm

Download CPSP85.EXE.ZIP from the partner web site or the user portal at
www.userportal.counterpointpos.com/support/software_cpsql.html
(must be a current CSS subscriber to access support area of user portal)

Unzip, right-click CPSP85.EXE and select "Run as administrator" to install on
server

Installs logs into Counterpoint Help folder on server
- CPSQLSPLOG.html (corrected problems)
Read this log to see:
- problems corrected
- enhancements added
- scripts you need to run manually
- CPSQLRPLOG.html (reported problems)

Automatically applies ServicePackUpdateFor8.5.sql script to all databases with
Counterpoint connection strings

If required, provisions all databases with Counterpoint connection strings

Service Pack automatically applied to workstation the next time Counterpoint is
started on the workstation

Offline workstation is automatically updated if it has a connection to server

For Offline workstation (e.g., “Always Offline”) without connection to server,
manually run CPSP85.EXE on workstation.
Counterpoint Version numbers
Examples
Initial release of a new version
Service pack (“hotfix”)
Service pack
Minor release #1
Service pack
8.5
8.5.0.1
8.5.0.2
8.5.1
8.5.1.1
Version is visible in Help>About Counterpoint
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-32
07/07/15
Version Controls
Program versions must match between workstations and server
Control File
CounterPoint.ini
(in Bin)
On Server
On Workstation
Build date
Software version #
Expected DB Version
Build date
Software version #
Expected database version #
Expected System DB Version #
Expected System database
version #
[Server]
TopLevel=C:\Program Files
(x86)\Radiant Systems\
CounterPoint\CPSQL.1\TopLevel
[Server]
TopLevel=C:\Program Files
(x86)\Radiant Systems\
CounterPoint\CPSQL.1\TopLevel
DB_CTL.SHARED_DIR Value of SHARED_DIR must match “TopLevel" path value in
(in database)
Counterpoint.ini on workstation
If TopLevel path and SHARED_DIR values do not match, you will see this error
message after selecting a company when starting Counterpoint.
Resetting the shared directory value in database
Use the SQL Script Utility on the server to enter and execute this command for the
database:
UPDATE DB_CTL SET SHARED_DIR = NULL
This clears the Shared directory value in the DB_CTL table.
The next time Counterpoint is started using the database, the current path to the server’s
Counterpoint TopLevel directory will be updated to the DB_CTL table.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-33
07/07/15
CPSystem Database

One system database per Counterpoint instance

Named CPSystem_<CPInstanceName> (e.g., CPSystem_CPSQL.1)

Used to store CPServices session information needed for zooms, scheduled tasks, and
offline ticket entry packages for each company

Created by Counterpoint Install during a new server install or an upgrade

Created on same SQL server as company database

Don't move to a different system (e.g, when moving a company database)

Cannot import or export data in CPSystem Database using CP utilities

SQL user must have Sys Admin permissions to create or update system database

SQL passwords for the CPSystem database does not expire (PCI regulations do not
require password expiration rules to apply to SQL database logins)

Database maintenance plans should include CPSystem database
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-34
07/07/15
Folders and File Locations
Server Folders
Folder
Contents / Comments
C:\Program Files \ Radiant Systems \ CounterPoint \ CPSQL.1
Bin
Contains all Counterpoint binaries
ClientSetup.exe
Counterpoint Workstation installation program
Custom
Custom schema scripts and Rules files (Multi-Site server)
Deployment
Contains Multi-Site configuration file
Help
Created after downloading and extracting Online Help file
Logs
Contains all logs for NCR CP Services. CPLogs folder contains
installation and CP logs. Ingenico folder contains Ingenico API logs.
Packages
CP Services work area
Scripts
Pre-defined .sql scripts
SoftwareUpdates
Used during installation of service packs
Temp
Temporary work area for CP Services and related DLL’s
TopLevel
Top-level server directory – contains company directories and
system files
TopLevelCache
Up-to-date copies of system-defined data dictionary files
Tutorials
Training lessons on using Counterpoint
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-35
07/07/15
Folders and File Locations
Server TopLevel Folders
Folder
Contents / Comments
C:\Program Files \ Radiant Systems \ CounterPoint \ CPSQL.1 \ TopLevel
Programs used to set up dial-up electronic draft capture for CP Gateway
CPDialup
<Company Alias>
Activity
CPOnline Online store capabilities
Export Files exported using System/Utilities/Database Export
Import Files imported using System/Utilities/Database Import
SavedReports User-selected saved reports
Statements A/R Customer statements, if “Save copies to disk” enabled
TicketPerformanceTest Results from the Ticket Performance Test utility
Configuration
Accounting User-packages for custom export accounting systems
Actions User-defined external actions for toolbars
CustomerImages User-loaded customer images
CustomForms User-defined .xml files used in Data Dictionary layout forms
CustomHelp User-defined online help files
Devices User-saved .xml files of device configuration
Provisioning
POS and SS folder created as a result of provisioning database
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-36
07/07/15
Folder
Contents / Comments
Dictionary Customized Dictionary files: Columns, Tables, Filters, Indexes, Lookups,
Toolbars, Messages, Zooms
HTML User-defined html layouts for ticket entry tabs and totals
Images User-loaded touchscreen button images
ItemImages User-loaded item images
Labels User-defined label files and queries
PSForms User-customized Point of Sale forms
QuickReports User-customized Quick Reports
Reports User-customized reports in Crystal .rpt format
Upgrade User-customized DTS packages for upgrade process
Zooms User-customized zoom style sheets
System
Accounting DTS packages for pre-defined exhaccounting systems
Actions External actions for toolbar buttons
CustomForms Pre-defined .xml files used for Simplified Add-on-the-fly for Items and
Customers
CustomHelp Template for using custom online help files
Devices
.xml, .icg, and .hex setup files for hardware bundles and Certified
devices
Dictionary System Dictionary files: Columns, Tables, Filters, Indexes, Lookups,
Toolbars, Messages, Zooms
HTML HTML layouts for ticket entry tabs and totals
Images .bmp files for buttons and touchscreen
Labels Pre-defined label files and label queries
PSForms Standard forms in .xml,.rpt, and .rdlc formats, such as:
Receipt1
SalesDraft1
SalesDraft2
PickingTicket1
Order1
PayInOut1
Invoice1
Layaway1
Receipt1TM-T88
Quick Reports Pre-defined quick reports
Reports Counterpoint ‘standard’ reports in Crystal format (*.rpt)
SMP Terminal ID’s when using CMP for draft capture
Upgrade DTS packages for upgrading data into Counterpoint
Zooms Pre-defined style sheets used in system zooms for customers, items,
locations, stores, users, vendors, purchase orders, A/R documents,
store credits, gift cards, serial numbers
SQLVersions.csv Various version numbers of MSSQL
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-37
07/07/15
Updating to a New Release
Review the Update Guide prior to installing a new release of NCR Counterpoint (e.g.,
moving from Version 8.4 to Version 8.5).
Browse to the Help/Update_Guide folder in your Counterpoint download file and doubleclick Update_Guide.htm.
The guide will provide:
Pre-update steps
Things you need to do before installing the new release
Update steps
How to update Counterpoint and your database(s) to the
new version
Post-update steps
Things you need to do after updating Counterpoint and
your database(s) to the new version.
Note: Download updated Registration.ini before installing a new release (e.g., V8.4,
V8.5, V8.6) on a customer’s existing Counterpoint system.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-38
07/07/15
Sequence for Creating a New Company Database
The NCR Counterpoint installation requires that you install some type of database when the
software is installed. It can be demo data, Starter data, or a pre-attached database.
After the software is installed, you can choose to set up a new company database for use with
NCR Counterpoint – apart from the software installation.
To create a new company database “from scratch”, perform these five steps after the database
engine (MSSQL or SSE) and NCR Counterpoint are both installed.
In a Multi-Site environment, perform all of these steps only on the Hub server.
1
Start the database engine
Start MSSQL Service Manager or SSE at the server or workstation where the
new database will reside.
2
Create a new SQL database
At the server or workstation, use SQL Server Management Studio to create a new
SQL database. If run at the server, the database can be shared by all
workstations. If run at a workstation, the database is local for that workstation.
On a multi-user system, you may want to create a separate database user for
each user who will access the database.
3
Set the connection string for NCR Counterpoint to the database
Run the Counterpoint SQL Script Utility or the System Configuration Utility to set
the connection string for the database between Counterpoint and the SQL
database server.
4
Create the tables, columns, and index structure for the database
Start the Counterpoint SQL Script Utility and execute the mssql.sql script that
establishes the Counterpoint table, column, and index structures for the empty
database.
5
Import pre-defined forms, reports, label jobs and aggregation tasks into
company’s database
Start the Counterpoint SQL Script Utility and execute the msPredefinedData.sql
script.
Or run System>Utilities>Pre-defined Data after starting Counterpoint.
Repeat steps 2 – 5 for each additional company.
Note: If you are building a database on your system and then moving it to your customer’s
system, the MSSQL versions MUST match.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-39
07/07/15
Creating a New Company Database
1. Start the database engine.
To start the SQL server service,
select Start > Programs >
Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 >
Configuration Tools > SQL Server
Configuration Manager.
Click SQL Server Services.
Then right-click the SQL Server
service, and select Start.
2. Create a new SQL database.
At the server, use SQL Server Management Studio to create a new SQL database. Click
Start > Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 > SQL Server Management
Studio Express.
On the Connect to Server dialog,
select SQL Server Authentication
at the Authentication field, enter
sa in the User name field, and then
enter your Password for the sa
user (CounterPoint8).
Click Connect .
NOTE: You can change the default SQL Password in SQL Server Management Studio
by expanding the Security > Logins folder in the Object Explorer, double-clicking the
sa login, and then entering a new password in the Password and Confirm password
fields.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-40
07/07/15
In the Object Explorer, right-click the Databases folder, and then select the New
database option to display the New Database window.
Enter the Database name you want to use for
your Counterpoint database. For example, if
your company is named Counterpoint
Training, Inc., you might use Training as your
database name.
(Use only letters and numbers in the database
name, and avoid starting the name with a
number.)
Click OK to create the new database.
After the database is created, select Exit from
the File menu to close SSMSE.
3. Set the connection string for Counterpoint to the database.
To access data in a database, Counterpoint points to a database using a “connection
string”. This connection string is referenced through an “alias”.
Counterpoint uses the name you assign as the alias and the associated company name
to refer to the database.
Select Start > Programs > NCR Counterpoint > Utilities > SQL Script Utility
or Start > Programs > NCR Counterpoint > Utilities > System Configuration Utility.
For the SQL Script Utility
Select File > Companies Editor or click the Companies Editor icon
beside the Alias-Company column to display the Company Names window.
For the System Configuration Utility
Click the Companies button to display the Company Names window.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-41
07/07/15
From the Company Names Window, click
to add a new company.
Enter the database name in the Alias field and the company name in the
Company field. Both the Alias and Company Name you select must be unique.
The Company name will appear in the Select a Company window when
Counterpoint is started.
Click the blank Connection String column twice to display the ellipsis button.
Click that button to open the Data Link Properties window.
Select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL
Server on the Provider tab.
Click Next.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-42
07/07/15
The Connection tab now appears. Enter information on this tab as follows:
1. Select or enter the SQL server name:
Enter the SQL server name (without \\) that the
database is attached to.
<SQL Server name>
2. Enter information to log on to the server:
Select “Use Windows NT Integrated security” if
using Windows Authentication.
If not using Windows Authentication, select “Use a
specific user name and password”. For SSE, the
default “User name” is sa and the “Password” is
CounterPoint8 (case sensitive).
Enable Allow saving password.
3. Select the database on the server: Select the database to associate with this
alias.
Click
to verify the connection and then click OK.
Click OK to close the Data Link
Properties form. The
Company Names window
displays with your new alias.
Click Save on the Company
Names window to save the new
company settings.
These settings are saved in a text file (Companies.ini) in the top-level
Counterpoint directory.
Click OK to exit Company Names.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-43
07/07/15
4. Create the tables, columns, and index structures for the database.
At the server or workstation, start the SQL Script Utility and execute the mssql.sql script
that creates the Counterpoint tables, columns, and index structures in the database.
Select Start > Programs > NCR Counterpoint > SQL Script Utility
Select File > Open and open the file CPSQL.1 > Scripts > MSSQL.SQL. The script
displays in the Script tab.
In the Alias-Company dropdown box,
select the company name that you
created when setting the connection
string in the previous step (e.g.,
CampGolfTraining).
Click
or select Script/Execute to run this script for the selected database.
When the Login Information box displays, enter your SQL Login ID and password
(e.g. “sa” and “CounterPoint8” for SSE, or leave both fields blank if using Windows NT
Integrated security.)
Click OK when prompted to confirm creation of the new database.
When the script finishes successfully, an information message displays the total number
of statements that were executed.
5. Import pre-defined forms, reports, label jobs and aggregation tasks into your
company’s database.
Select File > Open and open the file CPSQL.1 > Scripts > msPredefinedData.sql.
Execute this script for the same database.
Or run System > Utilities > Pre-defined Data after you start Counterpoint and select
the company.
Exit the SQL Script Utility when completed.
This completes creating a new company database. You will now be able to select this database
by its company name whenever you start NCR Counterpoint.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-44
07/07/15
Additional SQL Settings
Configure SQL Memory

How much memory should be allocated to SQL Server
Start SQL Server Management Studio.
Right-click the server name and select
Properties.
On the Server Properties window,
select Memory.
Not necessary to
enable on
SQL 2008 R2 or
SQL 2012 servers.
By default, Microsoft sets the
Maximum server memory to 2 TB
which is usually much higher than
necessary.
Set Maximum server memory to the
value per the below table, and set
Minimum server memory to ½ of the
maximum value.
Set it to less than 90% of the memory on a dedicated SQL Server.
Total RAM
on server
RAM for
Oper System
RAM for
RAM for
Counterpoint SQL Server
4 GB
2 GB
.5 GB
1 - 1.5 GB
6 GB
2.5 GB
1 GB
2.5 GB
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-45
7/7/2015
Additional SQL Settings
Configure SQL Processors
On the Server Properties window, select
Processors.
Enable "Boost SQL Server priority" only
when using a dedicated SQL server
that's a single instance of SQL Server.
With multiple instances of SQL Server on
the same system or for a non-dedicated
server, you should let SQL manage itself.
Configure SQL Database Settings
On the Server Properties
window, select
Database Settings.
Default locations of .mdf
and .ldf files that are
used when attaching
new databases.
If using RAID5 or
RAID10 drives (see
Server Sizing Guide),
these files should be
located on a different RAID than the operating system and TempDB files.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-46
7/7/2015
Additional SQL Settings: Database-Specific
Configure Size and Growth of Database Files
In SQL Server Management Studio, right-click the
database name and select Properties.
Then select Files.
Autogrowth
You should change the default Autogrowth settings.
These settings determine how much additional size will be added to the database when
it exceeds the initial size. Each time the database has to grow, SQL pauses and queues
your transactions while it expands the file.
An average database starts at about 100 MB. With a regular volume of transactions, the
.mdf file will grow about 2 MB each day. With medium volume, it might grow about 30
MB each day.
For smaller customers, increase the autogrowth
value to 100 MB for the data.
For larger customers, consider setting it to
500 MB or even 1000 MB.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-47
7/7/2015
Initial Size of Log File
The autogrowth setting for the log file (.ldf) needs to also be changed. In addition, the
Initial Size of the log file may need to be modified.
To determine if it's necessary to increase the Initial Size, after the database has been
used for about 15 – 30 days, execute the query dbcc loginfo against the database.
The results show the number of logical files that were built as the log file needed to
grow. Each file with a CreateLSN name (LSN=log sequence number) other than 0 is a
result of growing the log file, and represents a SQL inefficiency. Ideally, there should be
less than 250 logical files.
The sum of the file sizes for all of the log files is a good starting point for the initial size of
the log file. Make note of the sum.
Before changing the Initial Size value, shrink the log file when no one is in Counterpoint
by executing the query dbcc shrinkfile (2,0).
Then return to the Files settings of the Database Properties window, and set the Initial
Size value of the log file to the sum of the log files. The log file will autogrow only if it
needs to exceed the Initial Size value.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-48
7/7/2015
Modify Options for the Database
In SQL Server Management Studio, right-click the database name and select
Properties.
Then select
Options.
Recovery Model
The Simple recovery model only keeps very basic logs, without transactional data.
To recover to a point in time, change this to a Full recovery model. With a Full recovery
model, Counterpoint writes a log file every time it writes to the database.
Note that the Recovery Model determines only whether the current day's transactions
are recorded in a recoverable file, and acts only as a supplement to the regular backups
done each night.
Compatibility Level
Change the compatibility level to SQL Server 2012 (110) or SQL Server 2008 (100) if
only SQL Server 2012 or SQL Server 2008 R2 is on the system. SQL Server will
manage databases better and run more efficiently at the dedicated compatibility levels.
If you have both SQL Server 2012 and SQL Server 2008 R2 installed on the system,
leave the compatibility level at SQL Server 2008.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-49
7/7/2015
Auto Create Statistics
Auto Update Statistics
Set both of these values to True. They play a part when updating statistics in the
database, which should be part of your SQL maintenance plan for a database.
It's not necessary to change any of the other settings under Automatic.
Page Verify
If using SQL Server 2012 or 2008 R2, change the Page Verify value to CHECKSUM.
The Page Verify value is used if you run dbcc checkdb to check the integrity of all
objects in the database, and has a better chance of catching a problem if it's set to
CHECKSUM for these versions of SQL Server. The integrity check will also identify
errors caused by SQL viruses.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-50
7/7/2015
Additional Installation Information
Changing the SQL password for a user
You can change the SQL Password for a user using SQL Server Management Studio.
a)
Start SQL Server Management Studio by selecting Start / Program / Microsoft
SQL Server / SQL Server Management Studio. Login to connect to the server.
b)
Expand the appropriate SQL server in
the Object Explorer so that you see
Security.
c)
Expand Security and select Logins.
d)
Right-click the name whose password
you want to change and select
Properties.
e)
Enter the new password and
confirm the password by
entering it again.
Click
when done to
save the change.
Note: If you used the same SQL user in your Counterpoint connection string, also use
the Counterpoint System Configuration Utility to change the password.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-51
7/7/2015
Setting Up New SQL Users
If you set up your own SQL users, you will need to set the following permissions and
authorizations in SQL.
The permissions are automatically set for any SQL user created by Counterpoint V8.5.
You will need to set these permissions manually for SQL users created in older version
of Counterpoint.
View Server State
In SQL Management Studio, right-click the server name, and select Properties.
Select Permissions and the user login/role for which you want to grant the
permission.
In the Permissions for CPSQL window at the bottom, enable Grant for View
server state.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-52
7/7/2015
db_datareader
db_datawriter
db_ddladmin
Database role membership
In the Object Explorer, expand Logins.
Right-click the user name and select
Properties.
Click User Mapping.
Select to map each Counterpoint database the user will need to access (including the
Counterpoint CPSystem database), and then enable the db_datareader,
db_datawriter, and db_ddladmin permissions for the database.
The public permission is already automatically selected.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-53
7/7/2015
Forcing Login to a Specific Company
To restrict which company a workstation can log into
Right-click the desktop
shortcut for Counterpoint
and select Properties
Add /alias aliasname
to the end of the target
command.
aliasname is the
Alias for the company
as defined in the
Counterpoint
connection string.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-54
07/07/15
Viewing Environment Settings
Select System > Views > Environment Settings

Use to view current codes and versions in effect on a workstation

Click
in TopLevel folder)
to save file containing environmental setting details (saved
Identification tab
Contains information about Counterpoint, the
company name, and the URI for CP Services
User tab
Contains information about the user who is
logged in to Counterpoint on this workstation.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-55
07/07/15
Viewing Environment Settings
Database tab
Contains information about the database that the
user is logged in to on this workstation.
Database Size tab
Contains information about the size of the
database that the user is logged in to on this
workstation.
System tab
Contains information about the computer system
that is in use.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-56
07/07/15
Viewing Environment Settings
Versions tab
Contains information about the version of
components used to run Counterpoint, including the
server software, Internet Explorer, Microsoft
Database Access Components, DBISAM, Crystal
runtime, and NiceLabel Engine.
Crystal tab
Contains information about the version and location
of each Crystal runtime and viewer file being used
on this workstation.
Certifications tab
Contains information about Counterpoint
certifications.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-57
07/07/15
Viewing Environment Settings
CPServices tab
Contains information about CP Services.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-58
07/07/15
Viewing Resources and Locks
Select System / Views / Resources and Locks


Use to view Counterpoint resources currently in use
Use to view the locks (i.e., batches, drawers, stations, etc.)
System tab
View information
about the users
who are logged
in to Counterpoint
on the system
Company tab
View company-specific
information about
the users logged into
Counterpoint
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-59
07/07/15
PCI DSS-Compliance Features
NCR provides applications and services that meet or exceed PA-DSS guidelines.
Assessment ensures that NCR Counterpoint conforms to best practices for handling,
management and storage of user accounts, passwords, encryption, and payment-related
information.
Find out what you need to do to be compliant from www.pcisecuritystandards.org or
visit www.counterpointpos.com/pci_compliance.htm for links to compliance information.
Throughout this manual, you will find PCI Alerts contained in special text boxes.
PCI Alert!
Be sure to review the messages that appear in these text boxes to learn more
about PCI DSS compliance.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-60
07/07/15
PCI DSS-Compliance Features: Security Logs
Security.log

Located in Counterpoint installation directory

Entry data includes:
 user ID
 type of event
 name of table or column affected by event
 date and time
 workstation that originated event
 whether event succeeded or failed

Logged events include:
 each attempt to log in to Counterpoint, Ticket Entry, Touchscreen, and
Order Management
 access to cardholder data not in the current transaction
 changes to users related to security
 additions, deletions, and changes to store and station records
SiteServerInstall.log, ClientInstall.log

Located in Logs\CPLogs sub-directory below Counterpoint installation directory

Record of each time Counterpoint is installed, upgraded, or removed from a server or
workstation

Cannot be configured or disabled
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-61
07/07/15
PCI DSS-Compliance Features: Security Logs
Audit access to log files
Must audit access to log files that contain security-related event information. To configure
your Counterpoint server to audit user access to Security.Log:
1. On your Counterpoint server, select Start\Settings\Control Panel, double-click
Administrative Tools, and then double-click Local Security Policy.
2. Under Security Settings in the left-hand pane, double-click Local Policies.
3. Click Audit Policy, and then double-click Audit object access in the right-hand pane.
4. On the Local Security Setting tab, under Audit these attempts, select the Success
check box and the Failure check box.
5. Click OK to save your changes, and then close the Local Security Settings window.
6. Browse to your Counterpoint installation directory (e.g., C:\Program Files\Radiant
Systems\CounterPoint\CPSQL.1).
7. Right-click the SECURITY.LOG file and select Properties.
8. Select the Security tab, click the Advanced button, and then select the Auditing tab.
9. Click the Add button.
10. In the Enter the object name to select field, type the name of a user or user group, and
then click OK.
You can browse for names by clicking Advanced, and then clicking Find Now on the
Select User or Group dialog.
11. On the Auditing Entry for Security.log dialog, select the Successful and Failed check
boxes for each action, and then click OK.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-62
07/07/15
PCI DSS-Compliance Features
Other Related PCI Areas
Cardholder data must not be stored on any system that is directly connected to the public
Internet.Web servers and database servers must not be on the same server.
If you must use Counterpoint on a wireless network:

Firewall must deny or control traffic from wireless into cardholder data environment

Change the default Service Set Identifier (SSID) & disable SSID broadcasting

Perform wireless network management from the console

Include wireless virus signatures in virus protection mechanisms

Install a personal firewall and disable file sharing on each client workstation

Restrict physical access to wireless access points, gateways, and handheld devices

Use one of these encryption methods for wireless transmissions:

VPN

128-bit SSL

LEAP (change keys every 10-30 minutes)

WPA (change default installation keys, rotate shared keys regularly, and change
keys whenever critical personnel change positions or leave the company)
Use of WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is prohibited.

For each wireless access point, implement these security measures:

Update firmware to the latest version on each wireless access point

Enable MAC filtering to restrict wireless access to specific MAC addresses

Change the default password and SNMP community strings

Use a static IP address (not DHCP or a dynamic address)

Locate as close to the center of your facility as possible, to limit the distance
wireless signals must travel

Connect to a switch port (not to a shared media device or hub)

Enable logging/auditing
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-63
07/07/15
PCI DSS-Compliance Features
Remote Access
Remote access to the payment processing environment:

Access should be authenticated using a two-factor authentication mechanism (i.e.,
username/password and an additional authentication item, such as a token or
certificate).

Vendor remote accounts should only be active while access is required to provide
service. Access rights should include only those required for the service rendered and
should be robustly audited.

When using third-party remote access software (e.g., Remote Desktop/Terminal
Services) in the payment processing environment, every session must be encrypted with
at least 128-bit encryption (in addition to the requirement for two-factor authentication
required for users connecting from outside the payment processing environment). For
RDP/Terminal Services, this means using the High encryption setting on the server and
applying the PCI user account and password requirements outlined above.
Additionally, the PCI user account and password requirements previously outlined must
be applied to these access methods.

Change default settings (such as usernames and passwords) on remote access
software (e.g., VNC)

Allow connections only from specific IP and/or MAC addresses

Use strong authentication and complex passwords for logins

Enable encrypted data transmission

Enable account lockouts after six failed login attempts

Require that remote access take place over a VPN via a firewall as opposed to allowing
connections directly from the Internet

Enable logging for auditing purposes

Restrict access to customer passwords to authorized NCR Corporation or NCR Retail
Partner personnel

Establish customer passwords according to PCI DSS Requirements previously outlined
Change Vendor-supplied Default Passwords and Parameters
Most security-related software and hardware include default user IDs and passwords that are well-known
in the hacker community. Make sure you change these default values.
For example, do not use the sa user ID that is installed with Microsoft SQL Server to access your
Counterpoint database. Instead, create a unique user ID with administrative access to your Counterpoint
database by following the instructions included with your version of SQL Server. Further, change the
default sa password from CounterPoint8 to something that meets the PCI DSS guidelines for strong
passwords.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-64
07/07/15
PCI DSS-Compliance Features
Data Transport Encryption
NCR Counterpoint uses an encryption algorithm with 128-bit encryption strength to protect
cardholder data, including card numbers stored in transactions for authorization and settlement,
card numbers stored in customer records, card numbers retained in ticket history, and expiration
dates.
To ensure PCI DSS compliance, you should also implement security protocols such as secure
sockets layer (SSL) / transport layer security (TLS) and Internet protocol security (IPSEC) to
safeguard sensitive cardholder data during transmission over open, public networks.
Special Handling of Authentication Data
If you collect and retain sensitive authentication data (card swipe data, validation values or
codes, PIN or PIN block data) outside of Counterpoint, adhere to these guidelines:





Collect such data only when needed to solve a specific problem
Store the data in specific, known locations with limited access
Collect only the amount of data needed to solve the problem
Encrypt senstive authentication data while its stored
Securely delete the data immediately after use
PCI DSS-compliant Use of End-user Messaging
NCR Counterpoint does not allow or facilitate the sending of card numbers or other sensitive
cardholder data via any end-user messaging technology (e.g., e-mail, instant messaging, and
chat) from within the application.
Never send card numbers or any sensitive cardholder data via e-mail, instant messages, or any
other end-user messaging system. The transmission of unencrypted cardholder data via enduser messaging will result in noncompliance with the PCI DSS.
Secure Distributions of Software Updates
All NCR Counterpoint software updates are digitally signed. To download software updates,
each end user must sign in to the end-user portal using a unique Counterpoint serial number,
while each retail partner must sign into the partner portal with a unique User ID and password.
Non-console administration
We do not support or recommend using non-console administration. However, if you choose to
use non-console administration, you must use SSH, VPN, or SSL/TLS for the encryption of nonconsole administrative access.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-65
07/07/15
PCI DSS-Compliance Features
Capture of Primary Account Numbers
The cardholder’s primary account number (PAN) is temporarily held in memory during a
transaction, so it is possible for an unencrypted PAN to be written to the Windows page file.
To prevent this, complete the following procedures.
A.
Disable the System Protection/Restore feature so that copies of the page page are not
retained on workstations.
Windows 7/8/2008
On each Windows 7/2008 workstation, click Start, right-click Computer and select
Properties.
Click System protection in the left-hand pane to display the System Properties window.
Click
to display the
System Protection window.
Select Turn off system protection.
Apply the changes and then click OK to
close the window.
Restart the workstation.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-66
07/07/15
B.
Encrypt the Windows page file
On each Windows 7/8/2008 workstation, click Start and type cmd in the search box.
Right-click cmd.exe and select Run as
Administrator.
To encrypt the page file, enter: fsutil behavior set EncryptPagingFile 1
Verify the encryption setting by entering: fsutil behavior query EncryptPagingFile
If encryption is enabled, EncryptPagingFile = 1 will appear.
Restart the workstation.
C.
Clear the Windows page file at shutdown
Clearing the page file when the workstation is shut down will purge all temporary data from
the page file, including passwords and any cardholder data that may have been captured.
On each workstation, click Start and type regedit in the search box.
Right-click regedit.exe and select Run
as Administrator.
In the Registry Editor window, locate and click the following registry key:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Session Manager\
Memory Management
Right-click ClearPageFileAtShutdown and select Modify to display the Edit DWORD
Value dialog.
If this value does not exist, select New > DWORD (32-bit) Value from the Edit menu, enter
ClearPageFileAtShutdown to name the new key value, right-click the new value, and
select Modify.
Enter 1 in the Value data field.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-67
07/07/15
Click OK to save your changes and close the Edit DWORD Value window.
Quit the Registry Editor, and then restart the workstation.
D.
Disable automatic management of the Windows page file
Windows 7/8/2008
On each Windows 7/8/2008 workstation, click Start, right-click Computer and select
Properties.
Click Advanced system settings in the left-hand pane to display the System Properties
window.
Under Performance, click Settings to display the
Performance Options window.
On the Performance Options window, switch to
the Advanced tab.
Under Virtual memory, click Change.
Clear the Automatically manage paging file size for
all drives check box.
Select Custom size, and then specify the Initial size
and Maximum size for the page file.
As a rule of thumb, initial size should equal the amount
of RAM the workstation is equipped with, and Maximum
size should be twice this amount.
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-68
07/07/15
Click OK to save your changes and close the Virtual Memory window.
Click OK to close the Performance Options window and click OK again to close the
System Properties window.
Restart the workstation.
E.
Disable Windows error reporting
To prevent capture of PAN data by the operating system, disable Windows error reporting
on your Counterpoint workstations.
Windows 7/8/2008
On each Windows 7/2008 workstation, click Start and click Control Panel.
Click System and Security, click Action Center, and then click Change Action Center
settings in the left-hand pane.
When the Turn messages on or off
page appears, click Problem
reporting settings under Related
settings.
Select Never check for solutions.
Click OK to save your changes, and
then click OK to return to the
Action Center
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-69
07/07/15
Visa Merchant Level Classifications
Visa has established four distinct level classifications for merchants who process Visa
transactions, along with specific validation requirements for each level.
Most NCR Counterpoint merchants can be classified as Level 4 merchants. Level 4
merchants have no validation requirements, but Visa recommends that Level 4 merchants
complete an annual PCI Self-Assessment Questionnaire, which you can obtain from Visa’s
website (www.visa.com/cisp). Visa also recommends an annual network scan, performed
by a qualified, independent scan vendor, for Level 4 merchants.
The following table outlines the qualifications and specific validation requirements for each
of Visa’s Merchant Level Classifications. If you qualify for a higher Level, you are
responsible for meeting all listed validation requirements.
Level
You are in this level if
Validation requirements
Performed by
4
You process fewer than 20,000 Visa
ecommerce transactions annually
None. However, Visa recommends:
Completing an annual PCI SelfAssessment Questionnaire
Annual network scan
Merchant
Qualified Independent
Scan Vendor
3
You process more than 20,000 Visa
ecommerce transactions annually
Completing an annual PCI SelfAssessment Questionnaire
Quarterly network scan
Merchant
Qualified Independent
Scan Vendor
2
You process more than 150,000 Visa
ecommerce transactions annually
Completing an annual PCI SelfAssessment Questionnaire
Quarterly network scan
Merchant
Qualified Independent
Scan Vendor
1
You process more than 6,000,000
Visa transactions annually
or
Your systems have been attacked
and compromised
or
Visa or any other card association
designates you as a Level 1
merchant.
Quarterly network scan
Completing an annual On-site PCI
Data Security Assessment
Qualified Independent
Scan Vendor
Qualified data security
company, or internal
audit if signed by officer
of the company
Installing NCR Counterpoint
1-70
07/07/15
SECTION 2: SETTING UP SYSTEM DATA
Sequence of System Setup ........................................................................ 1
Registering NCR Counterpoint ................................................................... 3
NCR Counterpoint Base System ................................................................ 4
NCR Counterpoint Options ......................................................................... 5
Setting Up Calendars ................................................................................. 6
Setting Up the Company Record ................................................................ 8
Using Quick Setup.................................................................................... 19
Setting Up Account Numbers ................................................................... 22
Overview of Security ................................................................................ 23
Setting Up System Security Codes........................................................... 25
Viewing/Entering Costs in NCR Counterpoint ........................................... 26
Using Batches .......................................................................................... 33
Setting Up Batches................................................................................... 34
Using the Work Center ............................................................................. 35
Setting Up Workgroups ............................................................................ 36
Setting Up Users ...................................................................................... 39
Setting Up User Preferences .................................................................... 45
Setting up Workstations ........................................................................... 48
Setting Up Menu Codes ........................................................................... 49
Setting Up Menu Codes – Menu Editor .................................................... 50
Verifying a Menu Code ............................................................................. 53
Customizing Lookups ............................................................................... 54
Exercise 2: Modifying a Quick Report ....................................................................... 58
Setting Up Bank Account Codes .............................................................. 66
Setting Up Currency Codes ...................................................................... 67
Currency Rounding Example.................................................................... 69
Exercise 3: Setting Up Currency Codes .................................................................... 70
Setting Up Gift Card Codes ...................................................................... 72
Setting Up Stored Value Card Codes ....................................................... 73
Setting Up Pay Codes .............................................................................. 74
Automatically determine pay codes from card numbers ........................... 81
Setting Up Commission Codes ................................................................. 83
Setting Up Ship-via Codes ....................................................................... 84
Setting Up Label Jobs .............................................................................. 85
Pre-defined Label Jobs............................................................................. 87
Setting Up Message Groups .................................................................... 89
Defining Sales Taxes ............................................................................... 90
Setting Up Tax Categories ....................................................................... 91
Setting Up Tax Authorities ........................................................................ 92
Exercise 4: Setting Up Tax Authorities ....................................................................... 96
Setting Up Tax Codes ............................................................................ 101
Assigning Tax Codes (Sales Tax) .......................................................... 102
Assigning Tax Codes (Purchasing Tax).................................................. 103
Setting Up the Accounting Interface ....................................................... 104
Importing Account Numbers ................................................................... 115
Importing and Exporting Vendors ........................................................... 116
Sequence of System Setup
Sequence for setting up a new company’s System data
After creating the database for a new company, you can start NCR Counterpoint and
begin to set up data for that company. System data must be defined prior to setting up
data for other parts of the software (such as Inventory or Point of Sale). Use these
menu selections to set up the minimum required System data.
1
Setup > System >
Registration
This function displays the contents of Registration.ini,
the Counterpoint registration file for a customer. You
must obtain a separate Counterpoint registration for
each customer.
2
Setup > System > Calendars
Define at least one calendar for the current year.
3
Setup > System > Accounts
Set up the account numbers to which financial entries
(“distributions”) will be recorded as you post
transactions in Counterpoint. You will need to
determine the chart of accounts prior to setting up the
account numbers here. Appendix 1 shows the
different accounts that are needed.
If you are using a "direct" interface accounting
application, you can instead import the account
numbers from the chart of accounts in the G/L system.
4
Setup > System > Company
Set up the Company record.
Setup > System > Quick
Setup
Define basic company-related information including
labels for miscellaneous charges and profile values.
5
Setup > System > Security
Codes
Define at least one security code that can be assigned
to users.
6
Setup > System >
Workgroups
Define at least one workgroup that can be assigned to
users.
7
Setup > System > Users
Define at least one user.*
* Before you can select to make a user a Point of Sale user, you must first define
some Point of Sale data:
Setup > Point of Sale >
Control
Set up the Point of Sale Control record.
Setup > Point of Sale >
Security Codes
Define at least one Point of Sale security code that
can be assigned to Point of Sale users.
Setting Up System Data
2-1
07/04/17
Additional System Setup
Additional set up is needed to use or perform these functions for a company
(*=required to be able to sell to customers)
8
Setup > System > Batches
Manually create batch ID’s and maintain
all defined batches.
9
Setup > System > User Preferences
Define the specific settings for a user.
10
Setup > System > Workstations
Define the settings for a specific computer.
11
Setup > System > Custom Forms
Define a custom form for a table
12
Setup > System > Dashboard
Thresholds
Define thresholds for Dashboard
13
Setup > System > Bank Account
Codes
Define bank accounts for deposits.
14
Setup > System > Currency Codes
Define each currency accepted for tender.
15
Setup > System > Gift Card Codes
If you plan to sell gift cards, define at least
one gift card code to use.
16
Setup > System > Stored Value Card
Codes
If you plan on processing stored value
cards, define at least one stored value
card code to use when processing SVC’s.
17
* Setup > System > Pay Codes
Define each pay code accepted for tender.
18
Setup > System > Commission Codes
Define commission rates.
19
Setup > System > Ship-via Codes
Define shipping methods.
20
Setup > System > Label Jobs
Create new label jobs or modify predefined label jobs.
21
Setup > System > Menu Codes
Define restricted or customized menus.
22
Setup > System > Message Groups
Create groups to use for messages.
23
Setup > Inventory > Tax Categories
Define tax categories - assigned to items.
24
* Setup > System > Tax Authorities
Define authorities to which taxes are paid.
25
* Setup > System > Tax Codes
Group tax authorities for purposes of
assigning to Store and Customer records.
26
Setup > System > Accounting Interface
Specify settings for interfacing
Counterpoint data to accounting package.
27
System > Accounting > Utilities >
Import Accounts
For Direct accounting interfaces, import
accounts into Counterpoint.
28
System > Accounting > Utilities >
Import Vendors
For Direct accounting interfaces, import
vendor information into Counterpoint.
29
System > Accounting > Utilities >
Export Vendors
For Direct accounting interfaces, export
vendor information to accounting package.
Setting Up System Data
2-2
07/04/17
Registering NCR Counterpoint
Select Setup > System > Registration
Blank registration or Demo code type restrictions:
 Maximum user count of 5
 100 items
 50 customers
 “For Demonstration Purposes Only” on reports
 Maximum of 10 pages for all reports
 Simulated EDC
Live registrations include:
Name (don’t change if code type = “perm”)
User count (by machine for Windows, by login for Citrix)
Serial number
Select options to register: unchecked
= not registered
checked
grey check
= registered
= disabled
Registration data is stored in Registration.ini, located in TopLevel directory on the
server. A version-specific registration file is required to use Counterpoint when
not running as a demo.
Setting Up System Data
2-3
07/04/17
NCR Counterpoint Base System
Module
Functionality
Point of Sale
Sales, returns, validated returns, orders, backorders, special orders,
layaways, holds, quotes, store credits, gift cards, multi-currency support,
EBT food stamps, stored value cards, tracking numbers, cash drops, cash
loans, and CMP credit card processing (RBS Lynk through Radiant
Payment Services)
Inventory
Items, 3-dimensional gridded items, tag-along kits, barcodes, 3 price
levels, margin-driven pricing, special, promotional, and contract pricing,
mix-and-match pricing, price sheet, average cost by location, adjustments,
physical count, transfers, transfer advice, merge items, and labels
Alternate units supported in all transactions that move inventory
Customers
Cash customers, multiple ship-to addresses
Loyalty programs and merge customer utility
Purchasing
Vendors, vendor item costs, purchasing advice report – Maximum,
Replenishment, or Days of Supply, Forecast-driven replenishment,
purchase orders (including allocated POs), receivings, adjustments, and
Returns to Vendor
Sales History
Complete sales transaction history (including reprinting of journals), ticket
history, management history, commissions, and sales analysis reports
Dashboard interface for viewing Sales History data
Purge utility for ticket history and credit card settlement history
Ecommerce
Integration with NCR CP Online for publishing item catalog and accepting
orders from merchant’s CP Online website
Timecards
Track employee time worked
System
Multi-company, multi-user, messaging, gift card and store credit
maintenance
Interface distributions to G/L and voucher receivings to A/P
Database utilities - data verify, data import and export, and data migration
WAN operation is supported through the use of Workgroups and Clientspecific registry keys
Setup
Configuration and setup functions for all modules
Change field names on windows, add picture masks, constraints, and
change text of messages
Reports
Pre-defined reports in Crystal Reports (V 10) format, and Crystal runtime
to print them
Customizable with Crystal Reports (purchased separately)
Send reports via email
Save report parameters (public or private)
Quick Reports from lookups allow simple changes without requiring
Crystal Reports (portrait or landscape orientation)
Setting Up System Data
2-4
07/04/17
NCR Counterpoint Options
Option
Additional Functionality
Advanced Orders
Allows users to complete order entry processing functions for
a single order or group of order (not currently available)
Advanced Pricing
6-level pricing
Location-specific pricing
Price by cell (single-cell line items)
Location-cell-specific pricing (single-cell line items)
Pricing location
Custom stored procedures for price rules
Credit Cards
Electronic draft capture/settlement using First Data North, First
Data South, TSYS, or Paymentech and Moneris Select
(Canadian Debit card support)
Data Interchange
(no charge)
Gift Registry
Import and Export utilities for data migration
Hub
(no charge)
Kits/Bills of Material
(no charge)
Required on primary server for Multi-Site operation
Multi-Site
(no charge)
Required at Hub and each remote store for Multi-site operation
and synchronize multiple copies of company database on
multiple SQL servers
Offline Ticket Entry
Allows users to continue ringing up sales and taking orders in
offline mode when workstations cannot connect to the
database server. Data synchronization via NCR CP Services.
Receivables
A/R charge customers, process cash receipts, reverse a cash
receipt transaction, finance charges, aging report, print
statements, send statements via e-mail, customer
adjustments, and pay-on-account transactions in Point of Sale
Serial Numbers
Serialized items (sometimes or always), serial cost (only
always serialized items), historical transaction detail for each
serial number
Setting Up System Data
Create and manage gift registries for your customers
Assemble other items, in advance to produce a sellable item,
or bundle items at the time of sale for a single price
(miscellaneous kit)
2-5
07/04/17
Setting Up Calendars
Select Setup > System > Calendars

Used to:
 enforce transaction dates (set in Setup > System > Security Codes)
 can use fiscal or calendar year
 seasons (defaults to a 3 month period, but can be changed)
 months
 weeks
Click
to set default dates for Seasons, Months, and Weeks
Specify the ending date for first
week and whether to use Dates or
Week Numbers as the week names.
Define three years: current, previous
and next.
Calendar does not auto-update. It will need to be reset each year.
Setting Up System Data
2-6
07/04/17
Setting Up Calendars
Months tab
Weeks tab
Setting Up System Data
2-7
07/04/17
Setting Up the Company Record
Select Setup > System >
Company
see next page
Name
Name change here results in company name change in
Companies.ini (connection string) and vice-versa
Century offset years
Determines the starting year for the company century
range. The range set determines if the 2-digit year
entered will have a prefix of 19 (20th century) or 20 (21st
century)
Calendar currently in effect
Can company be accessed from an unregistered
workstation?
Current calendar
Hide company from
unregistered workstations
Main acct start pos
Main acct length
Profit center start pos
Profit center length
Setting Up System Data
Starting position of the main account characters in an
account number and number of characters in length
If using profit centers, starting position of the profit center
characters in an account number and number of
characters in length
2-8
07/04/17
Setting Up the Company Record
Passwords
Payment Application Best Practices
requires:
 Use of complex passwords
 Minimum of 7 characters
 Maximum 90 days valid period
 PCI recommends 6 login attempts
 Minimum of 4 passwords before reuse
Use passwords
Passwords are required and must meet minimum PCI
DSS requirements. NOTE: passwords are not required if
no credit card pay codes are defined, or if you are using a
Demo registration file. Field disappears if credit card pay
codes are defined and using a live registration.
Use Windows authentication
Indicate whether to support Windows authentication
Windows user must also be defined in CPSQL and in
MSSQL (Supports biometric ID, if fingerprint reader
enabled) (CISP compliance is NOT checked)
Domain path
Indicate the path to use for password authentication
against a Windows domain
Require complex passwords
Min password length
Do passwords require both letters and numbers?
Minimum length of a new password, up to 128
If 0, passwords can be any length
Password must be changed after this many days
If 0, passwords do not expire
Number of attempts allowed to login
Days password is valid
Number of failed login
attempts allowed
Number of unique passwords
before re-use
Number of passwords that must have been used before a
password can be re-used
PCI Alert!
 PCI DSS-compliant passwords are required for all Counterpoint users
if the merchant is processing credit card transactions.
 All passwords are encrypted using a hashing algorithm.
 Encryption keys or other cryptographic materials are not stored in the
Counterpoint database.
Setting Up System Data
2-9
07/04/17
Setting Up the Company Record
Address tab
Enter the company’s
address.
Used if location Tax ID is
blank. Stored in each
purchasing document.
Contacts tab
Enter the information
for the contact
individuals for the
company.
Setting Up System Data
2-10
07/04/17
Setting Up the Company Record
Distributions tab
Indicate whether to retain
detailed distributions for
each transaction type.
Until you know what the
customer will need, begin
by enabling detail for all
distributions. Retaining
detail will impact database
size.
Reference tab
Select the reference text to
include with distributions for
each transaction type.
Setting Up System Data
2-11
07/04/17
Setting Up the Company Record
Gift cards tab

Enable the sale and
redemption of gift
cards
Use gift cards
Enable the use of gift cards for the company
Valid at other stores
Enable the use of gift cards at other stores
Minimum redemption percent What percentage of the original gift card value must be
redeemed the first time the card is used?
For example, if minimum is 80%, customer must redeem
at least $80 of a $100 card the first time it is used and
the remaining $20 would have to be redeemed in full the
next time the card is used.
Enter 100 to allow gift card to be used only once.
Closed gift card journal
Print distributions
Expiration
Always valid
Months valid
Use end of month
Additional setup:
When gift cards are closed, using System > Gift Cards >
Close Gift Cards, should journal be displayed, printed, or
skipped?
Should distributions be printed on the journal?
Are gift cards always valid (no expiration), or how many
months after issuance will they expire and will it be at the
end of the last month?
Gift card codes (Setup > System > Gift Card Codes)
Gift card pay code (Setup > System > Pay Codes and Setup >
Point of Sale > Stores)
Setting Up System Data
2-12
07/04/17
Setting Up the Company Record
Store credits tab

Enable the
issuance and
redemption of
store credits
Use store credits
Enable use of store credits for this company
Valid at other stores
Enable use of store credits at other stores
Closed store credit journal
When store credits are closed, using System > Store
Credits > Close Store Credits, should journal be
displayed, printed, or skipped?
Should distributions be printed on the journal?
Print distributions
Store credit liability
Store credit redemption
Store credit forfeit
G/L account for distributions of store credits that are
newly issued, redeemed, and forfeited
Account entered must be a valid posting account if
Profit center method is None
If Profit center method is “Issuing store” or “Redeeming
store” the account must be a valid main account
Expiration
Always valid
Months valid
Use end of month
Are store credits always valid (no expiration), or how
many months after issuance will they expire and will it be
at the end of the last month?
Additional setup:
Store Credit pay code (Setup > System > Pay Codes and
Setup > Point of Sale > Stores)
Setting Up System Data
2-13
07/04/17
Setting Up the Company Record
Stored Value Cards tab

Enable the use of stored value cards
Use stored value cards
Indicate whether to use stored value cards
SVC processor
If using CP Gateway, select the processor to use: First
Data, Stored Value Systems (Comdata Stored Value
Solutions), Paymentech, or GiftLynk (RBSLynk)
No dial up support
Minimum activation amount
Indicate the minimum amount required to activate card
Minimum recharge amount
Indicate the minimum amount required to increase card
balance
Maximum refund amount
Indicate the maximum amount that can be refunded
Maximum cash back amount
Indicate the maximum amount that can be given back
as cash
Require PIN for manual entry
Indicate whether to require a PIN for manual entry
(available if using Stored Value Systems or
Paymentech)
Additional setup:
Stored Value Card codes (Setup > System > Stored Value Card
Codes)
Stored Value Card pay code (Setup > System > Pay Codes and
Setup > Point of Sale > Stores)
Setting Up System Data
2-14
07/04/17
Setting Up the Company Record
Gift Registry tab

Enable the use of gift registries (requires the Gift Registry Option)
Use gift registries
Indicate whether to use gift registry functionality.
Valid at other stores
Can a registry at one store be accessed from other stores?
Months valid
For how many months will the gift registry be available?
Setting Up System Data
2-15
07/04/17
Setting Up the Company Record
Performance tab
Use fast open
Indicate whether to load one record at a time for maintenance
functions.
If enabled, the function opens faster, but access via
Next/Previous VCR buttons is slightly slower
If enabled, the x of y record button will not function on toolbars
Max rows in table view
When using table view, how many records should be
displayed?
Lookup dialogs
Max rows in lookups
When performing a lookup on a table, how many records
("rows") should be displayed?
Fewer records results in faster lookups
Search delay (ms)
How long to wait after typing before keyword search is
performed (default = 600ms)
Minimum keyword
length
Number of characters entered as a keyword before search is
performed (default=3 characters)
Use nolock hint
Enable to allow lookups against data that is locked, and
prevent locking data that lookup is querying
Setting Up System Data
2-16
07/04/17
Setting Up the Company Record
Other tab
Timecards
Use timecards
Indicate whether to use timecards
Allow clock-in if already
clocked-in
If a user is ‘clocked-in’, can they ‘clock-in’ again? If so, after
how many minutes?
Treat as ‘clocked-out’
after
Controls whether a user will be prompted to clock-in again
Allow clock-out without
clock-in
Will user be allowed to ‘clock-out’ without ‘clocking-in’?
Default to current user
Should Counterpoint default to the current user in the Timecard
function?
Setting Up System Data
2-17
07/04/17
Setting Up the Company Record
Other tab
Creates batches with ID
of DEFAULT for every
module and transaction
type that doesn’t already
have a ‘Default’ batch
New user setup
Copy user batches
Copy user drawers
Copy user preferences
When adding a new user and using the Copy-from
function (not the clone button), indicate whether to copy:
- user batches
- user drawers
- user preferences
Show User Batches form
Show User Drawers form
Show User Preferences form
After saving a new user, indicate which forms should
automatically appear:
- User Batches
- User Drawers
- User Preferences
Messages
Refresh messages every
Purge messages every
How often should messages be refreshed?
Set Refresh=0 to prevent instant messages from popping
up
How often should messages be purged?
Report e-mail options
E-mail body
Enter the text to appear as the default body of emails
Drop ship
Allow drop shipments
Setting Up System Data
Check to enable drop shipments
2-18
07/04/17
Using Quick Setup
Select Setup > System > Quick Setup

Use to quickly configure various company settings
If not already present, sets up:
 one store (“Main”)
 one location (“Main”)
 one tax code + authority (“Local”)

Use to select profile fields, item attributes, and miscellaneous charges to use,
and identify display labels
Company tab
Enter the company name and address.
Indicate whether to use passwords.
Enter the current calendar year.
Enter a single tax percent to use.
Indicate whether to use gift cards and
store credits.
Select the default label printer.
Setting Up System Data
2-19
07/04/17
Using Quick Setup
Defining Profile fields, Item Attributes, and Miscellaneous charges

Indicate whether to use the associated profile value, item attribute, or
miscellaneous charge for Items, Customers, Purchasing, and Point of Sale

Enter the display label for each

Click

Define the account for miscellaneous charges
to define valid responses for code profiles and attributes
Setting Up System Data
2-20
07/04/17
Using Quick Setup
Configuring Credit Cards processing
Accessible only if only one store is defined, using Retail industry type, and using NCR
CP Gateway
Enter your merchant number.
Select the processor to use.
Select the industry type.
Enter the authorization and
settlement terminal IDs.
Indicate whether to use NCR CP
Gateway.
If using CP Gateway, enter your CP
Gateway merchant #.
Select your operating mode.
If using CP Gateway, indicate
whether to directly authorize
American Express payments.
If using AmEx direct, enter your
American Express “Service Establishment” number.
Indicate whether to use debit cards and / or checks.
Click
to construct a
Terminal ID based on information provided
by the processor.
Click
to configure information for the processor.
For FDMS North, select check
service.
Enter your tax ID number.
Setting Up System Data
2-21
07/04/17
Setting Up Account Numbers
Select Setup > System > Accounts




20 characters, numeric or alphanumeric
Position and size of main account and profit center defined in Company table
Can be imported from G/L accounting software, after accounting interface has
been defined (direct interface packages)
Full account numbers entered in other functions, even if only profit center portion
is used
Account
Enter the characters to represent the account
Description
Enter the description of the account
Valid posting account
Indicate whether account distributions can be made to this
account
Valid main account
Indicate whether the Main account portion of the account
number is a valid Main account
Valid profit center
Indicate whether the Profit Center portion of the account number
is a valid Profit Center
G/L account
If interfacing account information to a third-party software,
account number to link to in accounting package instead of
Default account
Default
Based on accounting interface definition, account number in
accounting package that this Counterpoint account number will
link to
Setting Up System Data
2-22
07/04/17
Overview of Security
Levels of Security
Level 1
Windows/network login and password
Counterpoint programs and users need the ability to Read/Write/Create/
Delete files in the top-level Counterpoint directory on the server (e.g.,
CPSQL.1).
Level 2
Database Server login and password
Security for MSSQL can be handled using a database SQL user ID and
password, or by using Windows integrated security. When using SQL
authentication, the first time you start Counterpoint on a workstation and
select a company, the SQL user ID and password are copied from the
Counterpoint connection string and written to the Windows registry on the
workstation. When you start Counterpoint in the future on that same
workstation, it automatically uses the same user ID and password.
Level 3
Within NCR Counterpoint:
Counterpoint user login
Each user must have a user ID that they use to log in to Counterpoint. You
can also disable the login for a user, preventing them from running NCR
Counterpoint.
Passwords
Passwords can be required and can have a minimum length and
expiration date. Users can be forced to change their password after
logging in. A maximum number of password entry attempts can be
established before user’s login is disabled. A minimum number of unique
passwords can be set, before a user can reuse a prior password.
Windows authentication
Each user can use their Windows authentication or biometric ID to log in
to Counterpoint. A fingerprint reader must be enabled for the biometric ID.
Setting Up System Data
2-23
07/04/17
Registered Workstations
CP Services checks to verify which workstations are registered. Based on
the Company settings, you are allowed to access only registered
workstations, or both registered and unregistered workstations.
User’s System Security code
Each user is assigned a system security code, and the same security
code can be assigned to multiple users. The system security code
contains the system-level authorizations for a user, such as whether
protected changes or cost entry is permitted. The system security code
also dictates, through its menu code, the Counterpoint menu selections
that are available for a user.
User’s active workgroup
Each user is assigned a “primary” workgroup. If permitted, when logging
in to Counterpoint, a user can change his workgroup for that session. The
workgroup controls what “this location” and “this store” is used for that
session, and whether other locations or stores can be used during the
same session.
Point of Sale security code
Each Point of Sale user is assigned a Point of Sale security code. The
Point of Sale security code contains the authorizations for a user to
access certain PS menu selections and to perform sensitive functions
when entering Point of Sale documents.
Batch security
If a user has a user batch defined for a specific type of transaction, that is
the only batch they can use, and access to other batches is not permitted.
Setting Up System Data
2-24
07/04/17
Setting Up System Security Codes
Select Setup > System > Security Codes


Use to define system authorizations for a user or group of users
Assign one security code to each user
Use to select / clear all
check boxes on this tab
Menu code
ID of custom menu (if used) for users assigned this system
security code
Allow cost entry
User can view and enter cost for any non-PS activity.
If not selected, default cost for activity is automatically used
View costs
If user cannot enter costs, can they view them in lookups,
filters, and quick reports?
Costs do not print on standard reports and journals if user is
not authorized to view costs
Allow other locations
Can this user enter non-PS transactions for locations other
than “This location” specified in their workgroup?
Allow other stores
Can user enter sales for stores other than “This store ID”
specified in their workgroup?
Allow system
administration
Can this user access and use the Management Console?
Unlock others’ stations
Only for Point of Sale manager - unlock other users' stations
if the Point of Sale manager check box is selected for the
user on the General tab of the Users window (Setup >
System > Users).
Always - unlock other users' stations, regardless of whether
they are Point of Sale managers.
Never - cannot unlock other users' stations
Setting Up System Data
2-25
07/04/17
Viewing/Entering Costs in NCR Counterpoint
Transaction Type
User is authorized
to enter costs
User is not authorized
to enter costs
Receivings
Quick Receivings
 Default = cost entered on PO  Automatically uses vendor item
cost or location last cost
 Default = vendor item cost or
location last cost
User cannot enter PO misc chgs
User can enter different cost or (uses default of .00)
use accounting cost*
User can enter PO misc chgs

Inventory >
Adjustments
 Default = location avg. cost
Physical Count
For all users (authorization to enter costs is ignored), automatically
uses frozen cost or accounting cost*, based on Setup > Inventory
> Control setting
Sales/Returns
For all users (authorization to enter costs is ignored):
Inventory items: Uses accounting cost*
Misc. items:
Uses entered cost for “Prompt for cost” items
(anyone can enter),
or
Uses “Cost of goods sold %” to calculate as
percent of selling price
User can enter different cost or
use accounting cost*
 Automatically uses accounting
cost*
accounting cost = location average cost at time of posting
Setting Up System Data
2-26
07/04/17
Setting Up System Security Codes
Authorizations tab
General
Allow protected changes
Can user access protected change fields?
Other users’ preferences
Ability to access and change other users’ preferences in
Setup > System > User Preferences
Allow message suppression
Can user suppress messages that have a Do not show
again checkbox?
Re-enable message display by selecting Show
suppressed messages in Setup > System > User
Preferences
A/R
A/R document maintenance
Can user run Maintain A/R Documents under
Customers > Utilities?
Point of Sale
Gift Card Maintenance
Can user run Maintain Gift Cards under System > Gift
Cards?
Store Credit Maintenance
Can user run Maintain Store Credits under
System > Store Credits?
Purchasing
Allow margin-driven pricing
during receivings
During receiving, can this user set the price for an item
based on specified margin parameters?
Allow access to drop-ship
purchase orders
Can this user access drop-ship purchase orders?
Setting Up System Data
2-27
07/04/17
Setting Up System Security Codes
Authorizations tab cont.
Reports
Maintain import/export parameters
Create report parameters available for all users?
Create report parameters available only for the
user who created it?
Create report parameters for importing/exporting?
Allow e-mailing of reports
Can user e-mail a report?
Allow e-mailing non-system address
Can user email a report to address not associated
with CP user, customer or vendor?
Allow updating e-mail addresses
Can user update e-mail addresses when sending
reports or receipts via e-mail?
Setting Up System Data
2-28
Maintain public report parameters
Maintain private report parameters
07/04/17
Setting Up System Security Codes
Authorizations tab cont.
Customizations
Customize data dictionary
Can user make changes to the data dictionary?
Customize filter dictionary
Can user save customized filters?
Customize lookup dictionary
Can user save customized lookups?
Customize text dictionary
Can user make changes to the text dictionary?
Customize zoom dictionary
Can user save customized zooms?
Save customized data grids
Can user save column changes made in functions with
line item entry grids?
Customize toolbars
Can user customize toolbars?
Setting Up System Data
2-29
07/04/17
Setting Up System Security Codes
Authorizations tab cont.
Credit cards
Manually authorize credit cards
Can user "force" authorization by manually entering
authorization code?
Skip AVS checking
Override AVS mismatch
Override AVS unavailable
Skip CVV/CID checking
Override CVV/CID mismatch
Override CVV/CID unavailable
Can this user skip address verification or CVV /CID
checking for a credit card transaction? If enabled for
store, can user override an address or CVV/CID
discrepancy, or bypass address verification or
CVV/CID when the service is unavailable?
Note: Enable "Allow address entry" for AVS in Setup
> Point of Sale > Stores if any user is allowed to
skip checking or override discrepancies
View credit card numbers
Can user view an encrypted credit card number in
live tickets or ticket history? Note: The number is
stored encrypted but can be shown unencypted. The
use of this function is logged in the Security log.
Note: Only applies when using CP Gateway.
1
Setting Up System Data
2-30
07/04/17
Setting Up System Security Codes
Transaction Dates tab
Previous trx # months
Allow trx for last calendar
User can enter transactions for this many previous months
If previous month(s) fall in prior year, must also be allowed
to enter transactions for last year
Future trx # months
Allow trx for next calendar
User can enter transactions for this many future months
If future month(s) are in next year, must also be allowed to
enter transactions for next year
Earliest valid date
Latest valid date
Based on the above settings, range of valid transaction
dates
If a user tries to save a transaction
outside of their allowed date range, the
following error message appears:
If a user tries to post a transaction outside of their allowed date range, the following error
message appears on the Edit List.
Setting Up System Data
2-31
07/04/17
Setting Up System Security Codes
Timecards tab
Clock-in/Clock-out
Users settings for clock-in/clock-out: Allowed,
Required, or Not allowed
Show timecard status
Indicate whether to display “Clocked in” and "Not
clocked in" buttons on the status bars of Touchscreen,
Ticket Entry, and the main menu
Prompt for clock-in at login
Indicate whether to prompt the user to clock-in when
logging in to Counterpoint
Prompt for clock-out at logout
Indicate whether to prompt the user to clock-out when
logging out of Counterpoint
Setting Up System Data
2-32
07/04/17
Using Batches





To group non-document transactions for entry and posting
Batch ID and Transaction type retained in history with posted transactions
Allows multiple users to enter transactions simultaneously in same or
different batches
Allows multiple users to post different batches simultaneously
(batch locked during posting)
Batch ID must be defined prior to entry of these transaction types:
Inventory
Customers

Inventory adjustments
Quick transfers
Transfer in
Transfer out
Quick assembly
Customer adjustments
Cash receipts
Loyalty Point Adjustments
Finance charges
Purchasing Purchase requests
Receivings
Quick receivings
Returns to Vendor
Purchasing Adjustments
Select System > Work Center to view unposted batches
When transaction entry function is started:

Automatically uses “User ID” batch if found
or
Automatically uses “Workgroup ID” batch if found and user ID batch not found
or
Automatically uses “DEFAULT” batch ID if found and user ID batch or
workgroup ID batch not found
or
Automatically uses “User-defined batch ID” if it is the only one defined for
transaction type

If no ‘Automatic’ batch is assigned
Requests selection of batch ID from lookup dialog
Select different batch using File/Change batch (or Ctrl+G)

Displays current batch ID on title bar
Setting Up System Data
2-33
07/04/17
Setting Up Batches
Select Setup > System > Batches

Use to maintain individual batch IDs
Batch
Alphanumeric characters for batch ID
Batch type
Type of transactions allowed in batch
Description
Batch description
Multiple use
After all transactions in batch are posted, delete batch ID (single use)
or allow batch ID to be re-used
Created by
User who created the batch
Created on
Date batch was created
Note: Use
in Setup > System > Users to create “User ID” batches
for every module and transaction type.
Use
in Setup > System > Workgroups to create “Workgroup
ID” batches for every module and transaction type.
Use
in Setup > System > Company to create "DEFAULT"
batches for every module and transaction type.
Setting Up System Data
2-34
07/04/17
Using the Work Center
Select System > Work Center






View unposted batches: select Workgroup, Batch, and Type
Create new transactions
Edit user’s existing transactions
Cannot edit another user’s transaction, if not authorized for the batch
Post user’s existing transactions
Cannot post another user’s transactions, if not authorized for the batch
Setting Up System Data
2-35
07/04/17
Setting Up Workgroups
Select Setup > System > Workgroups

Use to define groups of
users who share the
same location or store
(WAN and Multi-Site
configurations)
Create “Workgroup ID”
batch for each
transaction type
When logged in with this workgroup:
This location
What’s the default location for non-POS activities?
User’s system security code controls access to other locations
This store ID
What’s the default store?
User’s system security code controls access to other stores
PS user defaults to
What’s the default User ID when logging in to ticket entry?
Location group
What’s the default location group for non-POS activities?
This site ID
Restrict site ID
With the Multi-Site Option: what is the specific site for this
workgroup, is this workgroup restricted to this site,
Domain path
When using Windows authentication for passwords, workgroup’s
domain if different than domain set for Company.
Template item number
Template customer #
Item or customer whose values display as defaults when
defining a new item or customer
Item lookup shows
When using an item lookup in a transaction function, which set of
data should be displayed?
Zooms default to
Default source for zoom data and validated returns
Check vendors’ item
numbers
Are vendor item numbers used to specify an item?
Button Menu Style
Select Standard, Gel or Gradient button style.
Setting Up System Data
2-36
07/04/17
Setting Up Workgroups
Numbers tab

Identify next auto-assign value to use for each type of document or activity when
entered by a user logged in to this workgroup

Use different series for each workgroup to ensure duplicate values don’t occur
If checked, uses the Purchase
Request # as the PO #.
If not checked, Next PO number
is required.
Next xxxxx number
Always auto-assign
Next auto-assigned number when adding new record
If next number is blank, user will be required to manually key in
number when adding new record.
If you have enabled drop ship orders, Next Purchase Request #
will be a required field
If Always auto-assign, must use system-assigned number and
user-entered number is not allowed
Next event number
Cannot be left blank
Next barcode
Next barcode number when automatically assigning barcodes to
an item
Setting Up System Data
2-37
07/04/17
Setting Up Workgroups
Security tab
Automatic station lock
Select this check box if you want to enable the automatic
locking of a Counterpoint workstation.
Minutes until lock
If Automatic station lock is enabled, after how many minutes
of inactivity does the station lock?
PCI Alert!
All workstations in the workgroup (including those that process credit
card transactions) will lock automatically after 15 minutes of inactivity
and a Station Locked dialog appears.
The user who was logged in when the station locked or a user who is
authorized to unlock other users’ stations can unlock it.
A shorter wait time before locking can be configured in Setup >
System > Workgroups.
Setting Up System Data
2-38
07/04/17
Setting Up Users
Select Setup > System > Users

Define each NCR Counterpoint user

Use the “Copy from user” function to quickly add a new user
Access
Setup > System >
User Preferences
Create “User ID” batch
for each transaction type
General
Employee #
Department
User-defined number to associate with this employee
The department associated with this employee
Workgroup
Allow other workgroups
Default workgroup; sets default location and store for user
Can user change to a different workgroup when logging in?
Sales rep
Is this a sales rep? Define at least one sales rep
Commission code
Code that defines commission structure for sales rep
Valid buyer
Can user be entered as a buyer in Purchase Request >
Enter?
Selecting Valid buyer does not control if the user can create
a PO.
Setting Up System Data
2-39
07/04/17
Setting Up Users
If passwords are being
used, set password
System security
Security code
Controls system authorizations for user
Login disabled
Prevents user from logging in next time
Require password change
Requires user to enter new password at next login
Last pwd change
Date user last changed password
User ID card
If using User ID cards, the 8-digit number card number
assigned to a specific user (scan to assign, after defining
MSR device for workstation)
Assign card
Allows the assignment of a User ID card to a specific user.
Un-assign card
Disassociates a previously assigned User ID card with a
specific user. The User ID card can then be assigned to a
different user.
System activity
Last login
Last workgroup
Last workstation
Setting Up System Data
System-maintained information about this user:
 Last time this user logged in
 Last workgroup used by this user
 Last workstation used by this user
2-40
07/04/17
Setting Up Users
Assigning User ID Card
Prior to assigning user ID cards to users, you must have already defined a magnetic
stripe reader (MSR) for a workstation, using the Device Framework function in Setup >
Point of Sale > Devices.

In Setup > System > Users, look up the user to whom you want to assign a
User ID card.

Click Assign card.

The Swipe User ID card to
assign prompt appears along the
bottom of the Users window

Swipe a User ID card through your workstation's MSR to assign the card to the
user. The card number appears in the User ID card field.
If the card is already assigned to another user, a message appears, prompting you
to reassign the card to the selected user. Click Yes to reassign the card to the
selected user or click No to cancel, leaving the card assigned to the original user.
Un-Assigning User ID Card

From Setup > System > Users, look up the user whose User ID card you want
to un-assign.

Click the Un-assign card button.
The user can no longer use the card, which
can now be assigned to a different user.
Setting Up System Data
2-41
07/04/17
Setting Up Users
Access Setup > Point of
Sale > User Drawers
Point of sale
Point of Sale user
Can user access Point of Sale >Tickets and Point of Sale >
Drawers menu selections?
Point of Sale manager
Is user a manager?
Manager can perform security overrides for other users, if
manager is authorized for same function
Order Management user
Is user allowed to work with order management?
Security code
Security code that controls authorizations while in Ticket
Entry or Touchscreen. (Required for Point of Sale user)
Last store used
Last station used
Last drawer used
Last store, station, and drawer used by user in Ticket Entry
Used as defaults next time when logging into Ticket Entry, if
store is set to use them
Last login
Last workgroup
Last workstation
Last date and time user logged in to Ticket Entry
Last workgroup user used in Ticket Entry
Last workstation user used in Ticket Entry
Setting Up System Data
2-42
07/04/17
Setting Up Users
Message
Message manager
Can user manage the message center? Includes ability to
create message groups and view messages for other users.
Send instant message
Can user send an instant message?
Timecards
Last clock-in
Date/time stamp of last clock-in of this user
Last clock-out
Date/time stamp of last clock-out of this user
Setting Up System Data
2-43
07/04/17
Setting Up Users
Contacts tab

Enter the user’s address and information for contact individuals.
Setting Up System Data
2-44
07/04/17
Setting Up User Preferences
Select Setup > System > User Preferences

Settings for user when running Counterpoint on any computer
Home action
Open home action at startup
Base menu selection, accessible by clicking
menu taskbar
Automatically start Home action when logging in?
Main menu style
Style of Counterpoint main menu: Explorer, Tree,
Standard, or Buttons
Button Style
If using Buttons menu style, configure size and
appearance of buttons for this user
Windows settings change color scheme for buttons
Setting Up System Data
2-45
on
07/04/17
Setting Up User Preferences
User Interface tab
Show forms on taskbar
Show open Counterpoint selections on Windows taskbar?
Allow multiple form
instances
Permit a single menu selection to be open more than once
on same computer
Implied decimal points
In Ticket Entry, assume two decimal positions for money
fields (”10”=.10): prices, misc charges, tax overrides, etc.
Show suppressed
messages
Show messages that this user previously selected to
suppress (Do not show again check box)?
Enable customizations
Enable use of all custom dictionaries (data, text, lookups,
filters, and zooms), reports, forms, etc.
Turn off to use only system dictionaries
Use simplified filters
Initially display all filters in simplified format
Maintenance forms
Document forms
Remember last view
Initial setting - Record view or Table view - for Maintenance
and Document forms
Default font
Default touchscreen font
Set font for column names in menus and windows
Set font for column names in Touchscreen
Print button produces
When you click
, print active record (screenshot), or
print active record as a list report
Negative number color
Required color
Display color for column background for numbers that are
negative or display color for label for required columns
Scheme
Toolbar scheme: Default, Simple, or V7
Setting Up System Data
When user returns to same form, remember last view used
2-46
07/04/17
Setting Up User Preferences
Message tab
New message font
What font should be used for messages?
Reply / Forward font
What font should be used for replies or forwarded
messages?
Instant message sound
file
What audio file should be used to indicate an instant
message has been received?
New message sound file
What audio file should be used to indicate a new message
has been received?
Reading pane visible
Should the message reading pane be visible?
Setting Up System Data
2-47
07/04/17
Setting up Workstations
Select Setup > System > Workstations


Settings on a specific computer when running Counterpoint
Workstations that are defined are considered registered with the site server
When using this workstation:
Site server
Machine name
Description
Default workgroup
Allow other workgroups
Which CP server is this workstation associated with?
Which is the name of this computer?
Description for this workstation.
Which workgroup is assigned to this workstation?
Allow different workgroup to be specified when logging in
to Counterpoint on this workstation?
Workstation Preferences
Touchscreen mode
Skip user login dialog
Provide button for pop-up keyboard / keypad, and larger
buttons throughout Counterpoint including lookups?
Should the user login dialog appear when starting
Counterpoint?
POS Settings
Default station
Allow other stations
Which POS station is assigned as the default?
Allow a different station to be specified in ticket entry?
Default drawer
Allow other drawers
Which drawer is assigned as the default?
Allow a different drawer to be specified in ticket entry?
Advanced options
Enable ticket entry event
logging
Enable POS device logging
Setting Up System Data
Enable logging of each keystroke in Ticket Entry?
Enable logging for POS devices?
2-48
07/04/17
Setting Up Menu Codes
Select Setup > System > Menu Codes

Use to restrict Counterpoint menu selections or add external menu selections

Assign menu code to one or more system security codes
Click
to define or
modify menu
selections
Click
to
compare a menu code
to the standard menu
Current custom menu
Standard default menu
From this dialog, you can:
 Drag and drop selections from default menu to custom menu
 Drag selections on custom menu to new positions
 Right-click on custom menu to access popup menu
 Configure menu selections by using Menu Editor
Setting Up System Data
2-49
07/04/17
Setting Up Menu Codes – Menu Editor
Menu with images
Menu without Images
Reset current menu selection back to default state
Remove (delete) the current menu selection
Add new menu item or new folder
Setting Up System Data
2-50
07/04/17
Setting Up Menu Codes – Menu Editor
Settings
ID
Internal identifier for menu selection
User-entered for new menu selections. No duplicates permitted
Action type
Automatically displays either Windows or External
Form caption
Text that appears on menu selection’s title bar
Menu caption
Text that appears as menu selection name
Button caption
Text that appears for menu selection on button menu
If blank, uses Menu caption text instead
Image
Image name to display on Explorer and Tree style menus
If blank, uses default image (folder or screen)
Button Image
Image name to display on Button style menu for this menu selection
Command type
When adding a custom menu item: type of form to display
Command
Arguments
Command line and parameters for External menu selections
Table name to access or Crystal report to display for Custom menu
items
Form Instancing
Allow single or multiple instances of menu selection
Presentation
Modal or non-modal use
Modal = cannot access another menu selection while this menu
selection is open
Allow edit
delete
insert
offline
Allow menu selection to be edited, deleted, inserted, or to function
while running offline
Report parameters
Assign a default report parameter set to a custom report menu item
Setting Up System Data
2-51
07/04/17
Setting Up Menu Codes – Menu Editor
Command Types
When adding a new menu item, select the appropriate Command Type:
Command Type
Command / Arguments
Custom maintenance form
Show a maintenance form for the table specified in
Command.
Use Allow edit, Allow insert, Allow delete checkboxes
to limit the type of maintenance permitted.
Custom add-on-the-fly form
Show an add-on-the-fly form for the table specified in
Command.
Use Allow edit, Allow insert, Allow delete checkboxes
to limit the type of maintenance permitted.
Users without the menu selection will be prevented from
adding records on-the-fly to the table.
Custom view form
Show an inquiry form for the table specified in
Command.
Custom report
Show a report parameter form for the report specified in
Command.
Custom program
Show a “front-end” form for user’s own program,
identified in the configuration file specified in Command.
Optionally provide arguments to pass to program in
Arguments.
Configuration file can also direct filtering, order-by, and
parameters to request from user.
External program
Execute the external program specified in Command.
Optionally provide arguments in Arguments.
Use for website addresses, or filenames that will cause
associated application to automatically launch
Setting Up System Data
2-52
07/04/17
Verifying a Menu Code

Use to compare the current menu to the standard menu and indicate:

Menu items in the current menu code that are not in the standard menu

Menu items in the standard menu that are not in the current menu code
Or right-click user-defined
menu in Menu Editor and
select Verify menu
Setting Up System Data
2-53
07/04/17
Customizing Lookups
Changing columns on the lookup form
Click and drag column
heading to change width
or reposition column
Right-click column
or column heading (e.g.,
Description)
or
Double-click dividers
Hide column
Don’t display column for this lookup
Sort ascending
Sort descending
Display column data in ascending order
Lock / Unlock column
Prevent horizontal scrolling of locked columns Unlock
this column and any columns to the right
Fit columns
Change width of all columns to fit current width of
lookup form
Set default column widths
Change width of each column to fit width of each
column’s heading
Export data
Generate a comma-delimited text file of data displayed
in lookup
Column designer
Select columns to display, order in which to display them,
and the layout and appearance of each column
Setting Up System Data
Display column data in descending order
2-54
07/04/17
Customizing Lookups
Other LookUp Options
Click
Show all
To display all records when fewer than the maximum number are
displayed
Save
Save current lookup definition as “Default”, becomes default starting
lookup for that table
Any user whose system security code permits customizing of Lookup
Dictionary can save lookups
Save As
Save current lookup definition under a new name
Delete
Delete a saved lookup definition
Reload lookup
Reload original lookup and discard changes entered in this editing
session
Column designer
Select columns to display, order in which to display them, and the
layout and appearance of each column
Setting Up System Data
2-55
07/04/17
Customizing Lookups
Column Designer
Show/Hide Columns tab
What columns will display in the lookup and
in what order will they appear?
Hidden columns
Visible columns
Hide selected column(s)
Show selected column(s)
Hide all columns
Show all columns
Change order of columns displayed: Drag and drop in either list box
or use
Setting Up System Data
2-56
07/04/17
Customizing Lookups
Column Designer
Column Options tab
What name will be used for a column, and how will the
name and data appear?
Appearance
of column
heading
Appearance
of data for
this column
Discard changes
entered in this edit
session
Grid Options tab
How will the column grid appear on the lookup form?
Stack column heading if
longer than column width
Display records from bottom
to top of grid, rather than
from top to bottom
Setting Up System Data
2-57
07/04/17
Exercise 2: Modifying a Quick Report
Try it Yourself !
This exercise illustrates how to use the Column Designer to develop a special lookup. It also
shows how to save the resulting Quick Report, how to add a menu selection to the Counterpoint
menu that runs the Quick Report, and how to customize a filter for the report.
1. Select Inventory > Items
2. Click the lookup icon
on the toolbar.
Right-click anywhere in the column headings to display the column control menu.
Select Column designer from the column control menu.
You can also left-click
here to access the
Column Designer.
3. In the Column Designer, add Sub-category, Attribute 1, and Primary vendor to the visible
columns. Move Sub-category up so that it falls after Item category.
Click
when finished.
Setting Up System Data
2-58
07/04/17
4.
When you return to the Item lookup, click
to see the Quick Report.
All of the columns are present, but because of alignment, some columns are hard to read.
(The Sub-category heading and Attribute 1 column’s data is being truncated. The Price-1
data would be easier to read if it was centered.)
Close the Quick Report preview.
Move the columns around so that they appear in this order: Item number, Description,
Price-1, Item category, Sub-category, Attribute 1, and Primary vendor. Extend the Subcategory heading by clicking and dragging it to the right. Do the same for the Attribute 1
field.
The Item LookUp should now look similar to this:
Setting Up System Data
2-59
07/04/17
5. When completed resizing and placing the columns in the desired order, open the Column
Designer again, and move to the Column Options tab.
Select the Price-1 field and change the Align column value for the data to Center.
Click OK to save your changes and close the Column Designer.
When the lookup form redisplays, click
and select Save As…. (Save As is
available only if your security code allows you to customize the lookup dictionary.)
Save the modified lookup using the name Train 1.
The lookup form should now look similar to this:
Setting Up System Data
2-60
07/04/17
6.
Click
7.
Click
to view the Quick Report. Notice how much better the report looks.
to save the Quick report.
Change the filename from Item Quick
Report to Items for a Vendor and
click Save.
.
Answer Yes to generate the data to save.
Exit the Items function.
Setting Up System Data
2-61
07/04/17
8. To add a menu selection that will run this new report, select Setup > System > Menu
Codes.
Add a new menu code named
TRAIN 1 with the description of
Training Menu Code.
Click
to edit the menu selections for this code.
9. To add the new menu selection to the Inventory > Reports menu, expand the Inventory
folder under the Custom Menu folder. Then select the Reports folder.
Click
and select Menu item.
Enter Items for a Vendor as the
name of the new menu selection.
10. The Menu code and Menu Editor now look similar to this:
Setting Up System Data
2-62
07/04/17
Under Settings, change the Command type to Custom report. At Report, browse and
select Items for a Vendor.rpt (it should be in the Reports folder for your company).
When finished, the Menu Editor should look similar to this.
Close the Menu Editor form saving the changes, then click
to save the new menu code.
11. To assign the new menu code to a security code, select Setup > System > Security
Codes.
Display the LEVEL2 security
code and assign the TRAIN 1
menu code to it.
Save the changes to the
security code and exit. If you
are logged in to Counterpoint
as a user with the MGR
security code, the changes
will be in effect immediately.
12. Select Inventory > Reports > Items for a Vendor from the menu. (If you do not see it on
your menu, you will need to log in to Counterpointas MGR or Z.)
Select the order in which the report will print, and filter the items that you want to include in
the report.
The Order by choices reflect the indexes in the Item table. Since there is no default filter
defined yet for this new menu selection, it instead displays the first filter it can find for the
involved table.
Setting Up System Data
2-63
07/04/17
To build a default filter for this
selection, right-click anywhere
on the form and select
Customize.
Clear the checkboxes for the
Item type and Price-1 filters,
to de-activate them.
You could instead right-click on
each filter and select to delete
it.
When done, right-click anywhere and select Simplify to see the new simplified filter.
Right-click anywhere and
select Save as default filter.
Now, any time you select to print this report, the default filter will display.
Select a primary
vendor range of
Taylormade to
Taylormade.
Then click
Setting Up System Data
2-64
07/04/17
Note: If you change the name of the Form caption for this menu selection in Setup >
System > Menu Codes, you will need to run the new menu selection, load the Items
for a Vendor filter, and resave it as the default filter. Default filters are named the
same as the title bar of the menu selection for which they are the default.
--------------------------------------------END OF EXERCISE---------------------------------------------
Setting Up System Data
2-65
07/04/17
Setting Up Bank Account Codes
Select Setup > System > Bank Account Codes

Define different bank accounts used for deposits of tender received

Optionally assign one bank account code to each pay code
Setting Up System Data
2-66
07/04/17
Setting Up Currency Codes
Select Setup > System > Currency Codes

Use to define each currency you will accept for selling or purchasing

Use to maintain the exchange rate for the currency

Use to specify currency rounding for selling
Currency code
Name for this currency
Description
Description for this currency
Short description
Abbreviation used in Purchasing
Exchange Rates
Default: exchange rate to HOME currency for selling
Purchasing: exchange rate to HOME currency for purchasing*
* fields appear only if "Using multi-currency?" is enabled in Setup>Purchasing>Control
Setting Up System Data
2-67
07/04/17
Minimum
denomination value
Smallest currency denomination accepted for Cash
transactions
Currency rounding
method
???How to round calculated sales amount to minimum
denomination: Up, Down, Normal
Currency rounding
account
If minimum denomination value is greater than .01, account
number to update the difference between amount calculated
in ticket entry and rounded amount tendered
Gain/loss account
Account number to update for amount gained or lost when
converting tendered currency back to HOME currency
Purchasing gain/loss
Account number to update for amount gained or lost when
converting purchasing currency back to HOME currency*
Currency unit
Units in which this currency is tendered
Unit type
Select the unit type: Bills, Coins, Rolls, or Stacks
Value
Enter the associated value for the unit (i.e., a roll of quarters
has a value of $10.00)
Use this button to use default standard units (US)
Setting Up System Data
2-68
07/04/17
Currency Rounding Example
Setting Up System Data
2-69
07/04/17
Exercise 3: Setting Up Currency Codes
Try it Yourself!
SCENARIO:
You are adding Canadian as a currency you will process at your store.
This exercise demonstrates how to:
 Define a foreign currency for selling
 Enter the exchange rate
 Set minimum denomination to .05
 Create the units for the currency
Complete these steps:
1. Select Setup > System > Currency Codes
2. Enter CAN at “Currency code”, Canadian currency at “Description”, and CAN$ at
"Short Description".
3. Enter the current exchange rate: 1 CAN$ = .8 HOME (US dollar).
Enter a minimum denomination of .05 and use Normal rounding.
4. Use 8770000 with a profit center method of Store for the Currency rounding account.
Use 8760000 with a profit center method of Store for the Gain/loss account.
Use 8760000 with a profit center method of Location for the Purchasing gain/loss
account.
5. At “Currency unit”, enter each type of Canadian currency you accept as tender, with
the unit types and values as shown here:
Setting Up System Data
2-70
07/04/17
When completed, the currency code will look like this:
6. Save the new currency code.
--------------------------------------------END OF EXERCISE---------------------------------------------
Setting Up System Data
2-71
07/04/17
Setting Up Gift Card Codes
Select Setup > System > Gift Card Codes


Use to define the gift card “items” that can be sold
Define one code for each denomination ($10, $25, $50, etc.), or one code that
permits changes to the amount
Gift card code
Description
Identify and describe the gift card code
Selling description
Description displayed in ticket entry
Amount
Can change
Default dollar value of gift card and whether amount can be
changed at time of sale
Use reader
Use card reader to read gift card number when gift card is sold
(gift cards with magnetic stripes)
Create as a store credit
Creates gift card as a store credit so that redemption as store
credit is possible
Use in environments where gift cards are used for both gift
cards and store credits
Change due on a partially redeemed gift card must be issued
as a store credit
Gift card
When not creating gift card as a store credit, specify the
account number for G/L distributions for the sale, redemption,
and forfeiture of gift card funds
liability
redemption
forfeit
Profit center method
Account
Setting Up System Data
Identify account numbers and profit center method for each:
None, Issuing store, or Redeeming store
2-72
07/04/17
Setting Up Stored Value Card Codes
Select Setup > System > Stored Value Card Codes

Use to define the codes for stored value card processing
SVC code
Description
Identify and describe the stored value card code
Selling description
Description displayed in ticket entry
SVC type
Amount
Can change
Type of activity allowed for this code: Activate, Recharge,
Cash back, Balance inquiry
Default dollar value for Activate and Recharge types and
whether amount can be changed at time of sale
SVC liability
SVC cash back
Profit center method
Account
Specify the account number to update for distributions for the
Activate and Recharge types (Liability account) and Cash Back
type (Cash Back account)
Setting Up System Data
Select the profit center method: None or Store
2-73
07/04/17
Setting Up Pay Codes
Select Setup > System > Pay Codes

Use to define forms of payment accepted from customers for purchases, and
during entry of cash receipts for receivables
Pay code
Description
Identify and describe the pay code
Pay code type
Type of tender: Cash, Check, Credit card, Debit card, Gift card, Store
credit, EBT food stamps, or Loyalty points
Also A/R Charge if Receivables Option is registered
Button label
Label for pay code button in Point of Sale >Tickets >Ticket Entry
(“&” before a character denotes it as accelerator character)
Image file
Name of image file to display on pay code button
Must be .bmp file located in TopLevel > System > Images directory
Setting Up System Data
2-74
07/04/17
Setting Up Pay Codes
Main tab
Account
Profit center method
G/L account for distributions of this pay code
Where is profit center obtained?
If Profit center method is None, the account must be a valid
posting account; if Store, must be a valid main account
Entry not allowed for:
- A/R charge (uses customer A/R account),
- Gift card (uses Gift card redemption account defined in
Gift Card Code), or
- Store credit (uses Store credit redemption account
defined in Setup > System > Company)
Currency code
Assign to a pay code to accept foreign currency for pay code
Bank acct code
Bank account into which receipts for this tender are deposited
Valid for A/R
Pay code valid for payments on Receivables
Use reader
Use card or check reader with this pay code
Valid for all pay code types except Cash or A/R charge
EDC transactions
For checks and credit card types,
Online = attempt electronic authorization at ticket completion
Force = require user to manually enter authorization number
Do not process = no authorization performed
Prompt for:
Activate amount
Count/reconcile amount
Setting Up System Data
Does pay code appear in the Drawer Activate window (Cash
type only)
Does pay code appear in the Drawer Count and Drawer
Reconcile windows
2-75
07/04/17
Setting up Pay Codes
Tender tab
Minimum tender
Minimum amount that will be accepted as tender for pay code
If pay code is used multiple times on single ticket, sum of those
amounts must be at least the minimum specified here
Maximum tender
Maximum amount that will be accepted as tender, or unlimited
Maximum change
When giving change using this tender (even if pay code is used
multiple times on a ticket), maximum amount that can be given,
or unlimited if no maximum change
Maximum refund
When giving a refund using this tender, maximum amount that
can be given, or unlimited if no maximum refund
Set to 0 to disallow refunds in this pay code
Maximum overtender
Maximum amount above the ticket balance that can be
accepted of this pay code
Currency Rounding
Allow tender below
minimum currency
Allow change/refund
below minimum
currency
For Cash type pay codes:
Allow users to accept payments in denominations smaller than
the Minimum denomination defined for the currency
Tickets
Default amount
Default tender amount: exact amount due on ticket, pay ticket
balance, or no default
Setting Up System Data
Allow users to issue change in denominations smaller than the
Minimum denomination defined for the currency
2-76
07/04/17
Setting Up Pay Codes
Tender tab (cont.)
Use signature capture
for tender / refund
Use signature capture device for this pay code when tendering /
refunding (signature capture device must also be defined)
Open drawer
Open physical cash drawer when accepting this pay code
Allow for orders
Allow for layaways
Will this pay code be accepted for order/layaway deposits and
payments
Default document
amount
Default document final
payment
Select the default amount for document payment with this pay
code: None, Exact Doc Amt Due, Exact Doc Min Amt Due,
Pay Doc Amt Due, Pay Doc Min, or Entered amount
Indicate whether to default the final payment to this pay code
Setting Up System Data
2-77
07/04/17
Setting Up Pay Codes
Tender tab (cont.)
Prompts
Validate-1 – 3
Required
Prompts to request additional information when accepting this
pay code
Indicate whether a response is required (credit card and check
types automatically request card # or driver license info)
Custom fields
Should custom payment fields be prompted for in POS
Payment custom
prompts
If custom layout forms have been created for the ticket payment
table, is one of those forms for this pay code?
Drawer Over/Short
Amounts
Create distributions
Account
Setting Up System Data
Indicate whether to update over/short distributions and the
account to update, and the Profit center method to use: None or
Store
(Supported only for Cash, Check, Credit card, and Debit card
pay codes)
NOTE: If over/short distributions are not being captured, system
amounts (not counted or reconciled amounts) are used for
updating of distributions.
2-78
07/04/17
Setting Up Pay Codes
Checks tab

For Check pay code types only
MICR not in use
Transit number
Account number
Check number
Driver’s license
Driver’s license state
Birth date
Whether to request entry of this information when a
check is tendered, if not using a MICR reader:
Do not prompt
Yes, required
Yes, not required
Note: This information is not stored encrypted.
MICR in use
Driver’s license
Driver’s license state
Birth date
Setting Up System Data
Whether to request entry of this additional information
when using a MICR reader to scan check (which
supplies account number, check number, and bank
number):
Do not prompt
Yes, required
Yes, not required
2-79
07/04/17
Setting Up Pay Codes
Credit Card tab




Only for Credit Card pay code types
Restricts card numbers at sale time
If no prefix defined, allows any card type to be accepted at sale time and
determines type by card number
Always requests card number, expiration date, and cardholder name at sale
Click a button to set prefixes, test
mod10, and min/max lengths to
defaults for this type of credit card
Click ALL to set prefixes, test
mod10, and min/max lengths to
allow for all credit card types
Credit card prefix 1-10
Prefix characters that denote the type of card
(e.g., ‘4’ represents Visa, ‘5’ represents MasterCard, etc.)
Test mod10
Print receipt on failure
Last digit of card number is used to validate previous digits
Should a receipt print when you are unable to get
authorization for card
Min card # length
Max card # length
Verifies that number of digits entered or swiped for card
number falls between these lengths
Setting Up System Data
2-80
07/04/17
Automatically determine pay codes from card
numbers
Counterpoint can automatically determine the correct pay code to use from the swiped
card number, including credit cards, debit cards, stored value cards (SVCs), store
credits and gift cards.
To configure Counterpoint to automatically determine the correct pay code from a
swiped card number, define the correct Card prefix value(s) on the Credit Cards tab of
the Pay Codes window for each pay code for which you are using magnetic stripe cards
(e.g., credit card, debit card, gift card, store credit, and stored value card pay codes).
When Counterpoint detects the card type automatically, you will not have to select a
specific pay code for a card payment in Ticket Entry or Touchscreen Ticket Entry.
Setting Up System Data
2-81
07/04/17
Automatically determine pay codes from card
numbers
You can use the card type buttons to populate the Card prefix, Min card # length, and
Max card # length fields with the appropriate values for specific card types (e.g., Visa,
MasterCard, American Express, and so forth). A single Credit card pay code and a
single Debit card pay code can have matching Card prefix values, but ensure that the
Card prefix values for all other pay codes do not overlap.
If you have been using a single pay code for all credit cards, delete the Card prefix
values from that pay code before using this feature.
Card Type
Prefix(es)
Length
Mod10
Validation
American Express
34, 37
15
Y
Carte Blanche
389
14
Y
Diners Club
30, 38
14
Y
Discover
6011, 65
16
Y
JCB
3
2131, 1800
16
15
Y
Y
MasterCard
5, 36
16
Y
Visa
4
13, 16, 19
Y
ALL*
3, 4, 5, 1800,
2131, 6011
Min = 13
Max = 19
Y
* Note: Do not use ALL to configure card prefixes when allowing
Counterpoint to automatically determine the pay code when a card is
swiped, as well as separate credit card pay codes.
Setting Up System Data
2-82
07/04/17
Setting Up Commission Codes
Select Setup > System > Commission Codes

Use to define commission rate for sales reps

Assign code to sales rep in Setup > System > Users
Commission code
Description
Identify and describe the commission code
Commission method
Select the method for determining commission:
Margin or Price
Commission percent
Enter the percent commission to calculate
Calculate on gift cards
Indicate whether commission is given for gift card
sales
Calculate on stored value cards
Indicate whether commission is given for stored
value cards
Calculate on misc charge 1 - 5
Indicate whether commission is given on each
miscellaneous charge that is enabled
Setting Up System Data
2-83
07/04/17
Setting Up Ship-via Codes
Select Setup > System > Ship-via Codes

Use to define shipping methods to assign to customers, customer ship-to
addresses, and vendors
Ship-via code
Description
Identify and describe the ship-via code
Valid for vendor
Indicate whether the ship-via code can be set as the default for a
vendor, or used as the shipping method for a purchase request
Valid for customer
Indicate whether the ship-via code can be set as the default for a
customer, or a customer’s shipping address, and can it be used
on a ticket for a customer
Setting Up System Data
2-84
07/04/17
Setting Up Label Jobs
Select Setup > System > Label Jobs


Use to modify pre-defined label jobs or define new label jobs
Customizations must be enabled for user to use Label Editor or Query Editor, or
to print using a customized label job
Preview
alignment of label
Valid for
item labels
transfer tags
Order Management
receiving tags
user-defined labels
quick assembly tags
price sheet tags
Indicate the type of labels or tags for which the label job can be
used
Select user-defined labels for all non-item types of labels
(customers, vendors, users, stores, tax authorities, etc.)
Label filename
Label file that specifies the placement and formatting of the fields
Click
to modify the label file. Requires NiceLabel Pro
Query filename
Query that directs the columns to select from each table
Click
to modify the query
Default printer
Optional default printer to which the labels will be printed
Initially displays printer specified in associated label file
If left blank or printer is not accessible by workstation using label
job, uses Windows default printer
Default label quantity
Optional default number of labels to print for each record
Label quantity column
Database column that contains # of labels to print for a record
Order by columns
Columns to use for sorting the labels
Calculate item prices
To print prices other than "base" price levels for items
Use filter
Show filter when label job is used to print labels?
Setting Up System Data
2-85
07/04/17
Setting Up Label Jobs
Messages tab
Indicate any messages to display
before and after printing the
labels, and the text for buttons to
print or not print the labels.
History tab
Automatically updated and
displays date/time label job was
last printed, who printed the
labels, and how many labels
were printed.
Setting Up System Data
2-86
07/04/17
Pre-defined Label Jobs
Label Job
Description
Default Label file
Use System > Labels to print labels using these label jobs.
ADRS-CSALE
Address: Customer Sales History
ADRS-CUST
Address: Customers
ADRS-LOC
Address: Locations
ADRS-SHIP
Address: Customer Ship-to
ADRS-STORE
Address: Stores
ADRS-TAUTH
Address: Tax Authorities
ADRS-USER
Address: Users
ADRS-VEND
Address: Vendors
FOLD-CUST
FileFolder: Customers
FOLD-LOC
FileFolder: Locations
FOLD-SHIP
FileFolder: Customer Ship-to
FOLD-STORE
FileFolder: Stores
FOLD-TAUTH
FileFolder: Tax Authorities
FOLD-USER
FileFolder: Users
FOLD-VEND
FileFolder: Vendors
Address-Avery-5261-2Up-20PerPage.lbl
FileFolder-Avery-5366-2Up-30PerPage.lbl
Use various Inventory menu selections (Inventory > Items, Inventory > Item Labels,
Inventory > Prices > Item Prices, etc.) to print item labels using the ITEM-INV label job.
ITEM-INV
Item-Avery-5260-3Up-30PerPage.lbl
Item: Inventory Qty
Use these label jobs to print item labels when posting POs, Quick Assembly, Receivings,
and Transfers. Also use them to print item labels after posting, using Items > Labels from
Tags.
ITEM-PRICE
Item: Price Sheet History
ITEM-PURCH
Item: Purchase Orders
ITEM-QASMB
Item: Quick Assembly
ITEM-QRECV
Item: Quick Receivings
ITEM-QTRAN
Item: Quick Transfers
ITEM-RECV
Item: Receivings
ITEM-TRANI
Item: Transfer-In
ITEM-TRANO
Item: Transfer-Out
Setting Up System Data
Item-Avery-5260-3Up-30PerPage.lbl
2-87
07/04/17
Pre-defined Label Files
User-Defined Labels (for label jobs printed from System > Labels)
Label Type
File name
Printer Type
Address labels
Address-Avery-4145-1Up-Continuous.lbl
Pin-feed printer
Address labels
Address-Avery-5260-3Up-30PerPage.lbl
Laser printer
Address labels
Address-Avery-5261-2Up-20PerPage.lbl
Laser printer
Blank labels
Blank-Avery-4145-1Up-Continuous.lbl
Pin-feed printer
Blank labels
Blank-Avery-5260-3Up-30PerPage.lbl
Laser printer
Blank labels
Blank-Avery-5261-2Up-20PerPage.lbl
Laser printer
Blank labels
Blank-Avery-5366-2Up-30PerPage.lbl
Laser printer
File Folder labels
FileFolder-Avery-5366-2Up-30PerPage.lbl
Laser printer
Item Labels (for immediate item label jobs and label jobs printed from tags before or
after posting)
Label Type
File name
Printer Type
Barcode Type
Item labels
Item-Avery-4145-1Up-Continuous.lbl
Pin-feed printer
Code 39
Item labels
Item-Avery-5260-3Up-30PerPage.lbl
Laser printer
Code 39
Item labels
Item-Avery-5261-2Up-20PerPage.lbl
Laser printer
Code 39
Item labels
Item-Blaster-Butterfly-2.00x0.50.lbl
Barcode Blaster
Interleave 2 of 5
Item labels
Item-Blaster-Label-2.40x1.00.lbl
Barcode Blaster
Code 39
Item labels
Item-Blaster-Split-2.40x1.00.lbl
Barcode Blaster
Interleave 2 of 5
Item labels
Item-Blaster-Tag-2.40x1.00.lbl
Barcode Blaster
Code 39
Item labels
Item-Datamax-Butterfly-2.00x0.50.lbl
Datamax
Interleave 2 of 5
Item labels
Item-Datamax-Label-2.00x1.00.lbl
Datamax
Code 39
Item labels
Item-Datamax-Label-2.40x1.00.lbl
Datamax
Code 39
Item labels
Item-Datamax-Split-2.00x1.00.lbl
Datamax
Interleave 2 of 5
Item labels
Item-Datamax-Split-2.40x1.00.lbl
Datamax
Interleave 2 of 5
Item labels
Item-Datamax-Tag-2.00x1.00.lbl
Datamax
Code 39
Item labels
Item-Datamax-Tag-2.40x1.00.lbl
Datamax
Code 39
Item labels
Item-Eltron-Butterfly-2.00x0.50.lbl
Eltron TLP-2242
Interleave 2 of 5
Item labels
Item-Eltron-Label-2.40x1.00.lbl
Eltron TLP-2242
Code 39
Item labels
Item-Eltron-Split-2.40x1.00.lbl
Eltron TLP-2242
Interleave 2 of 5
Item labels
Item-Eltron-Tag-2.40x1.00.lbl
Eltron TLP-2242
Code 39
Setting Up System Data
2-88
07/04/17
Setting Up Message Groups
Select Setup > System > Message Groups

Users with Message Manager enabled will be able to create groups
PCI Alert!
Never send card numbers or any sensitive cardholder data via e-mail,
instant messages, or any other end-user messaging system.
Setting Up System Data
2-89
07/04/17
Defining Sales Taxes
Tax code
assign to each store;
optionally assign to customers and shipping addresses
Tax authority 1 (state)
Rule 1
Tax category 1, Tax category 2, etc.
Rule 2
Rule 3
Tax authority 2 (county)
Rule 1
Rule 2
Tax authority 3 (city)
Rule 1
Rule 2
Rule 3
Tax authority 4, etc.
Each rule defines:
 Tax percentage (up to 3)
 Whether to use penny tax table
 Account number for G/L
 If tax holiday is in effect, and dates of holiday
 Is tax itself taxable by a different authority?
 Which ticket items are affected ("tax categories")
 Minimum unit taxable amount
 Maximum unit taxable amount
 Per unit tax amount
 Whether to tax gift cards
 Whether to tax stored value cards
 Whether to tax miscellaneous charges (e.g., "freight")
Setting Up System Data
2-90
07/04/17
Setting Up Tax Categories
Select Setup > Inventory > Tax Categories

Use to define categories to assign to items that have special sales tax
requirements
Setting Up System Data
2-91
07/04/17
Setting Up Tax Authorities
Select Setup > System > Tax Authorities

Tax authorities or jurisdictions for which taxes are collected from customers or
collected by vendors (when using value-added tax in Purchasing)

Different authority for each tax that must be tracked separately

Tax authorities are assembled into tax codes that are assigned to stores,
customers and/or vendors
Main tab
Enter the address
for the authority.
Contacts tab
Enter the information
for the individual you
contact at this authority.
Setting Up System Data
2-92
07/04/17
Setting Up Tax Authorities
Rules tab
Main tab
Rule
Description
Name and description of this rule for the authority
Multiple rules are processed in the order they appear
Tax account
Profit center method
Account number to update for taxes collected by this rule, and
method to determine profit center.
Purchasing Tax account
Profit center method
When using value-added tax in Purchasing, account number
to update for taxes collected by this rule for Purchasing
transactions, and method to determine profit center
Rounding method
Method to use when rounding tax amount to two decimals:
None, Down, Up, or Normal
Use tax holiday
Begin date / End date
Skip assessing the tax in this rule during the holiday date
range
Tax is taxable
No =
Setting Up System Data
Tax for this rule is not subject to tax, and this rule does
not charge tax on any other tax
Yes = tax for this rule is assessed tax by other rules in this
tax code that are set to Charge tax on other rules,
but this rule does not charge tax on taxes from other
rules
Charge tax on other rules = tax for this rule is not taxed by
a different rule, but this rule charges tax on taxes for
other rules with "Tax is taxable" set to Yes
2-93
07/04/17
Setting Up Tax Authorities
Rules tab
Applies to tab
Rule applies to
Tax categories
Does this rule apply to:
- all taxable line items on the ticket
- only items with the specified tax categories (up to 6)
- all items except those with the specified tax categories
- no items (if rule is only for gift cards, stored value cards,
or misc charges)
Tax amt below min
Assess tax for this rule only if item's unit price (per stocking unit)
exceeds this amount
Indicate whether the amount below the minimum is taxed
Max unit taxable amt
Unlimited
Stop assessing tax for this rule when item's unit price reaches
this amount, or "unlimited" if no maximum
Stop charging tax
To stop assessing tax for subsequent rules within this tax
authority (rules for other authorities within the tax code are used)
Tax gift cards
Indicate whether to assess tax on sold gift cards
Tax stored value cards
Indicate whether to assess tax on activated & recharged stored
value cards
Tax misc charge 1-5
Indicate whether to assess tax on Point of Sale miscellaneous
charges
PO tax misc charge 1-5
Indicate whether to calculate tax on Purchasing miscellaneous
charges
Min unit taxable amt
Setting Up System Data
2-94
07/04/17
Setting Up Tax Authorities
Rules tab
Tax tab
Tax percent 1-3
On taxable amount over
Up to three tax rates to assess for this rule, and minimum
amount to which the tax rate applies
Per-unit tax
To assess a fixed dollar amount as the tax for each unit
purchased (e.g., tax for each gallon of gas or for each pack of
cigarettes)
Use penny tax table
To control the amount of tax to collect for the penny portion of
an item's price
Click
to define the
penny tax table
Setting Up System Data
2-95
07/04/17
Exercise 4: Setting Up Tax Authorities
Try it Yourself!
SCENARIO:
You are opening a new store in Indiana and need to add Indiana as a tax
authority for your store. Indiana charges a flat 7% tax on purchases over .00.
Department of Revenue
Contact: Taxpayer Services
100 N Senate Ave.
Phone: 317-233-4015
Indianapolis, IN 46204
URL: www.in.gov
This exercise demonstrates how to:


Add a new tax authority
Create a tax rule
Here are the steps that you will need to complete:
1. Select Setup > System > Tax Authorities
2. Enter Indiana at Tax authority and Indiana Department of Revenue at Name
3. Enter the address for the Indiana Department of Revenue
Setting Up System Data
2-96
07/04/17
4. On the Contacts tab, enter the contact, phone, and URL information
5. On the Rules tab-Main tab, enter INTAX at Rule and Indiana State Sales Tax at
Description.
Select Store at Profit center method and the Sales tax payable for Account.
Indiana rounds up half pennies, so select Normal for the Rounding method.
Setting Up System Data
2-97
07/04/17
6. On the Rules tab-Applies to tab, select for this rule to be applied to All lines, with no
Minimum or Maximum unit taxable amount. Subsequent tax rules will apply. The tax is not
charged on gift cards, stored value cards, or miscellaneous charges.
7. On the Rules tab-Tax tab, enter 7 at Tax percent 1.
8. Save the new tax authority.
--------------------------------------------END OF EXERCISE---------------------------------------------
Setting Up System Data
2-98
07/04/17
Setting Up Tax Authorities
Tax Holiday Example
Tennessee State
This rule applies only
to items with a tax
category of “BTS”.
“Stop charging tax”
means that if this rule
is applied to an item,
Counterpoint will skip
looking at subsequent
rules for this authority.
This rule will assess
the normal 7% sales tax
on items with a tax
category of “BTS” –
except during the tax
holiday date range,
when they’ll be tax-free.
Setting Up System Data
2-99
07/04/17
Setting Up Tax Authorities
Tax Calculation Example
Tennessee State
"SINGLEMAX" rule
Setting Up System Data
2-100
07/04/17
Setting Up Tax Codes
Select Setup > System > Tax Codes

Use to list all tax authorities for which taxes will be collected for a single sale in
Point of Sale or a single purchase in Purchasing

Assign a tax code to each store and, optionally, to any customer and/or customer
shipping address to control tax assessment in Point of Sale

Optionally assign a tax code to each location and/or each vendor to control tax
assessment in Purchasing
Tax Reports
- Tax History (Sales History > Reports)
- Tax Exceptions (Sales History > Reports)

Tax override and tax code changes on tickets
- Sales Analysis by Group

Item/Line tax category

Customer/Header tax code
- Combined Tax History (Sales History > Reports)

Taxes collected from customers and taxes paid to vendors
Setting Up System Data
2-101
07/04/17
Assigning Tax Codes (Sales Tax)
Select Setup > Point of Sale > Stores
Indicate which tax code takes
precedence when calculating sales
tax: the Store’s or the Customer’s.
You are required to assign a default
tax code to each store.
 If you select Store:
The store's tax code is always
used.
 If you select Customer:
1st
-
the tax code assigned to the Ship-to
address for the customer is used.
2nd
- if no tax code is assigned to the
shipping address, or a shipping
address is not specified for the
sale, the Customer's tax code is
used.
3rd
- if no tax code is assigned to the
customer, the Store's tax code is
used.
Setting Up System Data
2-102
07/04/17
Assigning Tax Codes (Purchasing Tax)
Select Setup > Inventory > Locations
If using value-added tax in
Purchasing, indicate which tax code
takes precedence when calculating
sales tax on purchasing documents:
the Location’s or the Vendor’s.
 If you select Location:
if one is entered for the location,
the location's tax code is always
used.
 If you select Vendor:
if one is entered for a vendor, the
vendor's tax code is used.
If neither the location nor vendor has a tax code assigned, no tax is charged on the purchasing
document.
You can also choose to change the tax code used on a purchasing document.
Setting Up System Data
2-103
07/04/17
Setting Up the Accounting Interface
Accounting Packages compatible with Counterpoint V8.5.3
Direct Interfaces
Developer
Product Name
Compatible Versions
Sage Software
BusinessWorks/
BusinessWorks Gold
5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0, 2009–2013,2015
Sage 100 Advanced (MAS200)
3.x, 4.2, 4.3, 2014-2016
Sage 100 Standard (MAS90)
3.x, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 2014-2016
Microsoft Business
Solutions
Small Business Financials
8.0, 9.0, 10.0
Microsoft Dynamics GP
7.5, 8.0, 9.0, 10.0, 2010 R2, 2013,
2015
Intuit
QuickBooks US
QuickBooks Canada
QuickBooks US and Canada
2003 - 2016
2005 - 2015
2008 - 2017
Export Interfaces
Developer
Product Name
Compatible Versions
Sage Software
Sage 300 ERP (Accpac)
4.0, 5.1 – 6.0, 2014
Sage 100 Fund Accounting
5.1 or later
Sage 50 (Peachtree)
2005-2008, 2009-2017
Intuit
QuickBooks
2000 – 2017
Microsoft Business
Solutions
Solomon IV
Microsoft Dynamics SL
5.0, 5.5
6.5, 7
Blackbaud
The Financial Edge
All versions
Passport
Business Solution
11, 12
Direct Export



Use
Use

Use
Use


Use


Use

Setup > System > Accounting Interface to define the interface
System > Accounting > Utilities > Import Accounts to build account
numbers in Counterpoint
Setup > System > Accounts to build account numbers in Counterpoint
System > Accounting > Utilities >I mport Vendors and Export
Vendors to synchronize vendor information
System > Accounting > Interface Distributions to interface
distributions
System > Accounting > Voucher Receivings to interface A/P vouchers
Setting Up System Data
2-104
07/04/17
Setting Up the Accounting Interface
Select Setup > System > Accounting Interface

Use to specify settings for interfacing Counterpoint data to accounting software
Export Interface
General Ledger tab
Integrate with G/L
Indicate whether to integrate with your General Ledger
Data file path
This field is currently not used
Correction account
Enter or lookup the account to which correction distributions will
be posted. A correction distribution is created when a batch of
transferred G/L distributions is out-of-balance.
Batch number
Enter a number to use for the next batch of transferred
distributions
Batch method
Specify how to handle the batch number: Auto-increment or
Reuse
Setting Up System Data
2-105
07/04/17
Setting Up the Accounting Interface
Export Interface
General Ledger tab
Command type
Use DTS to output the data from the interface tables, use an
Executable program, or select None if you will use database
triggers to process data from the interface tables
Output file path
and name
For DTS and Executable command types, name of the file (and
path) to be produced by DTS or the external program
Action when file
exists
What action should be taken if the export file already exists?
Path to DTSRun
DTS package name
For DTS command type, path where dtsrun.exe is located and
the name of the DTS package that exports data from the
interface tables
Command to run
Command arguments
For Executable command type, name of the program that
exports the data from the interface tables and any arguments
that need to be passed to that program
Setting Up System Data
2-106
07/04/17
Setting Up the Accounting Interface
Export Interface
Accounts Payable tab
Integrate with A/P
Indicate whether to integrate with Accounts Payable
Allow concurrent
vouchering
Allow multiple users to voucher invoices at the same
time
Data file path
This field is currently not used
Batch number
Enter a number to use for the next batch of transferred
distributions
Template vendor
Enter or lookup a vendor to serve as a template when
adding vendors from CP to accounting
Invoice variance account
Account to update if vendor's invoice amount is different
than amount on Counterpoint
Receivings accrual account
Account to update if a receiving is only partially
vouchered
Gain/loss account
When using multi-currency purchasing, enter or lookup
the account to which gain/loss amounts will be updated
when purchasing foreign currencies are converted into
your home currency. Use the same account that you
specified for Purchasing gain/loss when setting up
foreign currency codes.
Setting Up System Data
2-107
07/04/17
Setting Up the Accounting Interface
Export Interface
Accounts Payable tab
Use voucher number
Next voucher number
Indicate whether to use a voucher number sequence
assigned by Counterpoint rather than your accounting
software package. Available for Great Plains and Small
Business Financials.
Command type
Use DTS to output the data from the interface tables, use an
Executable program, or select None if you will use database
triggers to process data from the interface tables
Output file path and name
For DTS and Executable command types, name of the file
(and path) to be produced by DTS or the external program
Action when file exists
What action should be taken if export file already exists?
Path to DTSRun
DTS package name
For DTS command type, path where dtsrun.exe is located
and the name of the DTS package that exports the data from
the interface tables
Command to run
Command arguments
For Executable command type, name of the program that
exports the data from the interface tables and any arguments
that need to be passed to that program
A/P account number
Specify the account to which the export interface will voucher
receivings. Used for QuickBooks, Peachtree, and MIP
Setting Up System Data
2-108
07/04/17
Setting Up the Accounting Interface
How the Export Interface works
PO_RECVR_HIST
SY_DIST
Distributions in CounterPoint
Receivings history in CounterPoint
System / Accounting /
Interface Distributions
System / Accounting /
Voucher Receivings
AI_DIST
AI_VCHR, AI_VCHR_DIST
Filtered distributions in CounterPoint
Filtered receivings in CounterPoint
DTS
DTS
Output export file
Output export file
Import export file into G/L
Import export file into A/P
Accounting Software
Default G/L export file name
Default A/P export file name
Sage ERP
GLBATCH.CSV
APBATCH.CSV
QuickBooks
GL-DIST.IIF
AP-DIST.IIF
Solomon
SYNGL.TXT
SYNAP.TXT
Dynamics SL
SYNGL.TXT
SYNAP.TXT
Sage Fund Accounting
MIP-GL.TXT
MIP-AP.TXT
Sage 50
GENERAL.CSV
PURCHASE.CSV
Financial Edge
FinancialEdge-GL.CSV
FinancialEdge-AP.CSV
Passport
EXDIST00.ASC
IMPVCH00.DAT
Setting Up System Data
2-109
07/04/17
Setting Up the Accounting Interface
Defining an Direct interface

Select your direct accounting
package at Accounting
system (this is a protected
change field)
Company name
Company name used in accounting software
BusinessWorks=Company ID
Sage 100 Adv & Std = 3-character Company Code
MS Bus Sol’n = Company ID
System data path
(Not used)
For all Microsoft Business Solution products:
Database or
ODBC name
ODBC Data Source Name (“DSN”) for company’s data.
Must be different than system DSN used in accounting
software.
User ID
Password
If using Windows authentication to log in to Microsoft SQL
Server (i.e., your Windows network user ID and password),
leave these fields blank. Otherwise, enter the user ID and
password that you use to log in to the SQL server.
Setting Up System Data
2-110
07/04/17
Setting Up the Accounting Interface
General Ledger
What can be interfaced
Using this menu selection
Accounting distributions
System > Accounting > Interface Distributions
Account numbers (Direct only)
System > Accounting > Utilities > Import accounts
Used only for
Export interfaces
Data file path
(Not used)
Correction account
Correction account for out-of-balance distributions.
Also used for BusinessWorks if a single batch contains
more than 99 entries. The correction account will be the
99th entry to ensure the batch is in balance, and a new
batch is created for the other entries, along with an entry to
the correction account that offsets the correcting entry in
the previous batch.
For all Microsoft Business Solution products:
Batch number
Batch number to assign to G/L batch in accounting.
Batch method
Re-use or increment batch number entered in prior field
each time distributions are interfaced.
Setting Up System Data
2-111
07/04/17
Setting Up the Accounting Interface
Accounts Payable
What can be interfaced
Using this menu selection
Receivings
System > Accounting > Voucher Receivings
Vendor name and address
(Direct only)
System > Accounting > Utilities > Import Vendors
System > Accounting > Utilities > Export Vendors
Used only for
Export interfaces
Data file path
(Not used)
Template vendor
Vendor whose values will be copied for fields not supplied
by Counterpoint when exporting new vendors to
accounting. Vendor must exist in both Counterpoint and
accounting.
Invoice variance account
Account to use for difference in invoice amount vs cost of
inventory + miscellaneous charges when generating
default distributions for an Accounts Payable voucher.
For all Microsoft Business Solution products:
Batch number
Setting Up System Data
Batch number to assign to A/P batch created in
accounting.
2-112
07/04/17
Setting Up the Accounting Interface
Account number mapping
Click

Use to specify how Counterpoint account numbers and G/L account numbers link
to each other

Define after accounting package is installed
BusinessWorks
Account numbers in BusinessWorks have two segments: an 8-character Account and a 3character Department separated by a “.”. For example, a 4-digit account and 3-digit
department of 1234.123 is actually stored in BusinessWorks as 00001234.123.
For use when interfacing distributions from
Counterpoint to BusinessWorks, indicate
what part(s) of the Counterpoint account
number to use for each segment in
BusinessWorks.
For use when importing account numbers
from BusinessWorks to Counterpoint,
indicate what part of each BusinessWorks
segment to use to create the Counterpoint
account numbers.
Setting Up System Data
2-113
07/04/17
Setting Up the Accounting Interface
Microsoft Business Solutions ("MBS")
Account numbers in MBS products have three segments. The mapping rules must be defined to
match the MBS company's account number format. The string of digits in each segment
corresponds to the segment number. For example, if the account structure is 3-4-2, the account
number will be 111-2222-33.
When not using profit centers, define as "Literal value".
If using profit centers, define as "From account", with
starting position and length of profit center characters.
Setting Up System Data
2-114
07/04/17
Importing Account Numbers
Select System > Accounting > Utilities > Import Accounts

Use to build new account numbers and/or update existing account numbers in
Counterpoint, from account numbers in the accounting software

Available only for Direct accounting interfaces
Update method
Indicate if only new accounts should be added to Counterpoint, if only
existing account number information should be updated, or if both
types of account numbers should be updated
New accounts
If Add or Both was selected for Update method, select if the new
accounts should be marked a valid main accounts and/or valid profit
center accounts
Account
Specify the range of account numbers to be added and/or updated in
Counterpoint
Setting Up System Data
2-115
07/04/17
Importing and Exporting Vendors
Select System > Accounting > Utilities > Import Vendors

Use to add or update vendors in Counterpoint from vendors defined in
the accounting software

Available only for Direct accounting interfaces
Indicate if only new vendors
should be added, if only
existing vendors should be
updated, or if both types of
vendors should be updated.
Specify the range of vendors
to be added and/or updated.
Select System > Accounting > Utilities > Export Vendors

Use to add or update vendors in the accounting software from vendors defined in
Counterpoint

Available only for Direct accounting interfaces
Indicate if only new vendors
should be added to the
accounting system, if only
existing vendors should be
updated, or if both types of
vendors should be updated.
Identify the template vendor
from whom non-Counterpoint
values will be copied, and the
range of vendors to add/update.
Setting Up System Data
2-116
07/04/17
SECTION 3: SETTING UP INVENTORY DATA
Sequence of Inventory Setup ..................................................................... 1
Setting Up Locations .................................................................................. 2
Setting Up Inventory Control ...................................................................... 4
Setting Up Account Codes ....................................................................... 13
Setting Up Units ....................................................................................... 16
Setting Up Location Groups ..................................................................... 17
Setting Up Item Attributes......................................................................... 18
Setting Up Item Profile Codes .................................................................. 19
Setting Up Item Categories ...................................................................... 20
Setting Up Item Sub-Categories ............................................................... 21
Setting Up Item Prompt Codes ................................................................. 22
Setting Up Serial Prompt Codes ............................................................... 23
Exercise 1: Using Serial Prompts.................................................................................. 24
Setting Up Barcode Types........................................................................ 26
Setting Up Label Codes ........................................................................... 27
Setting Up Tare Weight Codes ................................................................. 28
Setting Up Adjustment Reason Codes ..................................................... 29
Alternatives for Setting Up Items .............................................................. 30
Sequence of Inventory Setup
Sequence for setting up a new company’s Inventory data
You can set up Inventory data for a new company after the System data is set up.
Set up Inventory data by running the menu selection in this order (all selections in steps 1 –
14 are under Setup > Inventory):
1
Locations
Define the name of at least the primary stocking location for your
company. Also define the name of any location that you specified
when setting up workgroups (using Setup > System >
Workgroups).
2
Inventory Control
Set up the Inventory Control record.
3
Account Codes
Define at least one account code that can be assigned to items.
4
Units
Identify stocking and alternate units to assign to items
Locations, Inventory Control, Account Codes and Units are required setup for Inventory.
The following setup selections are optional, but if you intend to use them, they should be
defined before you set up your items.
5
Location Groups
Identify groups of locations that can be used for purchasing, if you
wish to purchase for more than a single location at once.
6
Item Attributes
Define the item attribute values that will be valid for each item
attribute. Each item can be assigned up to six attributes.
7
Profile Codes
If you enabled any Item Code profiles when setting up the Inventory
Control record, define the profile codes that will be valid for each.
8
Item Categories
Set up the category names that you want to use for grouping your
items. Each item can be assigned one category.
9
Sub-Categories
Set up sub-category names that you want to use as a sub-grouping for
your items. Each item can be assigned one sub-category.
10
Prompt Codes
Set up any Prompt Codes to define special information to request
(e.g., expiration date, lot number) when specific items are sold. Each
item can be assigned up to three prompt codes.
11
Serial Prompt
Codes
Set up any Serial Prompt Codes to define additional information to
request when working with serial numbers. Each serialized item can
be assigned up to three serial prompt codes.
12
Barcode Types
Set up as many barcode types as you will need to define multiple
barcodes for each item.
13
Label Codes
Set up any label codes that you want to assign to items. Each item can
be assigned one label code.
14
Tare Weight
Codes
Set up a tare weight code for the group of containers used to hold
items that are weighed.
15
Adjustment
Reason Codes
Set up the reasons why inventory may be adjusted.
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-1
06/05/15
Setting Up Locations
Select Setup >Inventory > Locations





Use to define each stocking or ship-from location
 Primary stocking location
 Any location assigned to workgroups (“This location”)
Use to define each pricing or price-from location
Identify tax code used with value-added tax in Purchasing
Identify tax ID number for location
Establish Dynamic Min/Max parameters
Address tab
Purchasing uses
tax code from
When using value-added tax in Purchasing, use tax code from
vendor or from location in Purchasing documents
Tax code
Tax code to use in Purchasing documents for location
Tax ID #
If required to track tax identification numbers, Tax ID number that's
specific to a location. Used as default for "Your tax ID" in Purchasing
documents.
If left blank, uses Tax ID number for company.
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-2
06/05/15
Setting Up Locations
Contacts tab
Other tab
If company uses profit centers,
account entered here must be
marked as a "Valid profit center"
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-3
06/05/15
Setting Up Inventory Control
Select Setup > Inventory > Control
Main tab
Costing
Cost method
Defaults to Average cost, used throughout company
Separate costs tracked for each location
Miscellaneous items use Cost of sales %
Serial costing
Use actual cost of Always serialized items
Available only when using Serial Numbers Option
B/S Inventory
pft ctr method
Where is profit center obtained from when updating distributions to
B/S inventory accounts for items?
None = use full B/S inv acct in item’s account code
without profit center substitutions
Location = substitute location’s profit center
Category = substitute item category’s profit center
Sub-category = substitute item sub-category profit center
Drop-ship clearing
pft ctr method
Where is profit center obtained from when updating distributions to
B/S inventory accounts for items?
Physical count
posting uses
When posting physical count transactions that generate adjustments
to inventory, use cost and price that were frozen when count
transaction was created or use item’s current cost and price?
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-4
06/05/15
Setting Up Inventory Control
Main tab cont.
Barcodes
Item barcode type
Barcode type to associate with barcode specified at "Barcode"
in Inventory > Items (Protected change field)
Use the barcode type identified when barcode is entered using
the Barcodes tab in Inventory > Items or Inventory >
Barcode Management
Generate cell barcodes
(add-on-the-fly)
Are cell barcodes created when adding on-the-fly?
Default cell barcode
prefix
Default value for "Cell barcode prefix" field on the Generate
Barcodes form
Select Auto-assign to assign sequential barcodes to gridded
items, using "Next barcode number" for current workgroup
During physical count
freeze quantity by
Select the value to use when freezing items for a physical
count: Quantity on hand or Quantity available
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-5
06/05/15
Setting Up Inventory Control
Item Setup tab
Inventory
Show inventory
setup options
After defining a new item, allow user to select the locations for
which to add inventory records, or instead automatically create the
inventory records for the locations identified at "Create inventory for"
Create inventory for
If showing inventory setup options, choice here is default for "Create
inventory for" field on Create Item form
If not showing inventory setup options, choice here determines the
location(s) for which inventory records are automatically created
when the user saves a new item
Show inventory
If showing inventory setup options, choice here is used as default
for "Show inventory" checkbox on Create Item form
If not showing inventory setup options, show Inventory window
after inventory records are created when user saves a new item
Add-on-the-fly
Simplified item addon-the-fly
Enable the use of the Simplified form when adding items on-the-fly
Show grid setup
options
After defining a new gridded item and using “Copy from” on toolbar,
allow user to select whether to copy grid definition and model stock
from another item, whether to generate cell barcodes, and whether
to display Grid Definition form
Show grid definition
Allow user to enter a new item’s grid definition
If showing grid setup options, choice here is used as default for
“Show grid definition” checkbox on Create Item form
If not showing grid setup options, you should choose to enable
“Show grid definition”
A grid definition must be created for each gridded item, and user
interaction is required to either copy the definition from a different
item or to define the grid
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-6
06/05/15
Setting Up Inventory Control
Item Setup tab
New item setup using ‘Copy from
Item number’ (not the toolbar button)
Copy item notes
Show item notes form
Indicate whether to copy item notes
Determine whether to display the Item notes
form
Copy substitute items
Indicate whether to copy substitute items
Copy inventory
Show inventory form
Indicate whether to copy inventory records
Determine whether to display the Inventory form
Copy item prices
Show price form
Indicate whether to copy item prices
Determine whether to display the Item Prices
form
Copy vendor item
Show vendor item form
Indicate whether to copy vendor item records
Determine whether to display the Vendor Item
form
Copy ecommerce item category
Show ecommerce item category form
Indicate whether to copy ecommerce category
Determine whether to display the Ecommerce
category form
Copy bills of materials
Show bills of materials form
Indicate whether to copy bills of materials
information
Determine whether to display the Bills of
Materials form
Copy sales kits
Show sales kits form
Indicate whether to copy sales kit information
Determine whether to display the Sales kits
form
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-7
06/05/15
Setting Up Inventory Control
Pricing tab
Price levels
Number of price levels to use, up to 3 (up to 6 with Advanced
Pricing Option)
Price rounding method
Normal, Down, or Up
If unit price
computes to:
Use location prices
Use cell prices
Use location-cell prices
Rounding Results
1.231
Up
1.24
Down
1.23
Normal
1.23
1.235
1.24
1.23
1.24
1.239
1.24
1.23
1.24
Allows different prices at each location for same items
Allows different prices for each cell of a gridded item
Allows different prices for each cell of a gridded item at each
location
(Requires Advanced Pricing Option)
Margin indicator
Actual margin less than
minimum margin
Actual margin between
minimum and target
margin
Actual margin meets or
exceeds target margin
Setting Up Inventory Data
Select the color to indicate the obtained margin level
3-8
06/05/15
Setting Up Inventory Control
Item Profile tab

Use to specify how many (up to five) of each type of item profile to enable for items

Use to specify how many (up to six) attributes to enable for items
Code profile
= value entered for item must be predefined Profile Code
Date profile
= value entered for item must be in date format
Alpha profile
= value entered for item can be any alphanumeric characters
Numeric profile
= value entered for item must be numeric
Attributes
= value entered for item must be predefined choice
NOTE: Use Setup > System > Quick Setup to change the display labels for the profiles and
attributes.
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-9
06/05/15
Setting Up Inventory Control
Print Options tab

Use to specify whether and how inventory transaction worksheets and journals print at
the time the associated transactions are posted
Same five
choices for each
Copies of every posting journal are also available from history
Journals are created at the end of posting, after all data has been updated
Print distributions
Show breakdown of account numbers and amounts updated by
corresponding transaction posting
Prints as final page of posting journal
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-10
06/05/15
Setting Up Inventory Control
Transfers tab
Transfer clearing pft ctr
method
Used for Transfer Out and Transfer In Distributions.
Source of profit center when updating distributions to
transfer clearing account(s) for items: None, Location,
Category, or Sub-category
Prompt for line information
Prompt users for additional information each time they
add lines to a Transfer Out document
Use Transfer Out misc chg
Use Transfer In misc chg
Profit center method
Account
Enter miscellaneous charges (e.g., freight) at time
transfer is created? At time transfer is received?
Source of profit center when updating distributions to
transfer accounts: None, Location, Category, or Subcategory
Any miscellaneous charges entered while processing a
transfer will be allocated into inventory cost for the
receiving location and the accounts you specify here will
be credited during posting
Can add lines on Transfer Ins Allow users to add lines to Transfer In documents
Quick Transfers
Use misc chg
Profit center method
Account
Setting Up Inventory Data
Allow miscellaneous charges to be entered at time Quick
Transfer is entered
Amount will be allocated to cost of item at receiving
location
Source of profit center when updating miscellaneous
charge distributions to account entered here
None = use full account without profit center substitution
Location = substitute location’s profit center
Category = substitute item’s category profit center
Sub-category = substitute item’s sub-category profit
center
3-11
06/05/15
Setting Up Inventory Control
Labels tab
Default label job for:
Identify the default label job when printing labels for each
Item of these activities
Transfer out
Transfer in
Quick transfer
Quick assembly
Price sheet
Tag creation method for:
Transfer out
Transfer in
Quick transfer
Quick assembly
Price sheet
Setting Up Inventory Data
Indicate whether to generate tags for label printing for
each type of activity, and if labels can be printed from the
tags at the time the transaction is posted
Prompt user to print and Print automatically generate
tags, and permit printing of labels from the tags at the time
the transaction is posted
To print labels from tags after posting, use Inventory /
Labels from Tags
3-12
06/05/15
Setting Up Account Codes
Select Setup > Inventory > Account Codes

Use to define set of account numbers to use for distributions when transactions are
posted for items

Each item is assigned one account code
Assets / Liabilities tab
For each type of account, the account number to use and
the method for determining the profit center:
None
= use entire account number specified
without replacing profit center characters
Location = replace profit center characters with those
from location’s profit center
Category = replace profit center characters with those
from item category’s profit center
Profit center method
Account Sub-category = replace profit center characters with those
from sub-category’s profit center
B/S Inventory, Transfer clearing and drop-ship clearing
profit center methods are set in Setup > Inventory >
Control
B/S inventory
Receivings accrual
Transfer clearing
RTV accrual
Drop-ship clearing
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-13
06/05/15
Profit Center Methods
Profits for a company can be tracked at various levels.
The profit center method
you select determines
which profit center is used to
replace the profit center
portion of the specified
account number.
If Profit center
method is
Account number
specified must be
Profit Center portion of account #
replaced with:
Location
Valid main account
Location’s profit center
Store
Valid main account
Store’s profit center
Document
Valid main account
Document’s profit center
Category
Valid main account
Item category’s profit center
Sub-category
Valid main account
Sub-category’s profit center
None
Valid posting account
Not replaced
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-14
06/05/15
Setting Up Account Codes
Sales/COGS tab
Sales
Cost-of-goods sold
Customer returns
Cost-of-goods returned
For each type of account, the account number to use and the
method for determining the profit center: None, Document,
Location, Store, Category, or Sub-category
Other COGS tab
Adjustments
Distributions for adjustments to inventory
Cost correction
Used to record the difference between B/S Inventory value and
value of merchandise (QOH x Avg cost)
Physical count
Distributions for adjustments made through physical count
Use adjustment account if not tracking separately
Misc item expense
Used for non-inventory and service items, rather than B/S
inventory account
RTV adjustments
Distributions for adjustments made through RTVs
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-15
06/05/15
Setting Up Units
Select Setup > Inventory > Units

Use to define stocking and alternate units to assign to your items

Each unit must include a label and description

Optionally, enter a conversion setting. Conversion used as default if unit is selected as
an alternate unit for an item
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-16
06/05/15
Setting Up Location Groups
Select Setup > Inventory > Location Groups

Use to define groups of stocking locations for purposes of purchasing for multiple
locations at the same time or for printing reports

A location can be in multiple groups

Don’t include a pricing location in a location group if it doesn’t actually have inventory

Create a location group that includes all locations if you want to order merchandise and
generate the Purchasing Advice report for all locations
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-17
06/05/15
Setting Up Item Attributes
Select Setup > Inventory > Attributes

Use as additional ways to group items, besides Categories and Sub-Categories
Attribute
Description
Name and description of an attribute as it will appear in a lookup list
Item attribute 1- 6
Specify the attributes for which the defined value (“GRAPHITE”
above) can be selected for an item
The attribute value can be assigned to more than one item attribute
‘slot’
Note: To display your own label instead of Item attribute for each of the check boxes on this
form (and anywhere else that phrase appears), use Setup > System > Quick Setup to
change the display label.
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-18
06/05/15
Setting Up Item Profile Codes
Select Setup > Inventory > Profile Codes

Use to define valid values for Item Profile Codes that were turned on in Setup >
Inventory > Control or Setup > System > Quick Setup
Note: To display your own label instead of Code profile, use Setup > System > Quick Setup
to modify the Display label.
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-19
06/05/15
Setting Up Item Categories
Select Setup > Inventory > Categories

Use to group items for pricing, reporting, and profit margin purposes

Assign one category to each item
Category
Enter a name for the category
Description
Enter a description for the category
Profit center
When constructing the account number for distributions, what
is the profit center to use for this category? (Entered account
must be marked as a Valid profit center)
Used only if Profit center method in account code assigned to
any item in this category indicates Category
Price-1 through Price-6
minimum margin
Enter a value to use as the minimum margin for each price
level for this category when prompting for price or doing price
overrides
NOTE: Minimum margins for Price-2 through Price-6 are only
used in the Price Sheet calculator
Target margin
Desired margin for the category
Line custom prompts
If custom layout forms have been created for the ticket line
table, is one of those forms for this category?
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-20
06/05/15
Setting Up Item Sub-Categories
Select Setup > Inventory > Sub-Categories

Use to further group items for pricing and reporting purposes

Click
to assign the sub-category to all categories, or use *
Sub-category
Enter a name for the sub-category
Category
Category for which this sub-category is valid, * if valid for all
categories
Description
Enter a description for the sub-category
Profit center
When constructing the account number for distributions, what
is the profit center to use for this sub-category? (Entered
account must be marked as a “Valid profit center”)
Used only if "Profit center method" in account code assigned
to any item in this sub-category indicates Sub-category
Price-1 through Price-6
Minimum margin
Minimum profit margin deemed acceptable for the subcategory
NOTE: Minimum margins for Price-2 through Price-6 are only
used in the Price Sheet calculator
Target margin
Desired margin for the sub-category
Line custom prompts
If custom layout forms have been created for the ticket line
table, is one of those forms for this sub-category?
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-21
06/05/15
Setting Up Item Prompt Codes
Select Setup > Inventory > Prompt Codes

Use to define the additional information to ask for an item when it is sold

Assign up to three Item Prompt Codes to each item

Prompt Code and entered value are retained in ticket
Examples:
Serial number
Lot number
Brief instructions
Monogram
Date of birth
License number
Certificate number
Test constraint and error message
Prompt code
Enter a name for the prompt code
Description
Enter a description for the prompt code
Text to display
Prompt to display in ticket entry to request the information
Data type
Number of decimals
Entry characters must be this type: alphanumeric, date, or numeric
If numeric, number of decimals allowed
Entry required
Must an entry be made for this prompt, or can it be skipped?
Once per document
If multiple items on a single ticket use the same item prompt, do
not request the information more than once
Qty sold must be 1
To force a quantity of 1 when prompt reply is specific to a single
piece of an item (serial number, carat weight, film claim number)
Constraint
Entered value must pass constraint specified here
See Appendix 2 “Constructing Column Constraints” for more info
Error message
Error message to display if constraint is violated
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-22
06/05/15
Setting Up Serial Prompt Codes
Select Setup > Inventory > Serial Prompt Codes

Use to define any additional information to ask for the serial numbers of an item when
entering certain types of transactions

Assign up to three Serial Prompt Codes to each serialized item

Each prompt displays once for each serial number in the selected transaction(s)
Examples:
Installed in
Reference
Test constraint and error message
Prompt code
Enter a name for the prompt code
Description
Enter a description for the prompt code
Text to display
Prompt to request the serial number information in ticket entry
Data type
Number of decimals
Entry characters must be this type: alphanumeric, date, or numeric
If numeric, number of decimals allowed
Entry required
Indicate whether entry will be required, or can it be skipped?
Select the serial prompt 'slots' for items to which this serial prompt
Valid for
Serial Prompt 1 - 3 can be assigned
Used for
Selecting more than one means the prompt can be assigned to
one 'slot' for one item and a different 'slot' for another item
Indicate whether this serial prompt will be displayed for
Adjustments, Receivings, RTV’s, Transfers, Sales, Returns
Constraint
Entered value must pass constraint specified here
Error message
Error message to display if constraint is violated
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-23
06/05/15
Exercise 1: Using Serial Prompts
Try it Yourself!
In this exercise, you will add a new serial prompt to request the New or Used condition of a
serialized item when selling the item.
1. Select Setup/Inventory > Serial Prompt Codes.
Define and save the N/U serial prompt code illustrated on the previous page.
When defining the constraint:
- Enclose each "V=" test in parenthesis, not brackets.
- Enclose the testing value in single quotes/apostrophes, not double quotes.
2. Select Inventory > Items. Display item BALL-RET-PRO.
Notice that this item is
always serialized.
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-24
06/05/15
3. Switch to the Serialized tab. The three Serial prompt code columns are protected change
fields, so you will need to first click
on the toolbar to make the fields accessible.
Do a lookup at Serial prompt code 1. Your new code displays in the lookup, because you
indicated that it was a valid code for the first serial prompt code. Select it to assign it to this
item.
Do a lookup at Serial prompt code 2. Nothing displays in this list since there are no serial
prompt codes defined to be used for Serial prompt code 2.
Click
to save the changes to this item.
------------------------------------------END OF EXERCISE-----------------------------------------------
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-25
06/05/15
Setting Up Barcode Types
Select Setup > Inventory > Barcode Types

Use for grouping barcode meanings across items; permits barcode printing for specific
Barcode types
Examples:
Barcode Types
1)
Item default barcode
UPC barcode
User-defined barcode
ITEM
UPC
USER
2)
Allow 4 barcodes per item
BARCODE1
BARCODE2
BARCODE3
BARCODE4
3)
Barcodes are vendor-specific
WILSON
ACME
NIKE
4)
Barcodes are by product-type
NEW
USED
DAMAGED
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-26
06/05/15
Setting Up Label Codes
Select Setup > Inventory > Label Codes

Use for grouping items by the type of label printed for them

Permits label printing for items that use the same kind of label by filtering on label code
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-27
06/05/15
Setting Up Tare Weight Codes
Select Setup > Inventory > Tare Weight Codes

Use to define container names and weight of each

Assign to weighed items to have container weight deducted from item total weight at
time of sale
"&" denotes next
character as accelerator
key on button
Select this check box if
you want to enter the
weight of the container
when entering tickets
Assign a tare weight code to
any item that is sold by weight
in a container, to exclude the
container weight when
calculating the price.
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-28
06/05/15
Setting Up Adjustment Reason Codes
Select Setup > Inventory > Adjustment Reason Codes


Use to explain why inventory levels are being adjusted
Account listed in the Adjustment reason code takes precedence over the account in
the item’s Account code for distributions
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-29
06/05/15
Alternatives for Setting Up Items
Alternatives for adding items
A)
Use Inventory > Items to set up an item record for each item, along with
inventory records for each location where you want quantity tracked.




one item at a time
copy from any other item
default values from data dictionary or "template" item for
workgroup
inventory records can be automatic (if "Show inventory
setup options" is disabled in Inventory Control)
B)
Use Inventory > Quick Items, a simple single-form version of Inventory /
Items.
C)
Add each item "on the fly".
This can be done from the "Item Number" field in any function other than
Inventory / Items (such as ticket entry or purchase request entry) by:
-
entering the item number you want to assign and clicking
the "not on file" message displays, or
-
doing an item lookup and clicking


D)
when
from the lookup.
same as A)
uses simplified add-on-the-fly form
Use System > Utilities > Database Import to import the item information
from a text file. Records must be in delimited format (sequence of fields
doesn't matter)




multiple items in a single import
allows verification of data prior to import
default values for non-imported fields come from data dictionary
or "template" item for workgroup
optional logging of import errors
Setting Up Inventory Data
3-30
06/05/15
SECTION 4: SETTING UP CUSTOMER DATA
Sequence of Customers Setup ................................................................... 1
Setting Up Customer Control...................................................................... 2
Setting Up Customer Categories ................................................................ 7
Setting Up Customer Finance Charge Codes ............................................. 8
Setting Up Customer Profile Codes ............................................................ 9
Setting Up Shipping Zones ....................................................................... 10
Setting Up Statement Codes .................................................................... 11
Setting Up Terms Codes .......................................................................... 12
Setting Up Loyalty Programs .................................................................... 13
Exercise 1: Adding Loyalty Program Rules ............................................................... 15
Alternatives for Setting Up Customers ...................................................... 17
Sequence of Customers Setup
Sequence for setting up a new company’s Customers data
You can set up Customer data for a company any time after the System data has been set
up.
Set up Customer data for a new company by running these menu commands (all selections in
steps 1 – 8 are under Setup > Customers):
Control
1
Set up the Customer Control record.
After the Customer Control table is defined, the following data can be set up in any sequence
prior to defining your customers.
2
Categories
Set up the customer category names that you want to use for
grouping your customers. Each customer can be assigned one
category.
3
Finance Charge
Codes*
Set up finance charge codes for Receivables customers.
4
Profile Codes
If you selected to use any Customer code profiles when setting up
the Customer Control record, define the profile codes that will be
valid for each code profile.
5
Shipping Zones
Set up a Shipping Zone code for each shipping zone to which you
ship merchandise. Each customer and each customer ship-to
address can be assigned a Shipping Zone code.
6
Statement Codes*
Set up billing/statement cycles for Receivables customers.
7
Terms Codes*
Set up discount and payment terms for Receivables customers.
8
Loyalty Programs
Set up loyalty program details for customers.
9
Customers >
Customers
Set up the template customer(s) and then use Setup > System >
Workgroups to identify the template customer for each
workgroup.
Set up a customer record for each customer for whom you want
to track sales history separately. Alternatives include adding
customers on the fly or importing them from a text file using
System > Utilities > Database Import.
10

Customers >
Ship To
Addresses
Define shipping addresses for each customer.
Only if Receivables Option is registered
Setting Up Customer Data
4-1
06/05/15
Setting Up Customer Control
Select Setup > Customers > Control
Columns enabled only if Receivables Option is registered
Use to specify aging periods and defaults when aging is performed
Aging tab
Age by
Document date or Due date
Aging periods
Number of aging periods you plan to use (Maximum = 5)
Aging Period 1 - 5
For each defined aging period
Max age for period1
Number of days that represent this aging period
For the last defined aging period, no day entry required
Dunning msg 1
Dunning msg 2
Optional messages to print on statement
Setting Up Customer Data
4-2
06/05/15
Setting Up Customer Control
A/R Processing tab
Columns enabled only if Receivables Option is registered
Cash Receipts
Maximum write-off
Unlimited
Writeoff account
Maximum dollar amount that can be written off at once, or
Unlimited, and default distribution account
(Enter 0, if no write-offs are allowed)
Source of profit center when updating writeoff
distributions to account entered here: None or Store
Statements
Last begin date
Last end date
Save copies to disk
Statement period beginning and ending date from last
time statements were printed
Save a copy of statements to a disk file
E-mailing
Allow e-mail statements
E-mail subject
E-mail body
Allowing the e-mailing of statements
Default text for subject and body of emailed statements
Account Management
Note ID
Setting Up Customer Data
Note ID to automatically display note when viewing a
customer in Customers / Account Management
4-3
06/05/15
Setting Up Customer Control
Print Options tab
Use to specify whether and how customer transactions journals print at the time the transaction
is posted
Cash receipts journal
Options for printing or viewing the Cash Receipts Journal
at posting-time
Print distributions
Indicate whether to print distributions produced
Customer
adjustments journal
Print distributions
Options for printing or viewing the Customer Adjustments
Journal at posting-time
Finance charges journal
Options for printing or viewing the Finance charges
Journal at posting-time
Print distributions
Indicate whether to print distributions produced
Setting Up Customer Data
Indicate whether to print distributions produced
4-4
06/05/15
Setting Up Customer Control
Profiles tab
Use to specify the number of each profile type (up to five) to request for customers
NOTE:
Code profile
= value entered for customer must be a defined Customer Profile
Code
Date profile
= value entered for customer must be in date format
Alpha profile
= value entered for customer can be any alphanumeric characters
Numeric profile
= value entered for customer must be numeric
Use Setup > System > Quick Setup to change the display labels for the profiles.
Setting Up Customer Data
4-5
06/05/15
Setting Up Customer Control
Other tab
Orders affect available credit
Layaways affect available credit
Indicate whether to reduce the amount of available
credit for each customer by the total dollar amount of
the customer’s orders / layaways
Simplified customer
add-on-the-fly
Enable use of a simplified form for adding new
customers "on the fly"
Also used for editing existing customers "on the fly"
from lookups
Loyalty Programs
Use loyalty programs
Indicate whether to use loyalty programs for your
company
Loyalty points adjustments
journal
Options for printing or viewing the Loyalty points
adjustments Journal at posting-time
Setting Up Customer Data
4-6
06/05/15
Setting Up Customer Categories
Select Setup > Customers > Categories
Use to group customers for reporting or pricing purposes
Assign one category to each customer
Decide whether to require a PO number for this category of customers
If custom layout forms have been created for the ticket header table, is one of those forms for
this customer category?
Setting Up Customer Data
4-7
06/05/15
Setting Up Customer Finance Charge Codes
Select Setup > Customers > Finance Charge Codes
Use to determine finance charges
Assign one finance charge code to each A/R type customer
Finance charge code
Description
Name and description for this finance charge code
Age documents by
Method by which to age documents: Due date or
document date
Min age to be considered
past due
Min past due total for fin
charge
Number of days before amount is past due
Calculate fin charge on fin
charge
Can assessed finance charges have additional finance
charges assessed against them
Level 1 percent
Level 1 cutoff
What percent will be assessed
Indicate whether there is a cutoff for this finance charge
percent
Level 2 percent
What percent will be assessed
Minimum finance charge
What is the smallest finance charge that can be assessed
Finance charge account
Account number to update for finance charges collected
and method to determine profit center: None or Store
Setting Up Customer Data
Minimum past due amount that can be assessed a finance
charge
4-8
06/05/15
Setting Up Customer Profile Codes
Select Setup > Customers > Profile Codes
Use to define valid values for Customer Code Profiles that were turned on in Setup >
Customers > Control or Setup > System > Quick Setup
Note: To display your own label instead of “Code profile”, use Setup > System > Quick Setup
to change the display label for the associated code profile.
Setting Up Customer Data
4-9
06/05/15
Setting Up Shipping Zones
Select Setup > Customers > Shipping Zones
Use to define shipping zones for customer addresses
Assign one Shipping Zone to each customer and to each ship-to address
Setting Up Customer Data
4-10
06/05/15
Setting Up Statement Codes
Select Setup > Customers > Statement Codes
Use to define statement printing groups to allow statement printing for a group of customers
Assign one statement code to each A/R charge customer (Receivables)
Setting Up Customer Data
4-11
06/05/15
Setting Up Terms Codes
Select Setup > Customers > Terms Codes
Use to define payment terms that you extend to customers
Assign terms code to each A/R charge type customer (Receivables only)
Regular terms
Proximo terms
Last day of a month on which invoice
terms apply to the following month
Cutoff day
End of month = invoice date June 30 or earlier
5% discount if paid by July 10th
due on July 25th
Cutoff day
25
Setting Up Customer Data
=
4-12
invoice date July 25
July 26
discount
if paid by
Aug 10th
Sept 10th
due on
Aug 25th
Sept 25th
06/05/15
Setting Up Loyalty Programs
Select Setup > Customers > Loyalty Programs
Use to define
incentive
programs for
your
customers
Price rules
defined using
Promotional
Prices
Assign one
loyalty
program to a
customer
Earnings increment
Rounding method
In what increment can points be awarded, and how should
points be rounded to the selected increment?
Redemption method
None = points will be used to award customer something
other than merchandise (e.g., category change)
Use as cash = points are redeemable for merchandise
Value per point
For redemption method “use as cash”, value of each point
Allow partial payment
To use any points, must customer pay for all redemption
eligible items with points or can they combine point tender
with other tender types?
Always zero
Customer earns no points if any points were redeemed
Reduce for redemptions
Points earned are reduced based on # of points redeemed
Redeemed point multiplier
Multiplies redeemed points by multiplier & deducts from
points earned
Zero if fully paid in points
No points earned if entire ticket was paid with points
Setting Up Customer Data
4-13
06/05/15
Setting Up Loyalty Programs
Earning Rules
Identify the rules for earning
points
Uses first rule that fits and
stops looking at other rules
Redemption Rules
Identify the rules for
redeeming points
Setting Up Customer Data
4-14
06/05/15
Exercise 1: Adding Loyalty Program Rules
Try it Yourself!
You are going to expand the earning and redemption rules for the Golf Loyalty Program.
Customers who belong to the Golf Loyalty Program can now earn 1 point per stocking unit for
any item from the Snacks sub-category. Points they earn can be used for future Food category
purchases.
Defining the Earning Rule
1. Select the Golf Loyalty Program and click
.
Define the rule as described. When completed the window should look similar to this.
2. Click
Rules window.
to save the new line. Save the new rule and then close the Earning
Setting Up Customer Data
4-15
06/05/15
Defining the Redemption Rule
3. With the Golf Loyalty Program selected, click
.
Define the rule as described. When completed the window should look similar to this.
4. Click
to save the new line. Save the new rule and then close the
Redemption Rules window.
--------------------------------------------------End of Exercise -----------------------------------------------
Setting Up Customer Data
4-16
06/05/15
Alternatives for Setting Up Customers
Alternatives for adding customers
A)
Use Customers > Customers to set up a customer record for each
customer for whom you want to track sales history separately.



one customer at a time
copy from any other customer
default values from data dictionary or "template" customer for
workgroup
B)
Use Customers > Quick Customers, a simple single-form version of
Customers > Customers.
C)
Add each customer on the fly.
This can be done from the Customer # field in any function other than
Customers/Customers (such as ticket entry, cash receipt entry) by:
-
entering the customer number you want to assign and clicking
when the "not on file" message displays, or
-
performing a customer lookup and clicking


D)
from the lookup.
same as A)
uses simplified add-on-the-fly form
Use System > Utilities > Database Import to import the customer
information from a text file. Records must be in delimited format (sequence of
fields doesn't matter)




multiple customers in a single import
allows verification of data prior to import
default values for non-imported fields come from data dictionary
or "template" customer for workgroup
optional logging of import errors
Setting Up Customer Data
4-17
06/05/15
Setting Up Customer Data
4-18
06/05/15
SECTION 5: SETTING UP PURCHASING DATA
Sequence of Purchasing Setup .................................................................. 1
Setting Up Purchasing Control ................................................................... 2
Setting Up Vendor Categories .................................................................. 10
Setting Up Vendor Profile Codes .............................................................. 11
Setting Up Vendor Terms Codes .............................................................. 12
Alternatives for Setting Up Vendors.......................................................... 13
Sequence of Purchasing Setup
Sequence for setting up a new company’s Purchasing data
You can set up purchasing data for a company any time after the System data has been set
up.
Use Setup > Purchasing for the first four selections.
1
Purchasing Control
Set up the Purchasing Control record.
2
Vendor Categories
Set up the vendor category names that you want to use for
grouping your vendors. Each vendor can be assigned one
category.
3
Vendor Profile
Codes
If you selected to use any Vendor code profiles when setting
up the Purchasing Control record, define the profile codes
that will be valid for each code profile.
4
Vendor Terms
Codes
Set up the various payment terms that you receive from your
vendors. Each vendor can be assigned one terms code.
Each of these menu options is explained in more detail on the following pages.
If you will be using the multi-currency functions in Purchasing, also define currency codes.
5
Currency Codes
Use Setup>System>Currency Codes to define the foreign
currencies that you will use for purchasing.
Refer to Setting Up Currency Codes in Section 2 of this manual for information on defining
currency codes.
Use Purchasing > Vendors to define your vendors, and Purchasing > Vendor Items to
specify the details of how you purchase an item from a vendor.
5
Vendors
Set up a vendor record for each vendor from whom you
purchase merchandise or services.
Alternatives include adding vendors “on the fly”, importing
them from your G/L accounting software (direct interface), or
importing them from a text file using System > Utilities >
Database Import.
6
Vendor Items
Set up vendor item records to identify information about how
each item is purchased from a specific vendor.
Alternatives include importing them from a text file using
System > Utilities > Database Import, or allowing
Counterpoint to automatically create the records when
Purchase Requests or Receivings are posted.
These menu options are explained in the Counterpoint Fundamentals manual.
Setting Up Purchasing Data
5-1
06/05/15
Setting Up Purchasing Control
Select Setup > Purchasing/Control
Main tab
Use multi-currency
Enable if you need to purchase merchandise from any
vendor in a currency other than your normal "Home"
currency.
Use tax in purchasing
Enable if you need to have taxes calculated and shown on
your purchasing documents. These would be taxes (such as
"VAT") that your vendor collects from you during the
purchasing process.
Account number to update for tax amounts you owe to your
vendors, and method for assigning a profit center.
Tax accrual account
Profit center
Setting Up Purchasing Data
5-2
06/05/15
Setting Up Purchasing Control
Main tab
(cont.)
Prompt for line information
Automatically ask user to enter optional data on purchase
requests (e.g., different shipping address)
Update vendor-item cost
Automatically update cost in vendor-item record: Never,
When PO is posted, When receiving is posted, or Both
when PO and receiving are posted
Create vendor-item records Automatically create a new vendor-item record: Never,
When PO is posted, When receiving is posted, or Both
when PO and receiving are posted
Item auto-display note
Vendor auto-display note
PO auto-display note
Note ID to automatically display when entering a purchase
request for items, vendors, and PO
Drop-ship purchasing docs
batch ID
Assign a batch ID to be used for drop-ship orders. Batch ID
will be automatically created for purchase requests and
receivings if it does not already exist.
Warn if unusual cost
Warn if cost is outside
threshold
Cost Threshold %
Enable to warn if receiving cost falls outside of set
threshold
Setting Up Purchasing Data
Enter the percent between 0 and 100 of variance from last
cost where warning should appear .
5-3
06/05/15
Setting Up Purchasing Control
Activity tab
Purchase Orders
Suggested qty rounding
In addition to ensuring the vendor's minimum order quantity
is met, should suggested purchase quantity also be
rounded so that it always matches the vendor's unit?
Default item description
What item description to use as default for purchase
requests: Description, Long Description, Short description,
Vendor-item
Use consolidated lines for
Which lines types should consolidate: None, All item types,
Non-gridded items only, Gridded items only, or User
selectable
Increment PO number on
reissue
Indicate whether to add a -R01, -R02 to PO number when a
PO is reissued and the new purchase request is posted. If
you do not select to increment and also did not select autoassign, you will be prompted for a PO number.
Discontinued item warning
Indicate whether to display message about item’s
discontinued status when placing item on a Purchase Order
Setting Up Purchasing Data
5-4
06/05/15
Setting Up Purchasing Control
Activity tab
(cont)
Receivings
Set copied lines to
When copying items to a receiving, set all lines to Selected
or Unselected for receiving
Only Selected lines will be posted
Transfer creation method
When allocated merged receivings are posted, indicate
whether to generate Transfer Outs or Quick Transfers
Discontinued item warning
Indicate whether to display message about item’s
discontinued status when receiving item
RTVs
Default item description
Determine which description to use as the default:
Description, Long description, Short description, or Vendor
item
Prompt for line information
Automatically ask user to enter optional data on RTVs
Setting Up Purchasing Data
5-5
06/05/15
Setting Up Purchasing Control
Misc charges tab

Define up to 5 miscellaneous charges for receivings
Click a button to configure
that misc charge
Use misc charge 1 - 5
After selecting the Misc charge 1 – 5 button, indicate whether to
use the corresponding miscellaneous charge
Include in cost
Indicate whether to include the miscellaneous charge in the cost
of the items being received (landed cost)
Allocate by
If including charge in cost, allocate cost to received items based
on: Cost, Cube, Quantity, or Weight
Profit center method
Account
If not including charge in cost, account number to update for
charge when interfaced for invoicing to Accounts Payable
software and method of assigning profit center
Default currency
If you enabled multi-currency purchasing, enter the currency
code you want to use for miscellaneous charges on all
purchasing documents.
If you leave this field blank, Counterpoint will use the currency
code assigned to the PO vendor for miscellaneous charges.
Setting Up Purchasing Data
5-6
06/05/15
Setting Up Purchasing Control
Profile tab

Note:
Use to specify the number of each profile type (up to five) to request for vendors
Code profile
= value entered for vendor must be a defined Vendor Profile Code
Date profile
= value entered for vendor must be in date format
Alpha profile
= value entered for vendor can be any alphanumeric characters
Numeric profile
= value entered for vendor must be numeric
Use Setup > System/Quick Setup to change display labels for the profiles.
Setting Up Purchasing Data
5-7
06/05/15
Setting Up Purchasing Control
Labels tab

Use to specify the default label jobs and tags methods
Default label job for
- purchase request
- receiving
- quick receiving
Identify the default label job when printing labels for
each of these activities
Purchase order tags method
Receiving tags method
Quick receivings tags method
Indicate whether to generate tags for label printing
for each type of activity, and if labels can be printed
from the tags at the time the transaction is posted
Prompt user to print and Print automatically
generate tags, and permit printing of labels from the
tags at the time the transaction is posted
To print labels from tags after posting, use Inventory
> Labels from Tags
Setting Up Purchasing Data
5-8
06/05/15
Setting Up Purchasing Control
Print Options tab
Purchase request journal
PO forms
Receivings journal
Receiver forms
RTVs journal
RTV forms
Purchase adjustment journal
Quick receivings journal
When transactions are posted determine the options for
viewing or printing posting journal and forms: Prompt
user to preview, Preview automatically, Prompt user to
print, Print to default printer, Skip
(Same choices available for all)
Print distributions
Indicate whether to print accounting distributions on
journal
Setting Up Purchasing Data
5-9
06/05/15
Setting Up Vendor Categories
Select Setup > Purchasing > Categories



Use to group vendor for reporting purposes
Assign a category to each vendor
Setting Up Purchasing Data
5-10
06/05/15
Setting Up Vendor Profile Codes
Select Setup > Purchasing > Profile Codes

Use to define valid values for Vendor Code Profiles that were turned on in Setup >
Purchasing > Control or Setup > System/Quick Setup
Note: To display your own label instead of Code profile, use Setup > System/Quick
Setup to modify display labels for profiles.
Setting Up Purchasing Data
5-11
06/05/15
Setting Up Vendor Terms Codes
Select Setup > Purchasing > Terms Codes

Use to define the different payment terms provided to you by your vendors

Assign one terms code to each vendor

Prints on purchase order form
Proximo Terms Code
Terms Code
Terms code
Description
Identify the terms the vendor offers
Enter the description of those terms
Proximo due date and
Due day
Due days
Indicate whether a specific day of the month is the due date, and if so,
what is that date?
If not using Proximo dates, how many days until payment is due
Proximo disc date and
Discount day
Discount days
Indicate whether a proximo discount date is used, and if so, what is that
date?
If not using a Proximo discount date, how many days is the discount
offered
Cutoff day
End of month
For a Proximo terms code, enter the last date transactions will be
applied to the current month, or use the end of the month
Discount percent
What discount percent is offered, if payment is received before the
discount date
Discount account
Indicate which account discount distributions are made to
Disc misc charge 1- 5
If vendor offers early payment discount terms, can the discount also be
taken on miscellaneous charges?
Discount tax
When using tax in Purchasing, enable this setting if the tax you pay to
vendors qualifies for terms discounts from the vendor. Counterpoint will
calculate and apply the discount to the tax when you use the Voucher
Receivings function to set up the vendor's invoice for payment in
Accounts Payable.
Setting Up Purchasing Data
5-12
06/05/15
Alternatives for Setting Up Vendors
Alternatives for adding vendors
A)
Use Purchasing > Vendors to set up a vendor record for each vendor, along
with vendor item records for each item that you purchase from a vendor.




B)
one vendor at a time
copy from any other vendor
default values from data dictionary
vendor unit/cost and minimum order quantities can be pre-defined
and used in next PO
Add each vendor on the fly.
This can be done from the Vendor number field in any function other than
Purchasing > Vendors (such as purchase request entry, quick receivings) by:
-
entering the vendor number you want to assign and clicking
when the "not on file" message displays, or
-
doing a vendor lookup and clicking

C)
from the lookup.
same as A)
Import from Accounts Payable software.
When using a direct accounting interface, use System > Accounting > Utilities >
Import Vendors to import the vendors from Accounts Payable into CounterPoint.
D)
Import vendor information from a text file.
Use System > Utilities > Database Import to import the vendor information.
Records in the text file must be in delimited format (sequence of fields
doesn't matter)




multiple vendors in a single import
allows verification of data prior to import
default values for non-imported fields come from data dictionary
optional logging of import errors
Setting Up Purchasing Data
5-13
06/05/15
Setting Up Purchasing Data
5-14
06/05/15
SECTION 6: SETTING UP POINT OF SALE DATA
Sequence of Point of Sale Setup ................................................................ 1
Setting Up Point of Sale Security Codes .................................................... 2
Setting Up Point of Sale Control ............................................................... 11
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores ................................................................ 14
Credit Card Capabilities: Terminology ...................................................... 35
Credit Card Capabilities: NCR Secure Pay vs Counterpoint Gateway ...... 38
NCR Secure Pay Processors ................................................................... 39
NCR Secure Pay: Credit Card Capabilities............................................... 40
NCR Secure Pay: Setting Up Credit Cards............................................... 41
NCR Secure Pay: Configuring Credit Card Settings for Each Store ......... 42
NCR CP Gateway Processors.................................................................. 44
NCR CP Gateway: Credit Card Capabilities ............................................. 45
NCR CP Gateway Status ......................................................................... 47
NCR CP Dialup: Modem Authorizations ................................................... 48
NCR CP Gateway: Setting Up Credit Cards ............................................. 49
NCR CP Gateway: Configuring Credit Card Settings for Each Store ........ 50
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores: Receipts tab .......................................... 56
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores: Pay codes.............................................. 57
Setting Up Order Management Control .................................................... 58
Planning the Touchscreen Configuration .................................................. 59
Setting Up Touchscreen Codes ................................................................ 60
Touchscreen Button Actions..................................................................... 64
Touchscreen Button Actions: Example Definitions ................................... 68
Setting Up Touchscreen Codes: Totals tab .............................................. 71
Exercise 1: Setting Up a RunPage Button ................................................................. 77
Setting Up Point of Sale Devices .............................................................. 82
Preparing to Use Device Management ..................................................... 83
Using Device Management ...................................................................... 84
Device Management: Adding a Device ..................................................... 85
Device Management: Configuring Dual Cash Drawers ............................. 87
Device Management: Working with Bundles ............................................ 88
Device Management: Configure Crystal Printer ........................................ 92
Point of Sale Forms .................................................................................. 93
Flexibility of Form Groups......................................................................... 94
Setting Up Point of Sale Form Groups...................................................... 95
Using the Radiant Receipt Designer ....................................................... 101
Radiant Receipt Designer: Adding a Logo .............................................. 104
Radiant Receipt Designer: Building Expressions .................................... 106
Exercise 2: Modifying Receipts ................................................................................ 108
Setting Up Stations................................................................................. 115
Setting Up Drawers ................................................................................ 119
Setting Up User Drawers ........................................................................ 120
Setting Up Reason Codes ...................................................................... 121
Setting Up Ticket Profile Codes .............................................................. 122
Setting Up Gift Registry Occasions ........................................................ 123
Setting Up Discount Codes .................................................................... 124
Configuring Tax Inclusive-Pricing ........................................................... 125
Sequence of Point of Sale Setup
Sequence for setting up a new company’s Point of Sale data
You can set up Point of Sale data for a company any time after the System data has
been set up.
Set up Point of Sale data for a new company by running the menu selections in this
order (all selections are under Setup > Point of Sale).
1
Security Codes
Define at least one Point of Sale security code, and assign it to
Point of Sale users (using Setup/System/Users).
2
Control
Set up the Point of Sale Control record.
3
Stores
Define each of your selling locations for which you want sales
history tracked.
The stocking locations defined in Setup/Inventory/Locations are
your warehouses, where the software tracks quantity on hand.
They are defined separately in Counterpoint, even though the
stocking and selling location may actually be the same physical
place.
4
Touchscreen Codes
If you want to use Touchscreen ticket entry, define the
touchscreen button layouts that will be used.
5
Devices
On each workstation, after OPOS software drivers are
installed/built, use this function to select each device that will
be used on that workstation during ticket entry.
6
Form Groups
Define form ID’s for each form printed in ticket entry, and
identify whether you will use the OPOS or Crystal version of
the form. New OPOS or Crystal* forms can be created and
existing forms can be modified. (*Crystal Reports required)
7
Stations
Define each of the selling points (registers) within a store.
Stations are associated with stores.
8
Drawers
Define the drawers where sales and tender will be tracked prior
to posting. Drawers are associated with stores.
9
User Drawers
Define which drawers each user can access for ticket entry,
and the activities they can perform with each drawer.
10
Reason Codes
If you selected to use reason codes for any override activity,
define the reason codes that will be valid for each.
11
Profile Codes
If you selected to use any Code profiles when setting up the
Store record, define the ticket profile codes that will be valid for
each code profile.
12
Gift Registry
Occasions
Define the various occasions for which you will create a gift
registry. Requires the Gift Registry Option.
13
Discount Codes
If you select to provide a ticket discount, define the discount
codes that will be valid for each.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-1
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Security Codes
Select Setup > Point of Sale > Security Codes

Use to define Point of Sale authorizations for user or group of users

Assign one Point of Sale security code to each Point of Sale user (Using Setup >
System > Users)
Tickets tab
Ticket Authorizations
Allows user to
Void current docs
Void completed docs
Void document during entry
Void document after it is completed (but before it is
posted)
Override cust. 'No tickets' flag
Sell to a customer with a "no tickets" credit hold
Perform 'No-sale'
Do a "no sale" (open cash drawer)
Override max return
Enter a return that exceeds store's max return
amount
Override required print
Bypass required ticket printing
Reprint
Reprint a document
Change sales rep
Change tax code
Change the sales rep on a ticket
Change the tax code on a ticket
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-2
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Security Codes
Tickets tab (cont.)
Ticket Authorizations
Allows user to
Change ship-from location
Change a Store’s ship-from location in Ticket Entry from
the one defined in Setup / Point of Sale / Stores
Change price-from location
Change a Store’s price-from location in Ticket Entry from
the one defined in Setup / Point of Sale / Stores
Change profit center
Change the profit center value for a ticket or line item in
Ticket Entry
Use holds
Delete holds
Use quotes
Delete quotes
Use pay-ins
Use pay-outs
Use pay-on accounts
Complete the corresponding action while in Ticket Entry
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-3
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Security Codes
Tickets tab (cont.)
Ticket Authorizations
Allows user to
Clock in/out
Create a timecard record
Enter purchase order #
Enter bill to
Enter customer
Enter misc. charge
Enter notes
Enter package tracking #
Enter ship-to address
Enter the indicated information on a ticket
Hold and recall
Perform the Hold and Recall function
Edit ticket profile
Change the profile information for a ticket
Allow discounts
Override max discount
Enter a discount for a ticket or line
Exceed the maximum discount amount
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-4
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Security Codes
Line Items tab
Line Item Authorizations
Allows user to
Edit lines
Override prices
Sell below minimum price
Edit information entered for a line on the current ticket
Change the calculated price for an item
Sell below minimum price level or minimum profit
percent for store
Override qty restrictions
Override insufficient quantity when store is configured
to disallow quantity overrides
Change line tax category
Change line taxable status
Change tax category of item
Change whether item is taxable on a ticket
Allow sale lines
Allow return lines
Enter an item for sale on a ticket
Enter an item as a return on a ticket
Edit item prompt
Change the prompt values entered for an item
Move lines up/down
Move a line up or down in the display area
Re-price all lines
Re-price all lines on the document
Allow validated returns
Process and verify a return against a posted ticket
…for not on-file customers
Do a validated return for a customer who has been
deleted or who is on-file in a different database (e.g., a
remote server)
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-5
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Security Codes
Total/Tender tab
Total / Tender Authorizations Allows user to
Override credit limit
Sell to a customer who uses A/R charge to pay for some
or all of their purchase, and customer is over their credit
limit
Change tax
Change the default calculated tax for a ticket or order
Allow no signature
Skip entry of a signature for a pay code defined to use
signature capture
Bypass drawer alarm
Bypass the drawer alarm and complete the ticket, even
though the cash drawer is still open
(When using a drawer with open/close sensing)
Reissue change
Reissue change in a different combination of pay codes
Redeem loyalty points
Select ‘Loyalty points’ for ticket payment
Clear payments
Remove any entered payment lines from the document
Use customer’s on file credit
card number
Use the customer’s on file credit card information as
payment
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-6
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Security Codes
Orders tab
Orders Authorizations
Allows user to
Override customer
'No orders' flag
Override "Allow orders = N" setting for a customer
Allow order lines
Allow backorder lines
Allow special order lines
Enter a new order
Enter a new backorder
Enter a new special order
Edit orders*
Enter order deposits*
Allow order deposit refund
Allow drop-ship lines
Pick orders*
Release orders*
Copy-release orders
Cancel orders
Reinstate orders
View order history*
Print orders
Edit an existing order
Enter order deposits
Refund an order deposit
Enter a drop-ship order
Print picking tickets and set "picked" status
Release line items from orders to tickets
Leave order on file, but release ready lines
Cancel orders
Reinstate a cancelled order
View order history
Print the order
* Also applies to processing orders in Order Management
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-7
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Security Codes
Layaways tab
Layaways Authorizations
Allows user to
Override customer ‘No layaways’ flag
Override “Allow layaways = N” setting for a
customer
Allow layaway lines
Enter a layaway on a ticket
Edit layaways
Pick layaways
Edit existing layaway tickets
Print a picking ticket for a layaway
Enter layaway deposits
Allow layaway deposit refund
Enter a deposit on a layaway
Refund a layaway deposit
Release layaways
Copy-release layaways
Cancel layaways
Reinstate layaways
Release layaway lines
Leave layaway on file, but release ready lines
Cancel existing layaways
Reinstate a cancelled layaway
View layaway history
View layaway history
Print layaways
Print the layaway
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-8
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Security Codes
Touchscreen tab
Touchscreen Authorizations
Allows user to
Custom action
Perform a custom action
Customer from lookup
Select a customer from a lookup
Run external program
Run an external program
Item from lookup
Select an item from a lookup
Execute run page
Execute a run page action
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-9
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Security Codes
Stored Value Cards tab
Stored Value Cards Authorizations
Allows user to
Allow SVC activate
Activate a Stored Value Card
Allow SVC recharge
Recharge a Stored Value Card
Allow SVC balance inquiry
Check the balance for a Stored Value Cared
Allow SVC cash back
Give cash as change for a Stored Value Card
Override minimum SVC activation
Override the Minimum SVC activation setting
Override minimum SVC recharge
Override the Minimum SVC recharge setting
Override maximum SVC refund
Override the Maximum SVC refund setting
Override maximum SVC cash back
Override the Maximum SVC cash back setting
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-10
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Control
Select Setup > Point of Sale > Control

Use to define up to 5 miscellaneous charges that might be used by any store
Misc Charges tab
Use misc charge 1 - 5
After selecting the Misc Charge 1 – 5 button, indicate whether
to use the corresponding miscellaneous charge
Profit center method
Account
For each miscellaneous charge, specify the account number
for G/L distributions and select the source of the profit center:
None or Store
Use for freight
Select the Use for freight check box to indicate the
miscellaneous charge is valid for importing freight amounts,
when importing tracking number information where freight
amount is included
Note:
Use Setup > System > Quick Setup to change the display labels for the
corresponding miscellaneous charge.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-11
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Control
Profiles tab

Note:
Use to specify how many (up to five) of each type of ticket profile to enable for
tickets at any store
Code profile
= value entered for ticket must be a defined ticket Profile Code
Date profile
= value entered for ticket must be in date format
Alpha profile
= value entered for ticket can be any alphanumeric characters
Numeric profile
= value entered for ticket must be numeric
Use Setup > System > Quick Setup to change display labels for the profiles.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-12
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Control
Other tab


Specify default handling of journals at ticket posting time
Note ID for automatic display of customer and item note at time of sale
Print options
When tickets are posted, indicate which action should
Drawer summary journal
be taken for each journal:
Ticket journal
- Prompt user to preview
Closed order journal
- Preview automatically
Closed layaway journal
- Prompt user to print
Settlement journal
- Print to default printer
Z-Tape
- Skip
Batch release review
Print distributions Should distributions be printed on the journal?
Auto-display notes
Customer auto-display note
Item auto-display note
Note ID that causes a note to automatically display after
selecting a customer or item in Ticket Entry
Display close options
Should the drawer close dialog display in Ticket Entry?
Ticket object options
Before Printing Receipt:
Reload ticket object
Load EXT tables and views
Use when a customization modifies data in the ticket
tables itself to force reload of ticket data into memory
Use when a custom column is added to load the value
into memory
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-13
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores
Select Setup > Point of Sale > Stores
Main tab
Locations
Default ship-from location
Allow document entry
Prompt for document entry
Allow line entry
Prompt for line entry
Default price-from location
Allow document entry
Prompt for document entry
Allow line entry
Prompt for line entry
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
Location where quantities associated with this store will
be updated during entry and posting of sales tickets
Indicate whether to allow, or prompt, a user to enter a
different ship-from location for the document
Indicate whether to allow, or prompt, a user to enter a
different ship-from location for each line
When using location-specific prices, the location whose
prices should be used as defaults
Indicate whether to allow, or prompt, a user to enter a
different price-from location for the document
Indicate whether to allow, or prompt, a user to enter a
different price-from location for each line
6-14
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores
Main tab
cont
Profit center
Profit center
Allow document entry
Prompt for document entry
Allow line entry
Prompt for line entry
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
Account number whose profit center represents this
store (entered account must be marked as a valid profit
center)
Indicate whether to allow, or prompt, a user to enter a
different profit center for the document
Indicate whether to allow, or prompt, a user to enter a
different profit center for each line
6-15
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores
Main tab
cont.
Taxes
Use tax code from
Always use Store's tax code to calculate sales taxes at
this store, or use Customer's tax code (uses Store's if
customer's is blank)
Store tax code
Tax code for calculating taxes at this store
Show tax authorities
Enable to automatically show the amount of tax being
collected for each tax authority on a ticket directly above
the total amount of Tax for the ticket.
Note: In Touchscreen Ticket Entry, the tax for each
authority will appear only when using HTML totals.
Tax-inclusive store
Enable to calculate and display tax-inclusive prices in
tickets entered for the store
Refer to Configuring Tax-inclusive Pricing later in this
section for additional things you will need to configure for
tax-inclusive pricing.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-16
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores
Main tab
cont.
Other
Default customer #
Customer used as the default in ticket entry (required for
Touchscreen ticket entry)
Prompt for name/address
If customer record is set to prompt for name and address
by store, allow name and address change for tickets
entered at this store?
Note: The change is retained for the ticket only and
does not update the customer record.
Maximum return amount
Unlimited returns
Maximum amount of returns that can be entered on a
single ticket at this store, or unlimited amount
Required encryption level
If using NCR Secure Pay and Point-to-point Encryption
on Ingenico isC250 on any workstation for store, specify
whether store will always require credit card numbers to
be encrypted, or if encryption is required only when the
device is available on a workstation.
Select "Never require P2PE" if store is not using any
NCR Secure Pay encryption-enabled Ingenico devices.
Use Legacy Device
Framework
If selected, uses the legacy Device Framework
If unselected, uses the new Device Framework
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-17
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores
Required encryption level
Scenario 1
Store=NSP store
PINPAD=UNENCRYPTED isc250
AVS/CVV2 =ENABLED
Required Encryption Level
Source of
card #
Never Require P2PE
Require P2PE When
Available
CARD ON
FILE
Prompts for AVS and CVV
in Ticket Entry and can
manually enter CVV and
update default AVS data
Prompts for AVS and CVV
in Ticket Entry and can
manually enter CVV and
update default AVS data
MANUAL
FROM
PINPAD
MANUAL
IN TICKET
ENTRY
Always Require P2PE
"Device is not encrypted"
will appear when logging
into Counterpoint
Prompts for AVS and CVV
in Ticket Entry and can
manually enter CVV and
update default AVS data
N/A (manual entry is not available on non-encrypted pinpad)
Prompts for AVS and CVV
in Ticket Entry and can
manually enter CVV and
update default AVS data
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
Prompts for AVS and CVV
in Ticket Entry and can
manually enter CVV and
update default AVS data
6-18
Cannot manually enter card
data and AVS/CVV in
Ticket Entry.
07/04/17
Scenario 2
Store=NSP store
PINPAD=ENCRYPTED isc250
AVS/CVV2 =ENABLED
Required Encryption Level
Source of
card #
Never Require P2PE
Require P2PE When
Available
Always Require P2PE
CARD ON
FILE
Prompts for AVS and CVV
in Ticket Entry and can
manually enter CVV and
update default AVS data
Prompts for AVS and CVV
in Ticket Entry and can
manually enter CVV and
update default AVS data
Prompts for AVS and CVV
in Ticket Entry and can
manually enter CVV and
update default AVS data
MANUAL
FROM
PINPAD
Prompts for AVS data in
Ticket Entry. CVV is
prompted at pinpad.
Can only manually enter
data from encrypted
pinpad, and not in Ticket
Entry. Prompts for AVS
data in Ticket Entry.
Can only manually enter
data from encrypted
pinpad, and not in Ticket
Entry. Prompts for AVS
data in Ticket Entry
MANUAL
IN TICKET
ENTRY
Prompts for AVS and CVV
in Ticket Entry and can
manually enter CVV and
update default AVS data
AVS/CVV and card data
cannot be entered
manually in Ticket Entry
AVS/CVV and card data
cannot be entered in
Ticket Entry
Scenario 3
Store=CPG store
PINPAD=UNENCRYPTED isc250
AVS/CVV2 =ENABLED
Required Encryption Level
Source of
card #
Never Require P2PE
(use for CPG store)
Require P2PE When
Available
CARD ON
FILE
Prompts for AVS and CVV
in Ticket Entry and can
manually enter CVV and
update default AVS data
Prompts for AVS and CVV
in Ticket Entry and can
manually enter CVV and
update default AVS data
MANUAL
FROM
PINPAD
MANUAL
IN TICKET
ENTRY
Always Require P2PE
"Device is not encrypted"
appears when logging
into Counterpoint
Prompts for AVS and CVV
in Ticket Entry and can
manually enter CVV and
update default AVS data
N/A (manual entry is not available on non-encrypted pinpad)
Prompts for AVS and CVV
in Ticket Entry and can
manually enter CVV and
update default AVS data
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
Prompts for AVS and CVV
in Ticket Entry and can
manually enter CVV and
update default AVS data
6-19
Cannot manually enter
card data and AVS/CVV in
Ticket Entry.
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores
Contacts tab
Enter the store’s address and the information for the individuals you contact at
this store.
Can be printed on customized receipts
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-20
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores
Tickets–1 tab
Use Reasons for
Returns
Price overrides
Void completed ticket
Tax overrides
Enable request of reason codes for which activities?
Drawer Activity
Allow auto-count
Close form after count
Allow auto-count on all pay codes when posting drawers?
Automatically close the Count drawer form?
Allow auto-activate
Close form after activate
Allow drawers to be activated when logging in to ticket
entry?
Automatically close the Activate drawer form?
Close form after cash drop
Close form after cash loan
Automatically close the Cash Drop form?
Automatically close the Cash Loan form?
Allow auto-reconcile
Close form after reconcile
Allow counted drawer to be posted without reconciling?
Automatically close the Reconcile drawer form?
Allow reactivation
Can an active, counted, or reconciled drawer be reactivated?
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-21
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores
Tickets–1 tab
Line Items
Line tax display
What to indicate on-screen for item tax status: All, Nontaxed, Taxed, Changed, or None.
Default line desc
Which item description should display: Description (30),
Long Description (50), or Short Description (20)
Quantity override method
Select the method for overriding insufficient quantities
Insufficient qty line type
Default line type for insufficient quantities?
Show gift cards as lines
Include a line on the ticket for each sold gift card?
Default grid entry mode
For gridded items, allow single or multi-cell entry
Use item total qty for pricing
Base item price on total qty sold across all lines on ticket?
Restrict manual entry of
weight
Prevent manual entry of weight when scale is defined for
workstation. If unable to obtain weight from scale or scale
is not defined, weight can be entered manually and
***MAN WT prints on receipts.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-22
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores
Tickets–1 tab
Minimum Prices
Minimum price level
When users enter prices in ticket entry, what's the lowest
price level value that's allowed?
Minimum profit method
Base minimum profit percent by store, or by store and item
category within?
Minimum profit percent
If minimum profit method is Store, enter the minimum profit
percent that's allowed. Also specify the cost to use for
computing the profit.
Minimum price level and Minimum profit percent work
together: the entered price must exceed both minimums.
Base profit on
Random Weight
Barcodes
Type
Always use qty 1
Barcodes that include both the item number and the total
price of an item that is sold by weight. Counterpoint will
calculate quantity (typically weight)
Use Standard (extended prices up to 99.99) or Extended
(extended prices up to 999.99)
Use quantity of 1, instead of calculating quantity
PO Number
Allow PO number entry
Indicate whether a user can enter a PO number
Prompt for PO number
Indicate whether Counterpoint should prompt for a PO
number
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-23
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores
Tickets–1 tab
Validated Returns
Default return reason
Indicate a return reason to be used by default
Accept returns from other
stores
Enable to allow return from sales at other stores
Allow combined validated
returns
Enable to permit validated return lines on a ticket with other
types of lines (e.g., sales, orders) or on a ticket with validated
return lines from a different original ticket
Discounts
Max. discount amt.
Max. discount pct.
Enter the maximum amount / percent discount allowed
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-24
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores
Tickets-2 tab
Login
Login for each ticket
Station defaults to
Allow station change
Require clerks to log in to Ticket Entry for each ticket
Default for Station when logging in to ticket entry, and whether
users can change the station number for entering tickets
Drawer defaults to
Allow drawer change
Default for Drawer when logging in to ticket entry, and whether
users can change the drawer number for entering tickets
Can be defaulted to same value as the station
Sales Rep
Sales rep defaults to
Allow sales rep change
Default for Sales rep on a ticket: Customer’s sales rep, User
logged into ticket entry, or no default sales rep
Print and Reprint
Require ticket print
Disable ticket reprint
Require a receipt or invoice to be printed for each ticket?
Prevent reprinting of an already printed receipt or invoice?
Allow reissuing change
Allow authorized user to reissue change in different pay codes
Open Drawer Alarm
Use open drawer alarm
Sense if the cash drawer is open and implement an alarm
(Drawer must have ability to sense open/closed state)
Alarm delay
Alarm sound file
Alarm repeat time
Indicate the time delay before the alarm sounds, sound of the
alarm (must be .wav file), and time lapse (in seconds) before
alarm is repeated
Messages
Suppress ticket completion
confirmation dialog
Suppress EDC authorization
code information dialog
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
Suppress the dialog that appears after ticket
completion/EDC authorization?
6-25
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores
Tickets-3 tab
Pay-in
Default pay-in account
Select account for pay-ins and profit center method: None
or Store
Allow change
Indicate whether the Default pay-in account can be
changed
Pay-out
Default pay-out account
Select account for pay-outs and profit center method:
None or Store
Allow change
Indicate whether the Default pay-out account can be
changed
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-26
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores
Tickets-3 tab (cont.)
Holds and Quotes
Access other stores’ holds
Allow this store to access holds from another store
Access other stores’ quotes
Allow this store to access quotes from another store
Days quote is valid
Enter how many days an issued quote is valid
Hold and recall
Automatic for line changes
Indicate whether to automatically use the Hold/Recall
function on the ticket or order for line changes
Automatic before payment
entry
Indicate whether to automatically use the Hold/Recall
function on the ticket or order before entering payment
information
Reprice after recall
Indicate whether to reprice lines after a hold and recall
Allow add on the fly for...
“Item not on file”
Item LookUp
Allow a user at this store to add an item during Ticket
Entry, from either the “Item not on file” message or from
the item lookup
“Customer not on file”
Customer LookUp
Allow a user at this store to add a customer during Ticket
Entry, from either the “Customer not on file” message or
from the customer lookup
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-27
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores


Enable Use orders to permit order processing for the selected store
Activates use of “regular” orders, special orders, back orders and drop-ship
orders.
Orders tab
Orders
If Use orders is enabled
Access other stores’ orders
Allow users to edit orders entered at a different store?
Check for open orders
Notify user of open orders for customer
Provides access to order processing
Prompt for ship-to address on Automatically request shipping information for every
new order?
orders
Show unshipped lines on
tickets
Show lines that have not been shipped on the ticket?
Warn when releasing
unpicked orders
Display warning if releasing an order and order’s last
activity is not Picked
Warn when editing picked
orders
Display warning if editing an order and order’s last
activity is Picked
Use order # as release ticket # Indicate whether you want to use the order number as
the ticket number when releasing an order
Reprice when edited
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
When editing an order, should the price for the line be
repriced?
6-28
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores
Orders tab cont.
Deposits
If Use orders is enabled
Orders
Backorders
Special orders
Enter the Minimum amount and Minimum percent deposit
required for initial deposit on new orders
Line items
Quantity override method
Select the method for overriding insufficient quantities for
an order: Prompt, default yes; Prompt, default no; Silently
override; Disallow
Insufficient quantity line
type
When overriding insufficient quantities on an order, what is
the default line type: None, Backorder, Special order
Order release state
Backorder release state
Special order release state
When releasing lines from an order, backorder, or special
order, what is the initial state of all lines: Selected or
Unselected
Default grid entry mode
For gridded items, allow single or multi-cell entry
Accounts
Deposits received
Deposits forfeited
Profit center method
Account
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
For deposits received and deposits forfeited, specify the
account number for G/L distributions and select the profit
center method for those distributions: None, Document,
Store
6-29
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores

Enable Use layaways to permit layaway processing for the selected store
Layaways tab
Layaways
If Use layaways is enabled
Access other stores’
layaways
Allow users to edit layaways entered at a different store?
Check for open layaways Notify user of open layaways for customer
Provides access to layaway processing
Prompt for ship-to
address on layaways
Automatically request shipping information for every new
layaway?
Show unshipped lines
on tickets
Show lines that have not been shipped on the ticket?
Warn when releasing
unpicked layaways
Display warning if releasing a layaway and layaway’s last
activity is not Picked
Warn when editing
picked layaways
Display warning if editing a layaway and layaway’s last activity
is Picked
Use layaway # as release
ticket #
Indicate whether you want to use the layaway number as the
ticket number when releasing a layaway
Reprice when edited
When editing a layaway, should the price for the line be
repriced?
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-30
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores
Layaways tab cont.
Deposits
If Use layaways is enabled
Layaways
Enter the Minimum amount and Minimum percent deposit
required for initial deposits on new layaways
Line items
Quantity override
method
What is the method to override insufficient quantities for a
layaway: Prompt, default yes, Prompt, default no, Silently
override, Disallow
Layaway release state
When releasing lines from a layaway, what is the initial state of
all lines: Selected or Unselected
Default grid entry mode
For gridded items, allow single or multi-cell entry
Accounts
Deposits received
Deposits forfeited
For deposits received and deposits forfeited, specify the
account number for G/L distributions and select the profit center
method for those distributions: None, Document, Store
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-31
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores

Specify the line types that are available for use in your store
Lines tab
The first two line types
will be used as the
defaults for the store in
Regular Ticket Entry
Line types and precedence
Unused line types
Available line types
Which of the available line types will not be used by this
store?
In which order will the available line types be listed under
the MORE button in Regular Ticket Entry?
Click
to set the colors
for each line type
Show discontinued item
warnings for
Sales lines
Return lines
Layaway lines
Order lines
Backorder lines
Special order lines
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
Select a check box to display a warning message when a
user adds an item that has been designated as
‘Discontinued’
6-32
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores
Numbers tab
Ticket numbers from
Next ticket number
Assign ticket numbers by Station or Store
If assigned by store, what's the next number to assign
to each ticket entered at this store?
If left blank, users must manually enter each ticket
number
Hold numbers from
Next hold ID
Assign hold numbers from Station or Store
Quote numbers from
Next quote number
Assign quote numbers from Station or Store
Order numbers from
Next order number
Assign order numbers from Station or Store
Layaway numbers from
Next layaway number
Assign layaway numbers from Station or Store
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
If by store, the next hold ID to assign at this store
If by store, the next quote number to assign at this store
If by store, the next order number to assign at this store
If by store, the next layaway number to assign at this
store
6-33
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores
Misc Charges tab
Use misc chg 1-5
Of the miscellaneous charges defined in Setup/Point of Sale/
Control, which will you use in this store?
Type
Method of calculating default charge: percentage of sale or
fixed dollar amount
Serves as default only; can be overridden for ticket
Default misc charge
Default misc charge %
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
Enter the default dollar amount or percentage
(amount/percentage will be included on every ticket)
6-34
07/04/17
Credit Card Capabilities: Terminology
Credit Card Certification
CISP (Cardholder Information Security Program) – a program started by Visa to
secure cardholder information wherever it resides.
PABP (Payment Application Best Practices) – a program started by Visa to
assist software developers create secure payment applications.
PCI SSC (Payment Card Industry Security Standards Council) – a group founded
by Visa, AmEx, MasterCard, Discover, and JCB to promote adoption of the PCI
Data Security Standard.
PCI DSS (Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard) – a comprehensive
set of requirements created by the PCI Council to enhance payment account
data security.
Address Verification Service (AVS)






Send cardholder address and zip code, or just zip code, to processor when card
is not swiped to reduce risk of fraud
Done for manually entered Visa, MasterCard, or Discover transactions through
any preferred processor
American Express Automatic Address Verification (AAV) and card identification
(CID) services for AmEx transactions directly authorized through NCR CP
Gateway or NCR Secure Pay (later)
Mismatches are shown on the CP Gateway Pre-Settlement List and Settlement
Journal, or in the NCR Secure Pay Merchant Portal.
Mismatch has no impact on approval or transaction cost from processor for Visa,
MasterCard, or Discover
American Express rejects transactions with incorrect card identification
information
Card Verification Value (CVV2/CVC2/CID)
Send a three or four digit number found on the back of the credit card to processor
when card is not swiped to reduce risk of fraud (not stored in database)
Partial authorizations and reversals
Obtain an authorization for an amount less than amount due (available with NCR
Merchant Solutions, First Data North, Paymentech, RBS WorldPay, TSYS, as well as
AmEx).
Full reversals of authorizations for Visa, MasterCard, and Discover transactions
(available with NCR Merchant Solutions, First Data North, RBS Lynk, or TSYS).
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-35
07/04/17
Credit Card Capabilities: Terminology
Industry Type
Features
Retail
 Best rates for card swipe (“card present”) transactions
 AVS (Address Verification Service)
 Debit card processing (use for returns only as credit card)
Mail-order /
Telephone-order
(MOTO)
 Transactions presumed to be “card not present” (no card swipe)
 AVS (Address Verification Service)
 Optional CVV2/CVC2
 No debit card processing
Ecommerce
 Transactions presumed to be from Web site or other secure
electronic source
 Point of Sale orders imported from NCR Retail Online or
CPOnline are handled as secure, fully-qualified ecommerce
transactions
 AVS (Address Verification Service)
 Optional CVV2/CVC2
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-36
07/04/17
Credit Card Capabilities
PCI Alert!
Visa Merchant Level Classifications

Visa has established four level classifications for merchants who process Visa
transactions, along with specific validation requirements for each level. Most
NCR Counterpoint merchants can be classified as Level 4 merchants.

Visa recommends that Level 4 merchants complete an annual PCI SelfAssessment Questionnaire, which you can obtain from PCI Security Standards
Council website
(https://www.pcisecuritystandards.org/merchants/self_assessment_form.php).
Visa also recommends an annual network scan, performed by a qualified,
independent scan vendor, for Level 4 merchants.

If you qualify for a higher Level, you are responsible for meeting all listed
validation requirements.
Level
You are in this level if
4
You process fewer than
20,000 Visa ecommerce
transactions annually
3
You process more than
20,000 Visa ecommerce
transactions annually
2
1
You process more than
150,000 Visa ecommerce
transactions annually
You process more than
6,000,000 Visa
transactions annually
or
Your systems have been
attacked and compromised
or
Visa or any other card
association designates you
as a Level 1 merchant.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
Validation requirements
None. However, Visa
recommends:

Completing an annual PCI
Self-Assessment
Questionnaire

Annual network scan

Completing an annual PCI
Self-Assessment
Questionnaire

Quarterly network scan

Completing an annual PCI
Self-Assessment
Questionnaire
Performed by


Merchant
Qualified
Independent Scan
Vendor

Merchant

Qualified
Independent Scan
Vendor

Merchant

Qualified
Independent Scan
Vendor

Quarterly network scan

Quarterly network scan


Completing an annual On-site
PCI Data Security
Assessment
Qualified
Independent Scan
Vendor

Qualified data
security company, or
internal audit if
signed by officer of
the company
6-37
07/04/17
Credit Card Capabilities:
NCR Secure Pay vs NCR Counterpoint Gateway
NCR Secure Pay
NCR Counterpoint Gateway
Data Encryption/
Hardware
Offers Point-to-Point Encryption (P2PE)
with encrypting MSR hardware to
ensure credit card data is encrypted
from moment of swipe through
settlement. Will also support EMV
("chip and pin").
Credit card data is encrypted after
Counterpoint receives it. No support for
P2PE or EMV.
Credit card data
storage
Token replaces credit card data stored
in Counterpoint database. Credit card
data is stored only in NCR Secure Pay
servers.
Credit card data is stored encrypted in
Counterpoint database.
View full card
numbers
Full credit card numbers cannot be
seen anywhere in Counterpoint.
Full credit card numbers can be seen
by authorized users. Access is logged.
Processors
Expanded list of credit card and gift
card processors.
Only specific credit card and gift card
processors are supported.
Account set-up
Processor and credit processing
information is entered online when
merchant signs up for a Secure Pay
account.
Processor and credit processing
information is entered when configuring
store information in Counterpoint.
Separate Secure Pay user ID and
password for each store.
One user ID and password for each
Counterpoint serial number.
Credit transactions are viewed and
settled through NCR Secure Pay
Merchant Portal. Settlement information
can also be viewed in Merchant Portal.
Pre-settlement list in Counterpoint can
be used to view credit transactions prior
to settlement. Settlement Journal
printed in Counterpoint is used to view
settlement information.
Scheduling of automatic settlement is
done in Merchant Portal.
Use Counterpoint Scheduled Tasks to
schedule automatic settlement.
Failover
Failover to dialup accomplished via any
high-speed Internet connection,
including router automatic dial-up
Configure CPDialup for failover when
Internet is not available
Counterpoint
version
Supported only in Counterpoint
V8.4.6.11 or higher.
Supported in all current and older
versions of Counterpoint.
EBT
Supports EBT with Worldpay when
using EMV (V8.5.3 or higher)
Supports EBT
Check
Verification
Does not support Check Verification
Supports Check Verification
View and settle
credit
transactions
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-38
07/04/17
NCR Secure Pay Processors
Available in Current Release (as of June, 2017)
Credit
Cards
PIN Debit
Stored
Value
Cards
NCR Merchant Solutions (WorldPay/Lynk)
X
X
X
First Data – North (Cardnet)
X
Chase Paymentech
X
X
TSYS/Vital/VisaNet
X
X
First Data – South (Nabanco)
X
Processor Name
X
X
X
X
Stored Value Systems (SVS)
Elavon (Nova) *
X
Mercury Payment Systems *
X
Vantiv (Fifth Third Bank) *
X
X
X
Givex *
X
Moneris e-Select Plus
X
* New for use with NCR Counterpoint and NCR Secure Pay (not supported with NCR Counterpoint
Gateway).
Future, Post-General Release – Dates for Availability TBD:
Processor Name
Credit
Cards
First Data – Omaha (ETC+) *
X
Heartland Payment Systems *
X
Elavon (Nova) *
PIN Debit
Stored
Value
Cards
X
Mercury Payment Systems *
X
Vantiv (Fifth Third Bank) *
X
Global Payments *
X
X
Chockstone Gift
X
Valutec *
X
* New for use with NCR Counterpoint and NCR Secure Pay (not supported with NCR Counterpoint
Gateway).
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-39
07/04/17
NCR Secure Pay: Credit Card Capabilities

Communication service via Internet

Fee is monthly, and is based on number of transactions and whether using CMP
or non-CMP

https://userportal.counterpointpos.com/solution/merchant-services/ncrsecurepay.htm
for info and sign-up

Credit Card numbers are “masked” on all pre-defined reports and forms

Credit Card numbers are stored only on NCR Secure Pay servers;
transaction IDs are stored as "tokens" in live ticket & ticket history tables

Supports use of point-to-point encryption ("P2PE") from MSR device and into
POS network with use of MSR injected with unique Secure Pay encryption keys
PCI Alert!
Encryption: When not using P2PE MSR devices, all credit card numbers are
encrypted using a strong encryption algorithm. During entry or editing of a credit card
number, the full card number is visible until you leave the field. After leaving the field,
the card number is masked to show only the first 6 and last 4 digits. Only the last 4
digits of the card number print on receipts and invoice forms.
When using P2PE MSR devices, credit card numbers are encrypted from the moment
of scan, through the operating system and into the POS network.
Note: Record credit card numbers only in fields designed for that purpose. Do not
record them in fields such as customer profiles or comments, which are not
encrypted.
Retention: Cardholder data used for authorization and settlement is stored only on
NCR Secure Pay servers and never in the Counterpoint database. A transaction ID or
"token" is returned by NCR Secure Pay during the authorization process and stored in
the Counterpoint database. CVV2/CVC2/CID data (verification numbers on cards),
PINs and PIN blocks are also encrypted upon entry and are not retained in the
Counterpoint database.
Masked card numbers are retained in ticket history.
Access: Access to full card numbers is not allowed, nor are the full card numbers
stored anywhere in the Counterpoint database. Only "tokens" are retained in live and
posted tickets.
Purging: Tokens retained in history are purged whenever you purge ticket history. If
the Internet is unavailable when doing a validated return, or if ticket history (and the
associated tokens) have been purged, you must again swipe the credit card to be
able to refund to the same card number.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-40
07/04/17
NCR Secure Pay: Setting Up Credit Cards
Follow these steps to prepare, configure, and test your NCR Counterpoint system for
NCR Secure Pay authorizations and settlement. Details for each step are provided in
NCR Secure Pay Online Help.
Step 1
Obtain processor-specific information ("VAR" sheet) for each of your stores.
Step 2
Install Counterpoint V8.4.6.11 or later
Step 3
Purchase the Credit Card Option for Counterpoint, if using a non-CMP ("Counterpoint
Merchant Program") processor
Step 4
Sign up for NCR Secure Pay
Step 5
Configure your network firewall
Step 6
Verify your Internet connection
Step 7
Get MSR card readers injected for NCR Secure Pay, if not already injected
Note: To process EMV card transactions, you must use iSC250 payment terminals and
they must be updated to firmware version 14.0.5 or 14.0.6. See Ingenico iSC250
Firmware Update for instructions.
Step 8
Set up system pay codes
Step 9
Configure credit card settings for each store in Counterpoint (see next page)
Step 10
Configure payment methods in the NCR Secure Pay Merchant Portal
Step 11
Configure stored value card settings for your company in Counterpoint
Step 12
Configure gift card processor settings in the NCR Secure Pay Merchant Portal
Step 13
Set up MSR card readers on Counterpoint POS workstations
Step 14
Configure MSR card readers and/or payment terminals in Counterpoint
Step 15
Optionally schedule automatic settlement in the NCR Secure Pay Merchant Portal
These additional steps will need to be performed if you plan to process EMV card
transactions with NCR Secure Pay. Details for each step are provided in EMV Support
in the Counterpoint Online Help.
Step 16
Update your NCR Secure Pay Account (Worldpay)
or
Update your NCR Secure Pay Account (TSYS)
or
Update your NCR Secure Pay Account (Vantiv)
Step 17
Enable EMV Entry Modes in NCR Secure Pay
Step 18
Configure iSC250 Payment Terminals for EMV
Step 19
Customize the payment entry toolbar for manual entry
Step 20
Configure EMV actions for Touchscreen ticket entry
Step 21
Update form groups
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-41
07/04/17
NCR Secure Pay:
Configure Credit Card Settings for Each Store
Credit Cards tab (Step 9)
Requires Credit Card Option if processor is not NCR Merchant Solutions
<NSP Username>
<NSP Username>
After saving store record, click to
ensure Merchant number & ID and
EDC POS password are correct,
and store can connect to Secure
Pay server.
Merchant number
Enter the merchant number assigned to this store. This is normally
the Secure Pay Username provided in your registration Welcome
email.
Payment gateway
Select NCR SecurePay.
SecurePay Merchant Id
Enter the Secure Pay Username provided in your registration
Welcome email.
EDC POS password
Enter the Secure Pay POS Password provided in youir Welcome
email.
If you later change the POS Password in the Settings area of the
Secure Pay Merchant Portal, be sure to also change it here.
Use stored value cards
Enable if you plan to process stored value cards (e.g., processor
gift cards) in the store.
You will also need to configure stored value cards for the company
(in Setup>System>Company) and for the processor (in the NCR
Secure Pay Merchant Portal).
Require PO numbers for
purchase cards
Enable if you plan to accept business or government purchase
cards so that POS users are required to enter a PO number if
purchase card used.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-42
07/04/17
NCR Secure Pay:
Configure Credit Card Settings for Each Store
Credit Cards tab
(cont.)
<NSP Username>
<NSP Username>
Address Verification
Use Visa/MC AVS
Use AmEx AAV
Use Discover AVS
Require override for
address/zip mismatch
Require override when
unavailable
Allow address entry
Default address
Enable address verification for each credit card type
Require an override when the AVS address and zip code don’t
match
Require an override when AVS is unavailable
The processor obtains the AVS response from a third party (e.g.,
Visa or MasterCard). The message AVS unavailable is shown
when the processor is unable to obtain an AVS response.
Allow user to enter an AVS address at point of sale
Use Bill-to or Ship-to address as default value
None also available if Allow address entry is enabled
CVV2 / CVC2 / CID
Use Visa/MC CVV2/CVC2
Use AmEx CID
Use Discover CID
Require override for mismatch
Require override when unavailable
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
Enable card value verification. Can be used with or
without AVS.
Require override when entered CVV2/CVC2 doesn't
match the processor's CVV2/CVC2 for the card
Require an override when CVV2/CVC2 is unavailable
6-43
07/04/17
NCR CP Gateway Processors
Credit Card Processor Service Cross-Reference
Processors
First Data North (FDMS)
RBS Lynk (WorldPay)
First Data South
TSYS (Vital)
Paymentech
Moneris
Credit Card Option
NCR Merchant Solutions
CMP
Check authorization through Telecheck and Certegy
*
*
*
*
*
Debit cards (Retail industry classification only)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Industry classifications –
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Address Verification Service (AVS)
*
*
*
*
*
*
CVV2/CVC2/CID for manually-entered (not swiped)
*
*
*
*
*
*
Purchase/corporate cards (Level II)
*
*
*
*
*
*
Direct Amex authorization (NCR CP Gateway only)
*
*
*
*
*
*
EBT Electronic food stamps (Retail classification only)
*
*
*
*
*
Partial authorizations and reversals
*
*
*
Service (*=Available)
Retail
Mail Order/Telephone Order
Ecommerce
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-44
*
*
07/04/17
NCR CP Gateway: Credit Card Capabilities

Communication service via NCR Counterpoint Gateway or CP Dialup

Credit Card numbers are “masked” on all pre-defined reports and forms

Credit Card numbers are stored “encrypted” in live ticket & ticket history tables
PCI Alert!
Encryption: All credit card numbers are encrypted using a strong encryption
algorithm. During entry or editing of a credit card number, the full card number is
visible until you leave the field. After leaving the field, the card number is masked to
show only the first 6 and last 4 digits. Only the last 4 digits of the card number print
on receipts and invoice forms.
Note: Record credit card numbers only in fields designed for that purpose. Do not
record them in fields such as customer profiles or comments, which are not
encrypted.
Retention: Cardholder data that is necessary for authorization and settlement is
temporarily stored in the corresponding transaction file, where it is inaccessible to
users, and then discarded immediately after the corresponding transaction is settled.
Magnetic stripe data is not permanently retained in the Counterpoint database.
CVV2/CVC2/CID data (verification numbers on cards) are discarded as soon as
authorization is obtained and are not retained in the Counterpoint database.PINs and
PIN blocks are not retained in the Counterpoint database.
Masked card numbers are retained in ticket history. Retention of full credit card
numbers in history is optional for each store; full card numbers retained in history are
encrypted and can only be access by authorized Counterpoint users.
Access: Access to full card numbers in history is restricted to authorized users; each
time an authorized user views card number data, the event is logged for audit
purposes. Only users whose jobs require them to have knowledge of cardholder
information should be allowed to view full, unencrypted card numbers in ticket
history. Authorization to view full card numbers is provided in the System Security
Code. Each time a full credit card number is viewed, the activity is recorded in
Security.Log in your Counterpoint installation directory.
Purging: Full card numbers retained in history are purged whenever you purge ticket
history. If you retain full card numbers in history, you must define a specific retention
period for card number data and provide a business justification for the retention
period. You must periodically purge ticket history to ensure that you do not keep any
cardholder data beyond the retention period you have defined.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-45
07/04/17
NCR CP Gateway: Internet Authorizations

Credit card, debit card, and check authorizations via the Internet,
rather than dial-up

Fast authorization times (typically 2 seconds)

Uses existing Internet connection

One Internet connection can service all Counterpoint workstations

Automatic "failover" to dial-up (CP Dialup)

Fee is monthly, and is based on number of transactions and whether
using CMP or non-CMP

www.CPGateway.com for info and sign-up
Counterpoint
workstation
(with credit card /
check transaction)
Connects to CP Gateway through
the Internet, via TCP/IP protocol
CP Gateway
servers
(SYN)
Constant
connection
Processor
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-46
07/04/17
NCR CP Gateway Status
Select Point of Sale > Credit Cards > CPGateway Status

Use to switch NCR CP Gateway access between NCR CP Gateway servers

Use to temporarily disable your NCR CP Gateway connection and enable dial-up
credit card processing

Must be subscribed to Counterpoint Subscription Service
Start your Web browser and load the
CPGateway Service Status page
Store
Enter or lookup a store to view the current status of the NCR CP
Gateway connection
Status
Displays current status; use Disable and Enable button to change
status
CPGateway servers
Lists the NCR CP Gateway server you are currently using, followed
by your backup server
Click
to toggle your connection
CPDialup servers
Lists your preferred dial-up server, followed by your backup dial-up
server
Click
to toggle your dial-up connection
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-47
07/04/17
NCR CP Dialup: Modem Authorizations

Credit card, debit card, and check authorizations via dial-up modem
communication over phone lines

CP Dialup installed on your server in TopLevel > CPDialup and is shared
by all workstations

Use instead of NCR CP Gateway or as failover for NCR CP Gateway

Services multiple client requests and processor connections

No fees or sign-up charge from NCR
Counterpoint
workstation
(with credit card /
check transaction)
Constant connection
CP Dialup
Servers
(yours)
Connects to
CP Dialup using
phone lines,
via a modem
Processor
Requirements:
One or more modems connected to the dial-up server (refer to Modem support list in
Modems.ini in CPDialup folder)
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-48
07/04/17
NCR CP Gateway: Setting Up Credit Cards
Follow these steps to prepare, configure, and test your NCR Counterpoint system for
both CP Gateway and CP Dialup authorizations. Details for each step are provided in
Online Help.
PCI Alert!
Handling of authentication data: If authentication data is collected and retained
outside of Counterpoint, adhere to these guidelines when handling the data:
 Collect sensitive authentication data only when needed to solve a specific problem
 Store such data only in specific, known locations with limited access
 Collect only the limited amount of data needed to solve a specific problem
 Encrypt sensitive authentication data while stored
 Securely delete such data immediately after use
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-49
07/04/17
NCR CP Gateway:
Configuring Credit Card Settings for Each Store
Credit Cards tab (Step 13)
Requires Credit Card Option if processor is not NCR Merchant Solutions
Displays if a valid CMP
merchant # is entered
Construct Terminal ID
based on information
from the processor
Merchant number
Enter the merchant information supplied to you by the processor
Processor
Format
First Data
North
BBBMMMMMMMMM Your 12-digit FDMS merchant number
(sometimes provided as a 3-digit BBB bank code and a 9digit MMMMMMMMM Merchant ID)
TSYS
BBBBBBMMMMMMMMMMMM, where BBBBBB is your 6-digit
BIN# and MMMMMMMMMMMM is your 12-digit Merchant ID
Payment gateway
Select NCR Secure Pay, CPGateway, or Other Gateway
(Moneris)
Processor
Select FDMS North, FDMS South, TSYS, Paymentech or RBSLynk
Industry type
Select Retail, Mail-order/Telephone-order, or Ecommerce
Authorization terminal ID
Settlement terminal ID
IDs to use for authorizing transactions and settling transactions. Info
provided by processor
See Credit Cards and CounterPoint SQL electronic document on
how to derive terminal IDs for each processor
Primary dialup server
Alternate dialup server
Name or IP addresses of primary and secondary dial-up servers
(Secondary is optional)
Use CPGateway
Enable NCR CP Gateway as primary authorization and settlement
method
Enter the merchant # provided when you signed up for NCR CP
Gateway
CPGateway merchant #
Operating mode
Live, test, or simulated transactions
Use stored value cards
Indicate whether to use stored value cards (requires NCR CP
Gateway or NCR Secure Pay)
Require PO numbers for
purchase cards
Require entry of a PO number if purchase card used
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-50
07/04/17
NCR CP Gateway:
Configuring Credit Card Settings for Each Store
Credit Cards tab (cont.)
Click
to
configure information for the
processor
Click
to
configure for direct authorization
with American Express
Address Verification
Use Visa/MC AVS
Use AmEx AAV
Use Discover AVS
Require override for
address/zip mismatch
Require override when
unavailable
Allow address entry
Default address
Pre-authorization
Enable address verification for each credit card type
Require an override when the AVS address and zip code don’t
match
Require an override when AVS is unavailable
The processor obtains the AVS response from a third party (e.g.,
Visa or MasterCard)
The message AVS unavailable is displayed when the AVS link at
the processor is down
Allow user to enter an AVS address at point of sale
Use Bill-to or Ship-to address as default value
None also available if Allow address entry is enabled
Allow data to be validated prior to authorization
CVV2 / CVC2 / CID
Use Visa/MC CVV2/CVC2
Use AmEx CID
Use Discover CID
Require override for mismatch
Require override when unavailable
Retain full card numbers in history
Enable card value verification. Can be used with or
without AVS.
Require override when entered CVV2/CVC2 doesn't
match the processor's CVV2/CVC2 for the card
Require an override when CVV2/CVC2 is unavailable
Indicate whether to retain full card detail in history
Use AmEx direct
AmEx SE number
Indicate whether to directly authorize AmEx through NCR CP
Gateway
Enter your Service Establishment number
Use EBT
EBT FCS id
Indicate whether to use Electronic Benefits Transactions
Only available to Retail merchants and only when the
selected processor supports EBT
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-51
07/04/17
NCR CP Gateway:
Configuring Credit Card Settings for Each Store
Configuring the Processor (Step 14)
For the selected processor, enter the requested information.
First Data North
RBSLynk
First Data South
Paymentech
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-52
07/04/17
NCR CP Gateway:
Configuring Credit Card Settings for Each Store
Configuring the Processor (Step 14)
TSYS
Merchant name
Your merchant name, up to 25 characters
Merchant city
Your merchant city, up to 13 characters
Merchant state
Your 2-character state
Merchant city (zip)
Up to 9-digit zip code
Merchant phone number
For MOTO or Ecommerce, phone number to print on credit
card statements
Merchant location #
Your 5-digit location number
Merchant category code
4-digit merchant category code (SIC)
Store number
4-digit store number
Terminal number
4-digit terminal number
Terminal ID "V" number
7-digit "V" number prefaced with 7, for a total of 8 digits
Currency/Country code
3-digit currency/country code (blank = 840 for US$)
Time zone differential
3-digit time zone code
Agent bank number
Agent chain number
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
Time zone
Code
EST (Eastern)
705
CST (Central)
706
MST (Mountain)
707
PST (Pacific)
708
6-digit agent bank number
6-digit agent chain number
6-53
07/04/17
NCR CP Gateway:
Configuring Credit Card Settings for Each Store
Configuring the Processor (TSYS continued)
Checks
Check service
For check verification, select your check service: Certegy East (east of
Mississippi), Certegy West (west of Mississippi), or Telecheck
Receiving
institution ID
This is the institution from which check verification requests will be
routed from Vital
Leave blank, unless bank or processor specifically instructs to enter it
Check service
If blank, uses these defaults:
Receiving institution ID
TeleCheck
861400
Certegy East
894400
Certegy West
894300
Debit
Reimbursement
attribute
1-character reimbursement attribute
Z is default value for Standard Interlink Merchant
Sharing group
Identify the sharing group for debit network (up to 30 characters)
Merchant ABA #
9-digit merchant ABA number
Merchant
settlement agent #
4-character merchant settlement agent number (e.g., V027)
May be labeled FIID on bank documents
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-54
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores
Profile tab

What type of profiles and how many of each do you want to use for this store

Use to track things like “source of lead” to gauge effectiveness of advertising

If custom fields have been added for the Stores table, which fields should be
prompted for the store?
Prompt for profile
fields
Should enabled profiles be requested automatically for every
ticket, or should they be skipped and entered only as needed (via
Additional Functions button
on the ticket entry toolbar)?
Use Code profile 1 through 5 for pre-defined responses
Use Alpha profile 1 through 5 for text responses
Use Date profile 1 through 5 for date responses
Use Numeric profile 1 through 5 for numeric responses
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-55
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores
Receipts tab

Use to customize Point of Sale receipts (messages print on all receipt styles)
Prints after store name /
address and before
receipt data
Indicate whether to print
Long description and what
minimum discount % to
print
Prints after receipt data
Default text for E-mail
receipts
Detail type (for Crystal and .rdlc receipts)
Select additional line detail to include:
No additional detail
Show Reg Price
Reg Price and $ Disc
Reg Price and % Disc
Show Retail
Stocking unit Price-1
Retail and $ Disc
Retail and % Disc
Show Calc Price
Calc Price and $ Disc
Calc Price and % Disc
Show Price-1
Pricing location Price-1
Price-1 and $ Disc
Price-1 and % Disc
User-defined 1
User-defined 2
User-defined 3
Total discount type (for Crystal and .rdlc receipts)
Select to show total discount on ticket:
None
Total Reg Price $ Disc
Total Retail $ Disc
Total Calc Price $ Disc
Total Price-1 $ Disc
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-56
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Stores
Pay Codes

Use to define each of the pay codes that will be accepted as tender at this store

Pay codes must be previously defined using Setup / System / Pay Codes
Click
Click
to add a new pay
code for this store. Select the
new pay code from the lookup
window.
Click
to remove the
highlighted pay code so that it
is no longer valid for this store.
Click
or
to change the order in which
pay codes are listed.
For a check, credit card or stored value card pay code type, click
if you need to enter
an authorization terminal ID for this pay code that differs from the authorization ID already
specified for the store.
Note: The first 15 pay codes listed automatically appear as payment buttons in Ticket Entry if
image files or button labels were specified for them in Setup > System > Pay Codes.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-57
07/04/17
Setting Up Order Management Control
Select Setup > Point of Sale > Order Management Control

Use to define form group and summary report handling for each stage of Order
Management
Allow partial
orders?
Allow users to select individual order lines during Pick and Pick Verify
stages so that they can be processed in Pack and Release stages.
Unless partial orders are enabled, all lines on an order must be
processed through each stage together.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-58
07/04/17
Planning the Touchscreen Configuration
Design Factor
Design Strategy
Using scanner for item
entry



One button page with an entry field for item number.
It is not necessary to set up a button for every item.
All actions can be configured on one page to expedite
transactions.
Using keyboard

Add hot keys to captions on buttons to expedite button
selection from keyboard.
For entry fields, select those requiring the fewest
keystrokes.

Using touchscreen monitor

Size buttons to accommodate the largest of fingers and to
reduce button selection errors.
Using touchscreen monitor
as standalone input device
(no scanner or keyboard)

Design a button for each item sold, each pay code
accepted and each action performed at station.
Minimize the amount of data entry required, using fewest
possible entry fields,
The floating keyboards and keypads are nifty, but slow to
entering data.


Using mouse as standalone 
input device


Minimize the amount of data entry required, using fewest
possible entry fields,
The floating keyboards and keypads are nifty, but slow to
entering data.
Reduce size of buttons to the smallest usable size, to
minimize the distance for mouse moves.
Ticket entry speed is critical 
Use scanner for item entry and use one button page
Ticket entry speed is critical 
and no scanner available

Design buttons for input device(s).
Maximize the number of buttons per page (by reducing
button size) and keep number of pages to a minimum.
Small number of products
sold with no scanner


Order (and group) item buttons in a way that is familiar or
logical to users.
Putting more buttons on one page allows fewer pages, but
button recognition is the challenge on pages with many
small buttons.
Other questions to ask:
Is user right or left handed – locate buttons accordingly
What is the screen resolution – design for lowest used resolution
What are the commonly used functions – assign to fixed buttons
What terms will the user be familiar with – assists users in finding buttons
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-59
07/04/17
Setting Up Touchscreen Codes
Select Setup > Point of Sale > Touchscreen Codes

Use to define touchscreen buttons for use with Point of Sale > Tickets/ >
Touchscreen

Assign touchscreen code to each station that will use Touchscreen
Click
to define or modify touchscreen buttons.
As you define the buttons for a
touchscreen code, the results
display here when you click
This is where you define
the touchscreen buttons
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-60
07/04/17
Setting Up Touchscreen Codes
Layout of the Configuration Editing Window
Entry control area
Top panel buttons
(always displayed)
A “Page” of buttons
(buttons not yet defined)
“Fixed” buttons
(always displayed)
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-61
07/04/17
Setting Up Touchscreen Codes
General tab
Use to control the number of buttons,
their shape and size, and style
Lock height/width
Round corners
Hide empty buttons
Button Style
Text position
Indicate whether to scale buttons to the same pixel h/w
Indicate whether to round the corners of buttons
Indicate whether to Hide empty buttons
Indicate whether to use Metro, Standard, Gel or Gradient
buttons
Select where to position text: Top, Center or Bottom
Rows and Columns
Fixed rows
Item rows
Columns
Top
Number of fixed button rows
Number of rows per page
Number of columns per page and for fixed buttons
Number of top panel buttons
Spacing
Horizontal
Vertical
Border
Space in pixels between button rows
Space in pixels between button columns
Width of border in pixels around button panel
Fonts
Buttons with images
Buttons without images
Item number
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
Fonts used to display button captions / Item number
6-62
07/04/17
Setting Up Touchscreen Codes
Buttons tab

Click
to rename a page of buttons

Click
to copy a page of buttons

Click
to define a new page of buttons

Click
to delete a page of buttons
For each page of buttons,
define how each button
looks and what action
occurs when it is pressed
Page
Default
Allow item entry
The list of all defined pages of buttons
If selected, this is the page of buttons that displays initially in ticket
entry
Indicate whether to allow item number lookup
Action
Determines action that occurs when button is selected during ticket
entry
Image
Name of picture file (Toplevel/CompanyName/Configuration/Images)
Caption
Button label
Hint
Flyover help
ShortCut
Keyboard shortcut
Color
Background color of button
Font
Font for button caption
Page Action
After performing action, what page should display?
Go to page
If Page Action is Go to specified page, what page?
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-63
07/04/17
Touchscreen Button Actions
This Button Action
Does this when button is selected
None
Button has no action (default setting)
Add backorder line
Enter a backorder line on the ticket
Add dropship order line
Enter a drop-ship order line on the ticket
Add layaway line
Enter a layaway line on the ticket
Add order line
Enter an order line on the ticket
Add special order line
Enter a special order line on the ticket
Button page
Move to another page of touchscreen buttons
Cancel document changes
Cancel changes to the document
Cancel line
Cancel the additional of the current line
Card payment
Assign a single button to process any type of card payment,
including credit cards, debit cards, stored value cards
(SVCs), store credits, gift cards, and electronic benefit
transfer (EBT) cards.
Cash drop
Remove cash from drawer
Cash loan
Add cash to drawer
Change line taxable status
Change line item from taxable to non-taxable, or vice-versa
Clear all discounts
Clear all entered discounts
Clear document discount
Clear entered document discounts
Clear line discount
Clear entered line discounts
Clear payments
Clear all pay codes and amounts entered on this ticket
Clock in out
Allow the user to clock in / clock out
Complete
Save the paid ticket, print it, and begin a new ticket
Custom action
Executes a custom action defined in company's Actions.xml
Customer from lookup
Select customer from a customized lookup
Customer zoom
Show information for the current customer
Edit gift card sold
Show lookup of gift cards to allow user to select an existing
gift card for the current ticket or add a new one
Enter bill to
Change bill-to name and address info for the ticket
Enter customer
Change the customer on the ticket
Enter description
Enter or edit item descriptions, if allowed for item
Enter document discount
Enter a discount for the current document
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-64
07/04/17
Touchscreen Button Actions
This Button Action
Does this when button is selected
Enter document location
Allows user to change the default location
Enter document number
Enter your own ticket or order number
Enter document profit
center
Allows user to change the document profit center
Enter item prompts
Display Item Prompts for items with prompts assigned
Enter line discount
Enter a discount for a line on a ticket
Enter line location
Allows user to change the location for a line
Enter line profit center
Allows user to change line profit center
Enter line tax category
Change line item's tax category for this document
Enter misc charge
If enabled, enter miscellaneous charge (amount or percent)
Enter notes
Enter a note
Enter package tracking
numbers
Allows user to enter package tracking numbers
Enter PO number
Allows user to enter a PO number
Enter sales rep
Change the sales rep on the ticket
Enter ship to
Enter or select shipping address for the ticket
Enter tax code
Change ticket's tax code
Exit
Exit ticket entry
External
Run executables, documents, web pages, other
applications
First line item
Move to first line of ticket
Gift registry
Access existing gift registries
Go back
Go back to previously used button pages
Help
Display online help
Hold
Place ticket on hold
Hold and recall
Place ticket on hold, and immediately recall the ticket
Hold recall
Take a ticket off hold
Home
Return to Home page (defined with Set Home Page button)
Item
Add the item to the sales ticket
Item details
Displays and allows editing of line item details, such as
color/size/pattern information for gridded items
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-65
07/04/17
Touchscreen Button Actions
This Button Action
Does this when button is selected
Item from lookup
Select item from a customized lookup
Item zoom
Display information for the current item
Keyboard
Display floating keyboard for entry
Keypad
Display floating keypad for numeric entry
Last line item
Move to last line of ticket
Lock station
Lock the station, requiring user login for access
Message center
Access the mail center
Move cursor down
Move down in line item list
Move cursor up
Move up in line item list
Move line down
Move down one line
Move line up
Move up one line
No action
Do nothing (default setting)
No sale
Open physical cash drawer without a sale
No tax
Set tax amount to zero and require entry of tax exempt
number
Pay code
Accept tender using this as the pay code
Pay in
Add money to the cash drawer
Pay on account
Record payments for A/R customers
Pay out
Remove money from the cash drawer
Pay with customer card on
file
Uses credit card type, number, expiration date, and
cardholder name entered in customer’s record
Price override
Change the price of the current ticket line
Price override percent
Discount price of current ticket line by a percentage
Process layaways
Work with an existing layaway
Process orders
Work with an existing order
Quantity
Change the quantity of the current ticket line
Quote
Convert ticket into a Quote
Quote recall
Convert Quote into a ticket
Repeat last line
Copy the last line entered to another new line
Reprice all lines
Update all lines with current pricing
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-66
07/04/17
Touchscreen Button Actions
This Button Action
Does this when button is selected
Reprint ticket
Reprint receipt for ticket
Return line
Treat current line as returned merchandise
Run page
Execute all buttons on a specified page
Sale line
Treat current line as sold merchandise
Select all lines
Mark all lines as Selected
Select line
Mark the active line as Selected
Sell gift card
Sell a single gift card using the gift card code specified
Sell stored value card
Sell a stored value card
Set home page
Specify which page to use when starting a new ticket
Ship full
Indicate to ship entered quantity for selected line
Ship zero
Indicate to not ship any quantity of the selected line
Show payments
Toggles between the display of order lines and payment
lines
Stop using registry
Stop using the selected gift registry
Stored value card from
lookup
Select a stored value card from a lookup
Tax override
Override calculated sales tax
Ticket profile codes
Enter profile codes for ticket
Toggle find mode
Toggles between adding a line and finding a line on a ticket
Unselect all lines
Mark all lines as Unselected
Unselect line
Mark the active line as Unselected
Use selected registry
Use the selected registry for item selection
Validated Returns
Process a validated return
View price details
View details for item pricing
Void completed ticket
Void completed, unposted ticket
Void current ticket
Void the current ticket
Void line
Delete last line entered on ticket or current line
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-67
07/04/17
Setting Up Touchscreen Codes
Example Button Definitions
External button action
Command = External program
Arguments = Values to pass to program
Quantity button action
Default qty = optional
Pause at quantity = allow entry of qty
when adding item
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-68
07/04/17
Setting Up Touchscreen Codes
Example Button Definitions
Run Page button action
Run page =
Execute each button on this page
Displays the “Run
page” button page
Sell Gift Card button action
GC code =
Sell this gift card code
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-69
07/04/17
Setting Up Touchscreen Codes
Layout tab
Use to define where on the touchscreen window each group of buttons displays
Save and Load
Touchscreen
configurations to or
from XML text files
Button panel position
Show page buttons on left or right side
Fixed buttons position
Show fixed buttons above or below pages of buttons
Top panel position
Show top panel buttons on left or right side
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-70
07/04/17
Setting Up Touchscreen Codes
Totals tab

Use to customize display of Totals Panel
Clear changes made to
Totals Panel in this
editing session
Copy all Totals Panel
settings from a different
configuration
Reset Value display and
Label display parameters
to defaults
Select from one of 6 pre-defined styles (Shown on next page)
Style
Value to display
Value Value to display for selected Totals field
Value display parameters
Font Display selected value with this font and color
Background color
Frame highlight color
Frame shadow color
Label display parameters
Font Display selected field name with this font and color
Background color
Frame highlight color
Frame shadow color
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-71
07/04/17
Setting Up Touchscreen Codes
Totals tab (cont.)
Predefined Styles
Default
Regular - Standard
Regular - Simple
Regular - Detailed
3-Column-Split
Extended-Bar
HTML
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-72
07/04/17
Setting Up Touchscreen Codes
Options tab

Use to specify whether to pause during entry of item, to allow a quantity to be
entered, or if the quantity should automatically default to 1
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-73
07/04/17
Setting Up Touchscreen Codes
Creating a Page of Buttons
Before you define individual buttons, you should define the pages of buttons for each
grouping of buttons you will need.
On the Buttons tab, click
Name each page so that when you see the name, you will know what types of buttons
you intend to put on that page (e.g., Sale Items).
Select Default to make a page of buttons the initial display when Point of Sale >
Touchscreen is selected.
Select Allow item entry to enable the Item Number control whenever this page of
buttons is displayed.
A page of blank buttons now appears in the Configuration Editing Window.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-74
07/04/17
Setting Up Touchscreen Codes
Configuring a button
Click the button you want to define, and enter its definition in the Button Editor.
When completed, click
to view the results of defining this button.
In this example, when someone clicks the button named Glove in Touchscreen ticket
entry, it will add the Glove item to a ticket.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-75
07/04/17
Setting Up Touchscreen Codes
You can now define a button that will display the Sale Items page.
Return to the Main Menu page. This is where you will locate the button that accesses
the Sale Items page.
To see a specific page of buttons while editing a touchscreen configuration, select the
page from the dropdown list at the top of the Buttons tab.
Click the button you want to define, and enter its definition in the Button Editor.
Click
when done to see the results.
NOTE: When creating or editing a touchscreen configuration, clicking the Sale Items
button does not result in the display of the Sale Items page of buttons. Instead, it
simply displays the definition of the Sale Items button.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-76
07/04/17
Exercise 1: Setting Up a RunPage Button
Try it Yourself!
This exercise illustrates how to create a page of buttons containing several items that
will all be sold ‘automatically’ when another button (with a RunPage action) is selected.
In this example, you will build a "MealDeal" button that, when selected, automatically
sells a Big Burger, a Pretzel, a Coke, with a $1 discount.
1. Select Setup > Point of Sale > Touchscreen Codes
Display the COMBO touchscreen code and click
to edit this code.
2. Maximize the Configuration Editing window to ensure you see all buttons, and
click
.
The Button Editor displays with the definition of
this button.
3. Select the SnackBar page to display the buttons
defined for that page.
We want the MealDeal button to appear on this
page.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-77
07/04/17
4. You will define the page that contains the items to be sold automatically when the
MealDeal button is selected. Since this will become the Button page for the
MealDeal, it must be defined before you define the button.
Click
.
Enter MealDeal as the name of the
new page (it can be any name).
A set of blank buttons appears in the
Touchscreen Ticket Entry (Editing) – COMBO
window.
Click the first blank button and define it as shown here. Click
.
Image and Caption are for ID
purposes only, since they
don't display during the
RunPage operation
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-78
07/04/17
Click the next blank button, and define it to sell the Pretzel.
Repeat the process to define a button to sell Coke.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-79
07/04/17
Repeat the process to define a button to sell Discount-1.
Since Discount-1 is the last item in the MealDeal you want to be sure it has a Page
Action that returns it to the SnackBar page when finished.
5. Lastly, display the SnackBar page. Click the blank button in the last row. Define this
Run page button to automatically sell the items on the MealDeal page.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-80
07/04/17
Click
and then click
to save the touchscreen code itself.
Close the Touchscreen Codes form.
6. Select Point of Sale > Tickets > Touchscreen from the menu.
Login to Station 1 and Drawer 1.
Click
to display the SnackBar page. Then click
to select the run
page. Each item on the MealDeal runpage is automatically sold. The ticket should
look like this:
Additional items can be added to the ticket, or you can delete any of the items added
by the MealDeal button.
Exit from Touchscreen ticket entry, selecting to void the current ticket. (Simply
closing the form is the easiest way.)
---------------------------------------------END OF EXERCISE--------------------------------------------
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-81
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Devices
Two methods to configure devices:
Device Management
 Simplified setup for devices used on multiple POS workstations
 Use for all Radiant-certified devices
 Faster device response times
 Greater stability of devices
 Counterpoint can run if a device is disconnected or inoperable
 Devices are configured once on any workstation or server (configuration
data stored in database)
 Workstation must be registered with site server and be assigned a default
workgroup
 OPOS device drivers and printers
 Multiple MSRs and Line displays per workstation
 Must use this method to use .rdlc receipt forms
 Access to legacy device configuration for Crystal receipt printers
Legacy Method
 Pre-V8.4 method for setting up devices
 Windows and OPOS device drivers
 Supports Crystal and OPOS printers
 Devices must be configured on each workstation (configuration data
stored in Windows registry)
 Must use this method to use .xml receipt forms on any workstation
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-82
07/04/17
Preparing to Use Device Management
Before using Device Management, you must:
1) Install manufacturers’ device drivers (skip if using Radiant workstations). You
may need to remove any already installed Windows drivers for those devices.
2) Download the information about setting up each device that will be used with
Counterpoint from the Hardware area of the partner website
(http://retailchannel.radiantsystems.com/hardware.htm), and set up the devices.
3) Use Setup > Point of Sale > Stores
and disable the Use Legacy Device
Framework check box for each store.
4) Use Setup > System >
Workstations to register each
workstation with its server and assign
a default workgroup.
5) Use Setup > System > Menu Codes
to delete the old Setup > Point of Sale
> Devices menu selection and replace
it with the new Setup > Point of Sale >
Devices menu selection.
Menu ID for old Setup/Point of Sale / Devices
New Setup / Point of Sale / Devices
6) Exit and restart Counterpoint.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-83
07/04/17
Using Device Management
Select Setup > Point of Sale > Devices
Shows workstations that are registered to a
store and that are assigned a default workgroup
Click
to add a new device
Click
to work with Radiant bundles, or a custom bundle
Click
to delete all device definitions
Click
to create a custom bundle
Click
to copy the device configuration to another workstation
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-84
07/04/17
Device Management: Adding a Device
Click
to configure a new device for use by
any workstation
Then select the type of device.
Use the Simulator selection for a device to demo or train
when the device isn’t really attached.
Cash Drawer
Select the certified cash drawer that you are using.
(if using two cash drawers on a single workstation, refer
to Configuring Dual Cash Drawers below)
Line Display
Select the certified line display that you are using.
After selecting device, select
the message set and events
when messages will appear.
Click
to configure the text of any
message that will appear on the
line display.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-85
07/04/17
Payment Terminal
Select the certified payment terminal
that you are using.
After selecting device,
configure the settings.
Not available for
Ingenico iSC250 EMV
Not available for
Ingenico iSC250 EMV
Expand a workstation to see the devices
configured for that workstation.
You can copy devices from one workstation
to another. Select the workstation or
specific device that you want to copy from,
and click
.
Select the store and workstation to which
you want to copy the device(s).
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-86
07/04/17
Device Management: Configuring Dual Cash Drawers

Allows two cash drawers to be used on a single Point of Sale terminal so that
tender values can be tracked separately for two different users that share a
workstation

Requires use of two certified, printer-driven M-S cash drawers connected to
either of these printer models:
-

Epson TM-T88V Serial or USB
NCR RealPOS 7197 Thermal Receipt Printer Serial or USB
(Serial only for WAN environment)
Also requires 24-volt cash drawer cable splitter to connect the two printer-driven
cash drawers to the printer
Configuring dual cash drawers
1) When using the Epson TM-T88V printer, use the Epson SetupPOS utility to
define both cash drawers. Refer to the V8.5.2 Release Notes for details
(http://ncrcounterpointhelp.com/#../Subsystems/V85_Release_Notes/Content/1_Point_of_Sale/D
ual_Cash_Drawer_Support.htm%3FTocPath%3DNCR%2520Counterpoint%2520V8.5%2520Rel
ease%2520Notes%7CV8.5.2%2520Service%2520Pack%2520Features%7C_____2).
2) When using the NCR RealPOS 7197 printer, use Setup>Point of Sale>Devices
to define the printer for the workstation. Select Dual at the Printer-Driven Cash
Drawer Settings field.
3) Use Setup>Point of Sale>Devices to define each M-S Printer Driven cash drawer
for the workstation. Be sure to use a unique and recognizable Description for
each cash drawer, since the description will appear in drawer functions (such as
Activate and Count).
Use the Advanced Test button to test whether each drawer opens.
4) Use Setup>Point of Sale>Drawers to create each drawer, and then use Setup>
Point of Sale>User Drawers to assign each drawer to the appropriate user with
the desired permissions.
5) Use Setup>Point of Sale>Stores to enable the “Login for each ticket” check box
(on the Tickets 2 tab) to ensure that each user who shares a workstation with
dual cash drawers logs in to the correct drawer when entering a ticket.
Also disable the “Use open drawer alarm” check box (on the Tickets 2 tab) since
it is not supported with dual drawer configurations.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-87
07/04/17
Device Management: Working with Bundles
A bundle is a group of device configurations that
will allow you to easily configure all devices at
once.
To define new bundles or view existing bundles,
click
to open the Manage Bundles window.
Using a Radiant Bundle
NCR provides a pre-defined bundle for the devices
that are part of the P1515 workstation.
Click that bundle and then click
to use the
device configurations in that bundle for the
workstation that you select in the above window.
Click
to use the device configurations for all
of the workstations at the store you select.
Defining a Custom Bundle
You can define a custom bundle that consists of your own device configurations which
you can then assign to a workstation or to all workstations for a store.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-88
07/04/17
Copying a Radiant bundle
To build a custom bundle by making changes to
a Radiant pre-defined bundle, select the
Radiant pre-defined bundle and click
Name the new bundle and click
.
.
For each device, you can:
- change the description
- select a different OPOS Name (based on installed drivers)
- select a message set and specific events (line displays only)
- delete the device
If you select the Bundle name, you can:
- add a new device
- delete all devices in the bundle
- delete the bundle
- copy the bundle to create a new
custom bundle
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-89
07/04/17
Create a Custom Bundle
To build a custom bundle, click
below Stores and Workstations
or
click Custom Bundles in the Manage
Bundles window and then click
Name the new bundle and click
.
.
Begin by clicking
and then define
each device you want to include in the
bundle.
Enter the configuration
settings for the device.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-90
07/04/17
Assigning a Bundle
From any workstation, you can assign a bundle to an individual workstation or to all
workstations in a store.
Select the store or workstation and
then click either
or
Select the bundle that you want to
assign.
When completed building bundles and assigning them to stores or workstations, click
or
.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-91
07/04/17
Device Management: Configure Crystal Printer
When using Device Management, you can
still configure a Crystal receipt printer by
selecting Legacy Devices > Configure
Legacy Devices… on the menu bar.
Printer drivers for Crystal receipt printers
To use a Crystal receipt printer on a Radiant POS workstation, you must remove the
existing OPOS printer driver before installing the appropriate Windows printer driver.
See Appendix 5 for instructions on configuring legacy devices.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-92
07/04/17
Point of Sale Forms
Crystal Forms vs OPOS Forms or .rdlc forms vs Other Forms
File must be in the
PSForms directory
File extension
Types of printers supported
Select printer during setup
(in Form Groups)
Select printer at print time
(from Ticket Entry)
Print to a remote (network)
printer
Use filters to control if
the form prints
Print data from the
Counterpoint document
Use filters to control what
the form prints
Show messages before/after
printing form
Cut paper after printing
Additional software required
to use/print forms
Additional software required
to customize forms
Font control, barcode
printing, graphics, etc.
Create a new form file
from within Counterpoint
Open existing form file for
editing from within CP
OPOS/rdlc
Crystal
Yes
Yes
Other
(Word, PDF, Excel, ...)
Yes
.xml (OPOS)
.rdlc (rdlc)1
OPOS only
Windows only
Any other extension5
(but not executables6)
Windows only
No
Yes
No
No2
Yes
No
No3
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes4
Yes4
No
None
None
None
Crystal Reports
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(Form editor)
.rpt
Associated application
must be on system
Associated application
must be on system
If application supports
No (must create file
outside of Counterpoint)
Yes (with Crystal
Yes (if associated
Reports on system) application is on system)
Yes
1) Use of .rdlc forms requires that you define your devices using Device Management.
2) OPOS forms always print to the (single) OPOS printer on the local workstation.
3) Printing to a remote (network) printer is not supported using OPOS forms.
4) Cutting paper is supported on Crystal or OPOS printers only – this requires that the printer support it as well.
5) To print an "Other" document, Windows must know how to print it. You can check this by seeing if "Print" is
listed in the pop-up menu seen when right-clicking the file in Windows Explorer. If it is not listed, then Windows
does not know how to print the file -- and Counterpoint will not print it either.
6) Executable files should not be used. It appears that attempting to print such a file does nothing at all.
NOTE: The Epson TM series works as OPOS or Crystal (NCR Support recommends Crystal), the Radiant
Bixolon works as OPOS or Crystal (NCR Support recommends Crystal), and the Epson TM-H6000 II/III is
certified for use with OPOS forms only.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-93
07/04/17
Flexibility of Form Groups

Multiple forms can be grouped together, and printed only under certain userdefined conditions

Can automatically print at ticket completion

Can use a single button to print one or more forms

Let the clerk choose which form(s) to print from multiple buttons

Print all forms to a single printer, or print different forms to different printers

Define which printer the forms will print to, or let the clerk select the printer in
ticket entry

Require certain forms to be printed and/or limit reprints

Automatically display messages, such as Would you like to print the Installation
Instructions?

Ticket barcode is printed on .rpt and .rdlc receipts for Validated Returns
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-94
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Form Groups
Select Setup > Point of Sale > Form Groups
Use to:
 identify any document available for printing in Ticket Entry
 specify whether each document is Radiant, OPOS or Crystal Reports format
 select the printer used to print each document
 identify special conditions under which a document will print
Use Setup > Point of Sale > Stations to assign form groups to stations
Group tab
Applies to
Conditions under which all forms in this form group applies
Customizable filter of all columns in PS ticket header table
Document type
Ticket type
Identify the type of document.
Additional filters may appear, depending on the document type
selected.
Auto print
Automatically print group at ticket completion
Enforce print/reprint
restrictions
Whether form group should adhere to store’s Require print and
Disallow reprint settings in Setup/Point of Sale/Stores
Button image
Button label
Shortcut key
Image file and/or label to display on button for printing forms
Keyboard shortcut to use to print form group
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-95
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Form Groups
Forms tab
Identify each form in the group, and conditions under which each will print
Previously defined
forms in this group
Move forms up or down
to control print sequence
"Active" form being
added or edited
Form details
Form filename
Filename of form: .rdlc for Radiant, .xml for OPOS, .rpt for Crystal. Locate
customized forms in company’s PSForms folder
Use Form Editor to modify .rdlc or .xml files. Workstation must have
Crystal installed to edit .rpt forms.
Customized forms must already exist to edit with Form Editor.
Comment
Information about form (doesn’t print or display in ticket entry)
Cut paper
Indicate whether to cut paper (.xml forms only)
Admission ticket
Indicate if form is an admission ticket (a separate form will print for each
unit sold of admission items – e.g., 5 forms will print for quantity sold of 5)
Additional rules
based on
Area of ticket on which to condition printing of this form: None, Ticket
header, Ticket lines, Payment lines, Gift cards, Ticket tax data, Ticket line
– cell data, Ticket line – serial data
Printer method
For .rdlc and .xml forms, select whether to preview the form, print it
automatically on the workstation’s OPOS printer, or email it.
For other forms (e.g., .pdf or .doc), select whether to preview the form or
to automatically print it on workstation’s default Windows printer.
For .rpt forms, select to use default Windows printer, preview it, email it,
select a printer at print-time, or identify a specific printer at Printer.
Printer
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-96
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Form Groups
Forms tab (cont.)
Messages
Message before printing Message to display to clerk before printing form
“Yes” button
“No” button
“Cancel” button
Message after printing
Text for buttons when this form is ready to print
Yes button will print form and is required if a message exists
No button skips printing of form, but allows remaining forms in
group to print
Cancel button skips printing this and remaining forms in group
Buttons without text will not appear in ticket entry
Optional message to display to clerk after printing this form
Messages appear even if auto-printing
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-97
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Form Groups
Forms tab (cont.)
Applies to
If Additional rules based on (on Forms details tab) is set to something other than None,
enter the conditions under which this specific form will print.
Customizable filter of all columns in table associated with “Additional rules based on”
entry.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-98
07/04/17
Setting Up Point of Sale Form Groups
Pre-defined Form Groups
Form Filenames in Group
Form Group
Description
Crystal
OPOS
(for OPOS only stations)
CDFAILPMT
Canadian debit failed pmt receipt CDSalesDraft1English
GIFTRCPT
Prints for gift receipts
GiftReceipt1.rpt
GiftReceipt1.rdlc/.xml
HOLD
Prints for hold tickets only
40 column receipt
Receipt1.rpt
Receipt1.rdlc/.xml
LAYAWAY
Prints for layaways
Receipt1.rpt
Receipt1.rdlc/.xml
ORDER
Prints for orders
Receipt1.rpt
Receipt1.rdlc/.xml
PAYINOUT
Prints for pay-ins and pay-outs
SalesDraft1.rpt
PayInOut1.rpt
SalesDraft1.rdlc/.xml
PayInOut1.rdlc/.xml
PAYONACCT
Prints for payments taken for
A/R accounts in Ticket Entry
SalesDraft1.rpt
PayOnAcct1.rpt
SalesDraft1.rdlc/.xml
PayOnAcct1.rdlc/.xml
PICK
Prints for existing orders when
the picking ticket button is
selected
80 column picking ticket, or 40
column form if Station is set to
OPOS only
PickingTicket1.rpt
PickingTicket1.rdlc/.xml
QUOTE
40 column receipt
Receipt1.rpt
Receipt1.rdlc/.xml
TICKET
Prints for standard tickets (nondeposit) (sales draft prints only if
credit card is used)
40 column receipt and sales
draft
SalesDraft1.rpt
Receipt1.rpt
SalesDraft1.rdlc/.xml
Receipt1.rdlc/.xml
VOID
Prints for voids
Receipt1.rpt
Receipt1.rdlc/.xml
VOID-PIO
Prints for pay-in/out voids
PayInOut1.rpt
PayInOut1.rdlc/.xml
VOID-POA
Prints for pay-on-account voids
PayOnAcct1.rpt
PayOnAcct1.rdlc/.xml



(or French).rpt
Replace SalesDraft1 with SalesDraft2 when using a signature capture device, if
you want to print captured signatures.
To use an 80-column invoice rather than a 40-column receipt, replace
“Receipt1.rpt” with “Invoice1.rpt” in form group.
If using the TM-T88 printers, replace forms with the TM-T88 version.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-99
07/04/17
Using Radiant Receipts

Radiant receipt format (.rdlc) fully compatible with OPOS receipt printers

Must use Device Management to configure devices, including receipt printer

Use Receipt Designer to modify, including:
o Add images or company logos
o Use formulas to modify ticket data and print the results
o Print individual grid cells or serial numbers under the corresponding item
o Include or exclude data based on any number of criteria
o Include aggregated data (e.g., number of items sold, subtotals, etc.)
o Print barcodes anywhere on receipt
o Print captured signature anywhere on receipt
o Embed special characters to trigger special functions (e.g., opening a
cash drawer) without requiring the use of printer codes
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-100
07/04/17
Using the Radiant Receipt Designer
Counterpoint’s built-in Receipt Designer allows you to modify Radiant receipt format
(.rdlc) forms or create new ones using a drag-and-drop interface.
Select the form you want to modify in the form group and click the Form Editor button
to display the Receipt Designer window.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-101
07/04/17
Receipt Designer Components
Data Tree – lists the fields available
in the highlighted section.
You can drag a field from the data
tree and position it anywhere on the
form.
Controls – shows elements that you
can drag and position anywhere on
the form.
Sections – check box for each
section of the form. Enable and
disable check box to remove section
from the form.
Designer tab – main area of the
Receipt Designer window
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-102
07/04/17
Preview tab – preview the
form
Report Properties – shows the
properties for the form (Author,
Description, etc.)
Section Properties – shows
the properties for the active
section
Control Properties – shows
the properties of a selected
data field or control.
Double-click a property to
change it.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-103
07/04/17
Radiant Receipt Designer: Adding a Logo
The pre-defined Receipt1.rdlc form already has a Header Logo positioned at the top of
the form.
This is how the logo was added to the form.
1) Right-click the top field and
select Add 1 Line.
2) Click Preloaded Logo under Controls, and drag the control to the new blank line.
Based on where you drag the control, it will assume that
you want to use the Header Logo or Footer Logo.
You can modify which logo it will use by clicking the logo
field to make it active and then changing the LogoType
setting in the Control properties.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-104
07/04/17
3) Use Device Management to designate the bitmap files that you want loaded into the
printer for the Header Logo and Footer Logo.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-105
07/04/17
Radiant Receipt Designer: Building Expressions
Many pre-defined expressions already exist in the Radiant receipt forms.
You can also define additional expressions for data fields and controls that allow you to:
-
Combine multiple fields into a single control
Define special formatting rules
Condition when a field prints or how its value prints
Pre-defined expression examples
A Data Field expression
joins a data field in the
database to a control.
In this example, the
expression
=Fields!Store.Value.Addres
s1 connects a store’s
Address1 field to the
corresponding field in the
database.
This example shows the
expression that prints the
label User on the form.
In this example, the expression
=Format(Fields!Price.Value,"#,#
#0.00") is used to format the field
Price.
This format results in a price
printing as “1,234.56” or “0.56”.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-106
07/04/17
This is an example of an
expression that combines
printing of the city, state and
zip code so that extra blank
spaces are eliminated.
=Fields!Store.Value.City+",
"+Fields!Store.Value.State+"
"+Fields!Store.Value.ZipCode
This expression: ="Discount (" + Fields!DiscountCode.Value + ")" results in printing the
label “Discount”, followed by the discount code used on the ticket.
In addition, another expression results in hiding the label (“Visibility”) if the total discount value
for the ticket is zero: =Fields!TotalHeaderDiscounts.Value = 0
More info on building formatting expressions:
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms157328.aspx
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-107
07/04/17
Exercise 2: Modifying Receipts
Try it Yourself!
This exercise illustrates how to modify the RDLC receipt format so that it prints the
customer name for all customers other than the default CASH customer.
1. Select Setup > Point of Sale > Form Groups and display the form group TICKET.
Switch to the Forms tab,
and select the second form
in the group.
“Receipt1.rpt” displays as
the form filename
“Receipt1.rpt” is a Crystal form, you could edit it with Crystal Reports software after you
click
. However, we want to edit the .rdlc receipt form.
A. Click the lookup button
next to “Receipt1.rpt”
and select the form
named “Receipt1.rdlc”.
B. Click
to
edit this format of the
receipt.
C. Answer Yes if asked if you want to create a
new custom form.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-108
07/04/17
2.
In the Header area, position your cursor at
the dotted line that precedes the Item area.
Right click, then select Add 1 Line from the
selection box.
A blank line now appears above the dotted line.
3.
Click TextBox.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-109
07/04/17
Drag and drop it
the textbox in first
column of your
new line.
4. Click in Textbox field of the Control panel that is
located on the right side of the Receipt Designer.
The
button appears. Click
to access the
Expression Editor.
Type Customer: in the right panel, then click OK.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-110
07/04/17
5.
Next, condition the printing of the
Customer: text field so it does not print
when the sale is for a customer whose
name is Cash Customer (the default
“walk-in” customer for our store). Click in
the Hidden field, then click
to access
the Expression Editor.
Expand Fields by clicking the +. Expand Customer, then:
A. Highlight Name.
B. Click >>.
C. =Fields!Customer.Value.Name populates the right panel of the Expression
Editor. You will need to add the name Cash Customer. Type =’Cash
Customer’. Click OK. When the software evaluates this statement and finds
the Customer listed is the cash customer, it will hide this field and not print it on
the receipt.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-111
07/04/17
6. Resize the Customer textbox by grabbing the handles and stretching the box until
you can view all the characters.
7. Now you will set the expression for the customer field and the expression to prevent
printing when the customer is the cash customer. Repeat Step 3. This time, drop
the textbox in the first column at the end of the Customer box.
A. Highlight Name.
B. Click >>.
C. =Fields!Customer.Value.Name populates the right panel of the Expression Editor.
Click OK.
D. From the Hidden field located in the Control panel, access the Expression editor.
Expand Fields, then Customer. Select Name and add it to the right panel of the
Expression Editor. You will need to add the name Cash Customer. Type =’Cash
Customer’. Click OK.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-112
07/04/17
Your Receipt designer will now look similar to this:
8. Resize the Name Text box by grabbing the handles and stretching the box to last
column on the right side of the designer.
You can preview the receipt by clicking the Preview tab to preview your new receipt.
9. Open Ticket Entry. Process two tickets, one for Brian Sheridan and the other for the
Cash Customer. The printing of the Customer and Customer Name fields should be
suppressed on the receipt for the cash customer.
Brian Sheridan receipt
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-113
07/04/17
Cash Customer receipt
---------------------------------------------END OF EXERCISE--------------------------------------------
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-114
07/04/17
Setting Up Stations
Select Setup > Point of Sale > Stations
Main tab
Default line type
Sale, Return, Order, Backorder, Special order, or Layaway
Begin tickets at
Start each new ticket at: Customer #, Lines, or Payment
For Lines or Payment, customer is automatically set to
default, if station uses the default customer
Begin lines at
Start line item entry at Item number or Quantity
Use default cust
Automatically start each ticket using the default customer
Default entry mode
Normal or Fast (no entry of description, cost, or quantity - but
can still enter price)
Primary dialup server
Alternate dialup server
Overrides dial-up server specified for Store
Ticket custom prompts
Payment custom prompts
If custom ticket/payment prompts have been added, which
prompt is used for the station?
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-115
07/04/17
Setting Up Stations
Main tab
Default tender pay code
Pay code to display as default when accepting tender
Default change pay code
Pay code to display as default when giving change due
Use tender pay code for
change
Indicate whether to use the tendered pay code as the pay
code for change due
Default refund pay code
Pay code to display as default when giving a refund
Touchscreen code
Touchscreen Code for this station
Show customer images
Show item images
Should Customer and Item images automatically display?
(Place images in the company’s CustomerImages and
ItemImages folders)
Use consolidated lines
Indicate whether to merge identical line items in Ticket Entry
Signature capture after
print
Request signature after printing receipt, instead of before
Show point redemption
message
Indicate when a customer can redeem points for some or all
of the purchase amount
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-116
07/04/17
Setting Up Stations
Numbers tab
Next ticket number
Next hold ID
Next quote number
Next order number
Next layaway number
If you selected in Setup/Point of Sale/Stores to have
ticket numbers, hold ID’s, quote numbers, order
numbers, or layaway numbers assigned from stations,
enter the number to automatically assign to each type
of document entered on this station
Always auto-assign
Select this check box to always assign the next number
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-117
07/04/17
Setting Up Stations
Form Groups tab

Use to specify which form group to use for printing each type of document

Form group specified must already be defined in Setup > Point of Sale > Form
Groups
Use all form groups
If selected, this station will be able to use all form groups
that are already defined
If not selected, identify form group to use for this station at
Form group
Form type
Use only OPOS, only Crystal, or only Radiant forms
associated with form group for this station, or select All to
use all types of forms
Form group
Single form group to use at this station, when not using all
form groups
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-118
07/04/17
Setting Up Drawers
Select Setup > Point of Sale > Drawers

Drawer is permanently associated with a store, not a station

Same drawer number can be used at different stores
Store
The store the drawer is associated with
Drawer
Enter the name for the drawer
Description
Enter the description for the drawer
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-119
07/04/17
Setting Up User Drawers
Select Setup > Point of Sale > User Drawers
or click
in Setup > System > Users
What drawers can each user access and what type of activity can they perform for a
drawer
User
ID of user for whom drawer will be valid
Store
Store number with which drawer(s) are associated, or * for all stores
Drawer
Drawer number to assign to user, or * for all drawers at that store
(or at all stores if * was entered for Store)
Allow
Activate
Use
Count
Reconcile
Post
Cash loan
Cash drop
Void of cash
loans/drops
User can run Activate drawer to specify opening cash amounts
User can enter tickets into this drawer
User can run Count drawer to enter closing amounts
User can run Reconcile drawer to verify or provide closing amounts
User can run Post tickets to post tickets in the drawer
User can add cash to the drawer
User can remove cash from the drawer
User can run Void cash loans/drops from the drawer
NOTE: If a user is set up to use “*” drawers, as drawers are added at Setup > Point of
Sale > Drawers, they will immediately have access to the new drawers.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-120
07/04/17
Setting Up Reason Codes
Select Setup > Point of Sale > Reason Codes

Use to define the valid reasons that can be specified for any of the events
for which reasons are required (selected in Setup > Point of Sale > Stores)

Select activities (e.g., “Tax override”) for which this reason code can be used
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-121
07/04/17
Setting Up Ticket Profile Codes
Select Setup > Point of Sale > Profile Codes

Use to define valid values for Code Profiles that were activated in Point of Sale
> Control or Setup > System/Quick Setup
Note: Use Setup > System > Quick Setup to change display labels for the profiles.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-122
07/04/17
Setting Up Gift Registry Occasions
Select Setup > Point of Sale > Gift Registry Occasions

Identify the different occasions for which you will accept gift registries
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-123
07/04/17
Setting Up Discount Codes
Select Setup > Point of Sale > Discount Codes

Define the valid discount codes for tickets / line items
Discount code
ID of discount code
Description
Description for the discount code
Discount type
Select the type of discount: Amount, Prompted amount,
Percent, Prompted percent
Amount
Amount / percent for the discount
Apply to
What does the discount apply to: Document or Line Item
Min. qualifying amt.
Minimum amount for Document / Line item to qualify for the
discount
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-124
07/04/17
Configuring Tax-Inclusive Pricing
If you specified that a store will use tax-inclusive pricing, you will need to make certain
changes in Counterpoint to accommodate showing prices to customers that already
include tax (e.g., "$1.25, including all taxes").
Besides enabling tax-inclusive pricing for a store, the additional changes you need to
make are:





Change columns displayed in Touchscreen or regular Ticket Entry
Modify messages displayed on line display devices
Modify prices shown on customer display devices
Customize receipts to print tax-inclusive prices
Customize ticket-entry related reports to print tax-inclusive prices
Change columns displayed in Touchscreen or regular Ticket Entry
Use column designer to show tax-inclusive values.
Replace Price and Line item price with Price (T) and Line item price (T).
Optionally add Tax amount (allocated) to see the tax portion of each item's price.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-125
07/04/17
Configuring Tax-Inclusive Pricing
Modify messages displayed on line display devices
Use Setup > Point of Sale > Devices to configure the line display message set.
Click
.
Load your message set and select the LINE
event.
Scroll to the right and click the field that displays the line item price.
Then select the corresponding "WITH_TAX" field from the Field list. ("WITH_TAX" fields
appear near the top of the Ticket Entry Line fields.)
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-126
07/04/17
Next, select the VOID LINE event.
As with the LINE event, replace the field that displays the line item price with the
corresponding "WITH TAX" field.
When finished, save the changes and close the Line Display Message Sets window.
Repeat these steps for each workstation with a line display.
Modify prices shown on customer display devices
Use Setup > Point of Sale > Devices to configure the prices shown on a customer
display.
Click
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
.
6-127
07/04/17
Enable the check box for Line
Item Grid Panel.
In the Line Item Grid Panel,
open Column Designer.
Replace the columns T, Price and Line
item price with Gross line item price
(T), Price (T), and Line item price (T).
You can also include Tax amount
(allocated) to show customers the tax
portion of each item's price.
When finished, adjust spacing of the
columns in the Line Item Grid Panel, as
needed.
Click
to save the changes and close the Line Display Message Sets window.
Repeat these steps for each workstation with a customer display.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-128
07/04/17
Customize .rdlc receipts to print tax-inclusive prices
Open Receipt1.rdlc in the
Form Editor.
In the Items band, click the Expression field for Price.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-129
07/04/17
In the Control window, click the Price Expression Textbox
value and then click the ellipsis button to edit it.
To print the tax-inclusive unit price for each item,
change the current expression for Price from this:
=Format(Fields!Price.Value,"#,##0.00")
to this:
=Format(Iif(Fields!QuantitySold.Value = 0, Fields!Price.Value +
Fields!TaxAmountAllocation.Value, Fields!Price.Value +
(Fields!TaxAmountAllocation.Value / Fields!QuantitySold.Value)), "#,##0.00")
The updated expression divides the tax amount allocated to the line item by the quantity
sold (after ensuring that the quantity is not zero) and then adds the result to the selling
price of the item.
To print the tax-inclusive extended price for each item, click the Expression field for the
Gross Extended Price (Total).
In the Control window, click the Textbox value for the
field and then click the ellipsis button to edit it.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-130
07/04/17
Change the current expression for Gross Display Extended Price from this:
=Iif(Convert.ToString(Fields!LineType.Value)="Unshipped", "Unshipped",
Format(Max(Fields!GrossDisplayExtendedPrice.Value),"#,##0.00"))
to this (add the highlighted text):
=Iif(Convert.ToString(Fields!LineType.Value)="Unshipped", "Unshipped",
Format(Max(Fields!GrossDisplayExtendedPrice.Value
+ Fields!TaxAmountAllocation),"#,##0.00"))
The updated expression adds the tax amount allocated to the line item to the extended
price for the line item.
To print the tax-inclusive subtotal for all items on the receipt, select the Expression field
for the Subtotal in the Totals band.
In the Control window, click the Textbox value for the
field and then click the ellipsis button to edit it.
Change the current expression for Gross Discount SubTotal from this:
=Format(Fields!GrossDiscSubTotal.Value,"#,##0.00")
to this (add the highlighted text):
=Format(Fields!GrossDiscSubTotal.Value +
Fields!TotalTax.Value,"#,##0.00")
The updated expression adds the total tax for all line items to the gross discount subtotal
for the ticket.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-131
07/04/17
Customize ticket-entry related reports to print tax-inclusive prices
Use Crystal Reports to customize any ticket-entry related report that prints item prices to
print tax-inclusive prices instead of or in addition to normal prices. The reports would
have to use data from the PS_DOC_LIN and/or PS_TKT_HIST_LIN tables.
New fields in those two tables include:
TAX_AMT_ALLOC
Portion of the overall tax amount allocated to the line,
proportionally based on without-tax sale price.
Reflects price overrides.
NORM_TAX_AMT_ALLOC
Portion of the overall normal tax amount allocated to
the line, proportionally based on without-tax sale
price. Reflects price before any changes.
Setting Up Point of Sale Data
6-132
07/04/17
SECTION 7: CUSTOMIZING DICTIONARIES
Overview of Customizing Dictionaries ........................................................ 1
Using the Data Dictionary Editor ................................................................ 2
Customizing the Data Dictionary ................................................................ 7
Exercise 1: Making a Field Required ......................................................................... 10
Exercise 2: Changing a Column Code Display Label ................................................ 14
Exercise 3: Using a Picture Mask .............................................................................. 19
Exercise 4: Creating an Index ................................................................................... 22
Printing the Column Description Report ................................................... 25
Using the Text Dictionary Editor ............................................................... 31
Overview of Customizing Dictionaries
Select Setup > System > Configuration > Data Dictionary
or Setup > System > Configuration > Text Dictionary


Use to make changes in definitions of:
 Counterpoint Tables, Columns, and Indexes
 Name of group box, tab, or button labels
 Messages
Data Dictionary
Text Dictionary
Text Dictionary
Use to add new logical tables or columns (after adding to database using SQL
statements)
Changes stored in Data Dictionary and Text Dictionary located in:
\ CounterPoint (top-level)\ Company-Name \ Configuration \ Dictionary
Columns.*
Tables.*
Indexes.*
Messages.*
Data Dictionary files
Text Dictionary files

To enter change, user's System security code must provide authorization to
customize data dictionary or text dictionary

Changes will apply to all users in this company throughout Counterpoint

Changes preserved if Counterpoint is re-installed

Enable or disable use of changes for a single user via Setup > System >
User Preferences (Enable customizations)
Customizing Dictionaries
7-1
06/05/15
Using the Data Dictionary Editor
Source of Menu names and Field names
These names
Are determined by:
Main menu selections & form names
Menu code (Menu caption , and
Form caption)
or
Default menu, if security code has
no menu code assigned
Columns on forms
Data dictionary (Display label)
Columns in LookUp, Filter, and Zoom dialogs
Data dictionary (Long label)
Columns on reports
Data dictionary (Report label)
Group Boxes, Tabs, & Buttons
Text dictionary
Message text
Text dictionary
Customizing Dictionaries
7-2
06/05/15
Using the Data Dictionary Editor
Select Setup > System > Configuration > Data Dictionary

Use to make changes to the system settings for a table, column, or index
Click
to change the system settings for a table
or
to change the system settings for a column
or
to change the system settings for an index
Select the table, column, or index to change here
Once you have made changes, click the
changes and update the cached data dictionary.
Customizing Dictionaries
7-3
Make your changes here
button. This will save your
06/05/15
Using the Data Dictionary Editor
You will need to determine the system name for a table, column/field, or index before it
can be changed in the Data Dictionary.
To reveal the Control Menu for a form:

Right-click form title bar

Click the Counterpoint logo in upper left corner

Press Alt+spacebar
Labels as FieldNames/
ControlNames
Shows data dictionary column name (begins with *) or control
name (no *), and main table name on title bar
Use to obtain column name to edit in Data Dictionary or control
name to edit in Text Dictionary
Labels as ControlNames
Changes all text labels on form to name of associated control
Used internally to develop help text for controls
Show default labels
Shows default display labels for columns
FormClass: (name)
Name of form to use when changing component labels in the
Text Dictionary, and to assist with reporting software flaws
Print form
Prints screenshot of active form
Default size
Returns form to its default size
Last Maintenance
Information
For the currently-displayed record, shows the user ID who last
changed the record and the date
Table Information
Shows table name, total number of records, and a count of
filtered records if filter is active (flyover text reveals SQL filter)
Customize toolbars
Customize toolbar schemes for this form
(Report name)
For report forms, shows name of .rpt file (* = customized)
Customizing Dictionaries
7-4
06/05/15
Using the Data Dictionary Editor
Determining System Data Dictionary Table, Field, and Index Names
Identifying the table name
Right-click the title bar of the form you
want to change and select Labels as
FieldNames/ControlNames.
The form now displays the System Data
Dictionary labels.
The table name is shown on the title bar.
In this example, AR_CUST is the system
name for the Customers table.
Identifying the column name
With the System Data Dictionary labels
displayed, the system name is shown
preceding the field.
In this example, *cust_no is the system name
for the Customer # field.
Note: Column properties can be changed for a single table or, if associated with a
Column Code, can be changed globally.
Customizing Dictionaries
7-5
06/05/15
Using the Data Dictionary Editor
Identifying the index name
Indexes/Order by choices are created in the Data Dictionary.
To find the name for an index, select the Table and then click the Index tab of the
System Data Dictionary form.
The Display label field contains the label for the index. This is the name that appears in
the "order by" list for a Lookup.
If the Display label field is blank, it instead shows the name of the first index column.
In this example, the "order by" list for the Customer table will show Balance method.
Customizing Dictionaries
7-6
06/05/15
Customizing the Data Dictionary
Editing Table Properties
Select the table to edit in the
System Data Dictionary.
The columns and indexes in
that table display below.
Click
to
enable editing of the table.
Make changes to table information on the Data Dictionary form.
Description = name for flyover
help and messages referring to
this table
Virtual = is this a virtual table?
Use virtual table = look in
virtual table selected here for
column information before this
physical table.
If enabled for company, retrieve
one record at a time from server?
Data Verify ignores
History tables
Use this area to enter your
own description of the table
or to describe your changes.
Click
to see the
virtual table definition.
After clicking either
or
, click
to return to where you came from.
Custom add-on-the-fly
Add-on-the-fly form = use customized add-on-the-fly form for this table.
Custom maint form
Custom view form
Custom add-on-the-fly form
Standard form
Customizing Dictionaries
.xml files that contains custom field positioning for use
when adding custom tables or custom columns to a
database
7-7
06/05/15
Customizing the Data Dictionary
Editing Column Properties for a Single Table

Use to control labels, entries, and defaults for a column
After choosing a table in the System Data Dictionary, select the column to edit from the list of
columns in that table and click
.
Main tab
Settings
Column code
Select to associate this column with an existing column code
Domain
Type of characters valid in value
Capitalization
Case of entered value: default, upper, lower, or normal
Key
Is this a component of the primary key for the table? (Do not modify)
Required
Value must be entered for this column when setting up a new record
Keyword
Enable keyword lookups for this column
Display label
Name that displays for this column on forms
Long label
Name that displays in Lookup, Filter, and Zoom dialogs
Report label
Name used in Quick Reports and for column heading in Crystal reports
Default value
Initial value for column when adding a new record
(Y for Boolean domain =checkbox selected)
Mapping
values
Allowable values for column and description for each value
Customizing Dictionaries
7-8
06/05/15
Customizing the Data Dictionary
Editing Column Properties for a Single Table
Main tab
Settings
Sticky default
Should user-entered value for this column be used as default value for rest
of entry session?
Default is set by adding a new record and saving it
Read-only
Allow no entry for this column (be sure to set a “default value”)
Protected
Protected change authorization required to change value
Non-editable
Can column value be changed after it has been added?
Skip
Skip this column when tabbing (can still access via mouse and/or
accelerator keys)
Intended to help speed data entry
Skip if def
Skip this column when tabbing only if the column has a default value
supplied by data dictionary or sticky default supplied by user
If column has no default value, Skip setting determines if tab skips column
Allow *
“*” can be entered for column, to designate “All”
Visible
Will column be displayed on forms and be available for display in lookups?
Cost
Treat column as a cost (entry and viewing subject to user authorization)
Copy
Is this column value copied when records are copied?
If unchecked, column in the copied record is set to the data dictionary
default value
Note: If a column does not appear in the Columns list, when a single table has been
selected, it has only been assigned a Column Code.
Customizing Dictionaries
7-9
06/05/15
Exercise 1: Making a Field Required
Try it Yourself!
This exercise demonstrates how to determine the table and column name to be
changed in the data dictionary and how to make the change to a single table. You will
be making the Category field required on the Items table.
1. Select Inventory > /Items. The change you will make is to the property of the
Category field on this form.
2. Right-click title bar and select Labels as FieldNames/ControlNames.
Note the table name and
field name.
Exit the menu selection.
3. Select Setup > System > Configuration/Data Dictionary
4. Display the IM_ITEM table and locate the column categ_cod.
Click
Customizing Dictionaries
.
7-10
06/05/15
5. On the Data Dictionary form, change the Required setting to Yes.
Select to save this change by clicking
.
---------------------------------------------END OF EXERCISE--------------------------------------------
Customizing Dictionaries
7-11
06/05/15
Customizing the Data Dictionary
Editing Column Properties for a Column Code




Use to control labels, entries, and defaults for a column code
Provide template values for a column
Used when column’s value is blank or null
Not associated with any single table
Choose Column Code in the System Data Dictionary, select the column code to edit
from the list of column codes and click
.
To see the tables
and columns that
use a column code
Note: If Column code is specified, its value is used as a default if setting is blank for
column.
Customizing Dictionaries
7-12
06/05/15
Customizing the Data Dictionary
Display Labels

Name for column on forms (first letter always displays upper-case)
What display label appears for a column on a form?
1. Display label from column in customized Data Dictionary
2. Display label from column in System Data Dictionary
3. Display label from column code, if a column code is specified
for column in customized Data Dictionary
4. Display label from column code in System Data Dictionary
Display label substitution
Enter %[column-code name] within Display label for substitution
For example: LST_RECV_DAT column in VT_IM_INV table
Display label shows last recv %[DATE]
Column code DATE is assigned to the column and its
display label is date.
Last recv date displays on forms.
Customizing Dictionaries
7-13
06/05/15
Exercise 2: Changing a Column Code Display Label
Try it Yourself!
This exercise demonstrates how to make a change to a column code. You will be
changing the display label for the Item No field, to Product No, for all tables that
include the column code.
1. Select Inventory/Items. The change you will make is to the display label of the
“Item No” field.
2. Right-click title bar and select Labels as FieldNames/ControlNames.
Note the field name.
3.
Select Setup > System > Configuration > Data Dictionary
4.
With Column Codes selected, locate the column item_no.
Click
Customizing Dictionaries
.
7-14
06/05/15
5. On the Data Dictionary form, change the Display label to Product No.
Select to save this change by clicking
.
---------------------------------------------END OF EXERCISE--------------------------------------------
Customizing Dictionaries
7-15
06/05/15
Customizing the Data Dictionary
Editing Column Properties
Other tab
Numeric
Settings in this group apply only to numeric columns
Min value
Minimum allowable value
Max value
Maximum allowable value
Decimals
Number of decimal digits to allow during entry
Implied decimal
When entering numbers, assume the number of decimals specified at
"Decimals", so no decimal point entry is required (based on user preference)
Range
Whether negative numbers, positive numbers, and/or zero are valid
Lookup
For custom fields, settings for lookup
Self lookup
Lookup table and column are the same as the physical table/column
Lookup table
What table’s data displays when a lookup is performed at this column
Lookup field
Which field in the lookup table is returned after selecting a record
Lookup filter
Limit valid records in lookup table with filter entered here
Validate lookup
Are not-on-file entries allowed for this column?
Lookup display
Which column’s value should display to the right of the on-file entry?
Customizing Dictionaries
7-16
06/05/15
Customizing the Data Dictionary
Editing Column Properties
Custom tab
Verify that constraint
syntax is valid
Validation
Constraint
User-maintained limits or restrictions for entry in this column
(See Appendix 2: Constructing Column Constraints)
Define only for columns on maintenance forms
Constraint error
Message that appears when entry violates constraint
If blank, uses default constraint error text: “[display label]: Data Dictionary
constraint error: [constraint value]” Variable
Description
%f
%t
%d
%v
"%f in %d table cannot contain %v"
Field name
Table name
Table description (e.g., "Item")
Field value
Validate on set
If enabled, validates constraint after column is entered, rather than when
record is saved
Picture mask
Used to control format and characters entered for a column (e.g., ######)
# = any digit (0-9)
Non-numeric columns only
? = any letter
(See Appendix 3: Using
Picture Masks)
&
~
@
!
= any letter, convert to uppercase
= any letter, convert to lowercase
= any character (alpha, numeric, special)
= any character, convert alpha to uppercase
{Yes, No} = yes, no, or blank (braces indicate ‘optional’)
#[#][#] = up to 3 digits; 2nd and 3rd digits optional
Customizing Dictionaries
7-17
06/05/15
Customizing the Data Dictionary
Entering Constraints

To impose user-defined limits or restrictions on entry of a column
Examples:
1) You want to use one of the customer date profiles to track Contract date started.
To prevent users from entering a future date, add this constraint to the
corresponding Profile Data column (PROF_DAT) for the Customers table
(AR_CUST):
V<=DATE
2) Use one of the customer numeric profiles to track Length of contract, where your
contracts must be at least 2 months long and cannot be longer than 12 months.
Add this constraint to the corresponding Numeric Profile column (PROF_NO) for the
Customers table (AR_CUST):
(V>1) and (V<13)
3) To ensure that users assign “900” as the first three characters of new item numbers,
add this constraint to the Item number column (ITEM_NO) for the Items table
(IM_ITEM):
Copy(V,1,3)=900
Refer to Appendix 2: Constructing Column Constraints for more information on
the syntax and different types of constraints.
Customizing Dictionaries
7-18
06/05/15
Exercise 3: Using a Picture Mask
Try it Yourself!
This exercise demonstrates how to determine the table and column name to be
changed in the data dictionary, how to make the change to a column code, and shows
the resulting change to forms that use the column code. You will be setting it up to
require telephone numbers to carry the format of 123-456-7890.
1. Select Customers > Customers. The change you will make is to the display label
of the “Phone-1” field on this form.
2. Right-click title bar and select Labels as FieldNames/ControlNames.
Note the table name and
column name.
Exit the menu selection.
3. Select Setup > System > Configuration > Data Dictionary
4. Display the AR_CUST table and locate the column PHONE_1.
Notice that it uses a
Column Code.
To make this format
change global, you
should change the
column code.
Customizing Dictionaries
7-19
06/05/15
5. Switch to display Column Codes. Click PHONE_1 in the list of column codes.
Notice that Display label is set to phone 1. Whenever a column displays on a form,
and that column uses the PHONE_1 column code, the display label of phone 1 is
used.
6. Click
and, on the Custom tab, enter the following
Picture mask for this column code:
###-###-####
Close the Data Dictionary editor and answer Yes to Save current changes?
7. Select Customers > Customers and display a customer record.
On the Main tab, at the Phone 1 column, clear any existing entry and enter your
telephone number beginning with the area code. Note that hyphens are
automatically inserted and displayed.
Click
to save the change.
Close this form.
Customizing Dictionaries
7-20
06/05/15
Customizing the Data Dictionary
Adding and Editing Table Indexes
Use to change:
 sequence in which records display with
and
 order in which records appear during lookups (“Order by”)
 adds logical index (create physical index with SQL command)
Add a new index:
If the table has not been
customized previously,
select to customize it
from the System Data
Dictionary.
From the Data Dictionary,
select the table and click
under “Indexes”.
Enter a name for the new
index.
Label used as index name
in lookups. If blank, uses
name of first index column
From the Index tab,
double-click columns in
Table columns to add
them to Index columns.
Add the columns in the
order in which you want
them used in the index, or
move the Index columns to
change their order.
Make default index for table
Specify whether to sort
each index column in
ascending or descending
order.
You can set the new index
to be the default index.
You can also enter a
display label to name the
index.
To save the new index, select a different column name or table, click
the form and answer “Yes” to Save current changes?.
Customizing Dictionaries
7-21
or close
06/05/15
Exercise 4: Creating an Index
Try it Yourself!
This exercise demonstrates how to create an index for the vendor items table. You
would like to view your vendor item records in order by item number and then in order
by unit cost.
1. Select Purchasing > Vendor Items.
2. Right-click title bar and select Labels as FieldNames/ControlNames.
Note the table name.
Exit the menu selection.
3. Select Setup > System > Configuration > Data Dictionary
4. Display the PO_VEND_ITEM table and click
Customizing Dictionaries
7-22
.
06/05/15
5. On the Data Dictionary form, select
from the Indexes area.
Enter a name for the new index. Click OK.
6. On the Index tab of the Data Dictionary form, enter a Display label for the new index
and select the columns that will be used to order the records. Since you want the
initial sort to be by Item number it should be the top index column, unit cost should
be listed second since it is the secondary sort value.
7. Select to save the new index by clicking
Customizing Dictionaries
7-23
.
06/05/15
8. Select Purchasing > Vendor Items. Use the lookup and select the new index.
9. Use the column designer to include the Unit cost field after Item number.
10. The lookup now displays the vendor item records in order by item number and within
each item number in order by unit cost.
---------------------------------------------END OF EXERCISE-------------------------------------------Customizing Dictionaries
7-24
06/05/15
Printing the Column Description Report
Select System > Utilities > Column Description Report

Description of each column in a table and the Data Dictionary settings
If the list of tables doesn't
display, select View > Show
Table List from the menu bar.
Select the table(s) whose
columns will be included
in the report.
Click
done.
when
Customizing Dictionaries
7-25
06/05/15
Printing the Column Description Report
Click Report options
button
Move the desired columns
from Column list to
Selected columns.
Drag Selected columns to
new positions or use
and
(columns are reported in
order listed).
Customizing Dictionaries
7-26
06/05/15
Printing the Column Description Report
Report tab
Table options
Show description
Show description note
Word wrap description note
Print the English name for this table (e.g., Items)
Print note for this table (from data dictionary)
If printing notes, wrap lines longer than 80 characters?
Column options
Show column description
Word wrap description
Customizing Dictionaries
Print note for columns (from data dictionary)
If printing notes, wrap lines longer than 80 characters?
7-27
06/05/15
Printing the Column Description Report
Column List Choices

Select which column properties you want reported
Allow asterick
Capitalization
Cloneable
Column code
Column size
Constraint error
Custom constraint
Decimal places
Default value
Display label
Domain name
Implied decimal
Is cost
Is key
Is keyword
Is noneditable
Is protected
Is required
Is visible
Long label
Lookup display field
Lookup field
Lookup table
Lookup validated
Mapping values
Max value
Min value
Picture mask
Range negative
Range positive
Range zero
Read only
Report label
Selflookup
Skip
Skip if def
Sticky def
Validate on set
Customizing Dictionaries
7-28
06/05/15
Printing the Column Description Report
Formats tab

Choose report format 1 or 2

Click
to close Report options dialog
Format 1 – Columnar format
Indicate whether to sort
columns alphabetically
Format 2 – Line-by-line format
Customizing Dictionaries
7-29
06/05/15
Click
or press Ctrl+G to
generate the report
Click
to save the report as a text file (use to copy data
from table in Counterpoint to text file)
Click
to find a word or phrase in the report
Click
to access printing options and print the report
Customizing Dictionaries
7-30
06/05/15
Using the Text Dictionary Editor
Select Setup > System > Configuration > Text Dictionary

Use to edit message text, tab labels, group box labels on forms, or other text on
forms that is not linked to a data field
Select message to
customize
(To find the name of a
message, right-click
title bar of actual
message dialog and
select Details.)
Current message text
Click
to customize the
message text.
New message text
Color
Select color in which to display text
Bold
Italic
Strikeout
Underline
Select if message should display with any of these enhancements
Text
New message text
Customizing Dictionaries
7-31
06/05/15
Using the Text Dictionary Editor

Use to change the global suppression of messages
Messages can be:
 Suppressed
 Suppressable
 Non-suppressable
To change the suppression setting for a message, click
suppression value for the message.
Suppressed
and then set the new
The message does not display for all users.
Suppressable
Authorized users can
select the “Do not
show again” check
box to suppress the
message.
Non-suppressable
The message
displays for all users.
NOTE: Enable Show suppressed messages in User Preferences to make a suppressed
message redisplay for a user who has suppressed it.
Customizing Dictionaries
7-32
06/05/15
Using the Text Dictionary Editor
Changing Tab, Group Box, and Button Labels
Button label
Tab label
Group Box
label
Step 1.
2.
Run the menu selection that displays the current label (e.g., Main tab in
Setup > System > Company).
Right-click the title bar to display the Control Menu.
Record the name of the FormClass (TfrmCompany for the Company
form). This will be used when you edit the Text Dictionary.
Customizing Dictionaries
7-33
06/05/15
3.
Select Labels as
ControlNames from the
Control Menu and the
form labels change.
Record the control name
that displays for the
current label (e.g.,
tabMain).
This will also be used for
your entry in the Text
Dictionary.
4.
Select Setup > System > Configuration
> Text Dictionary and switch to the
Components form.
5.
Click
to create a new entry.
Apply changes
Save changes
Text ID
Enter the FormClass name and ControlName of the label that
you want to change, using the format
FormClass.ControlName (e.g., TFRMCOMPANY.TABMAIN)
Text
Enter the new text that you want to use as a label
Customizing Dictionaries
7-34
06/05/15
6. Click
to save the change.
7. When you restart Setup > System > Company, the tab label will be ACCT
instead of Main.
You could change the Group Box or Button label using the same method.
Customizing Dictionaries
7-35
06/05/15
Customizing Dictionaries
7-36
06/05/15
SECTION 8: DATABASE UTILITIES
Data Verify ................................................................................................. 1
Database Customizations Report ............................................................... 3
Exporting Database Tables ........................................................................ 5
Importing Database Tables ........................................................................ 6
Importing Data Using Data Interchange ..................................................... 8
Exporting Data Using Data Interchange ..................................................... 9
Migrating Data .......................................................................................... 10
Encrypting Credit Card Numbers .............................................................. 11
Purging Messages.................................................................................... 12
Working with Saved Report Parameters ................................................... 13
Working with Saved Import/Export Parameters ........................................ 14
Testing Ticket Entry Performance ............................................................ 15
Using the System Configuration Utility ..................................................... 17
Using the NCR Counterpoint Management Console ................................ 18
Adding a Maintenance Window ................................................................ 23
Aggregating Data ..................................................................................... 24
Backing Up a Database ............................................................................ 25
Moving a Database .................................................................................. 26
Shrinking the Database ............................................................................ 30
Using the Crystal Reports Viewer ............................................................. 31
Creating a Practice Company................................................................... 33
Translating Counterpoint Text .................................................................. 36
Data Verify
Select System > Utilities > Data Verify
 Use to verify integrity of data
Select the tables to
verify
Show results after
verifying this table
Total number of
records in selected
tables
Verify only this table
Type of test (see
below)
Start the
verify process
Display which tables in
window above?
Tests to run
Dictionary
Lookups
Dictionary: Verifies required fields, mapping values,
constraints, and other data dictionary rules
Lookups: For non-history tables, verifies that values exist in
associated table (e.g., item category is in Categories table)
Table Results
Displays summary information of last verify for selected table:
table name, number of records, number of errors
Click
Last Verify Table Results
Database Utilities
for details on last verify
Displays summary information of last verify for all involved
tables: number of involved tables, number of records in tables,
number of errors
Click
to see the summary log from verifying all
involved tables
8-1
06/04/15
Data Verify
Contents of the Details file
Overview
Dictionary
test results
Lookup
test results
Summary
Database Utilities
8-2
06/04/15
Database Customizations Report
Select System > Utilities > Database Customizations Report
 Use to identify customization in your database, as well as standard parts missing
from your database
Select which objects to include
Standard database
Use the current version's database (compares to Multi-Site standard
if Multi-Site Option is registered)
Another version
Use a previous version's database
Useful to determine data model changes between versions
Specific database
Use specified database, defining a data source for it
Useful to determine differences between two databases
Database Utilities
8-3
06/04/15
Database Customizations Report
Results display in Windows Internet Explorer
Database Utilities
8-4
06/04/15
Exporting Database Tables
Select System > Utilities > Database Export
 Use to copy data from table in Counterpoint to text file
Select the table whose
records are to be
exported.
Exports file
The records in the
selected table are
shown here.
Drag columns to change order in which they are exported.
Filename
Name of export file. Defaults to “table_name.csv”
Click
to select location where file will be created
Defaults to Export folder for company
Use SQL Query
or
Select checkbox and click
to enter an SQL query to
select the records and columns to be exported
Export visible columns using a filter to control which records (“rows”)
will be exported
Output Options:
Quote char
Field delimiter
Quote mode
Date format
Header line
Database Utilities
Character to delimit strings
Character to separate column values
Put quote character around alphanumeric values: Always or
NonNumeric (as column is defined in data dictionary)
Format of date fields
First line is a header, showing column names
8-5
06/04/15
Importing Database Tables
Select System > Utilities > Database Import
 Use to load data from a text file into a table in Counterpoint
Select the table whose
records are to be imported.
The records already in that
table are listed here.
Import data from
file specified
Verify data to be imported
Filename
Name of import file
Click
to select folder where file is located
Defaults to Import folder for company
Use header line field
format
First record in import file is a header, so don’t import it
Field Definitions
If not using header, click
to select Counterpoint
columns to be filled or updated with import data
If column names in header match Counterpoint column names,
imports data into corresponding Counterpoint column regardless of
import file layout
Place the Counterpoint columns in the order in which the
corresponding fields occur in a record in the import file
Advanced
(Described in detail on the following page)
Import mode
Add new
Update
Update mode
Add new records only*
Update existing records
Replace records*: replace entire record with import record
or Update records: update record only with fields in import record
* Defaults from data dictionary are used for missing values.
For Update/Replace, won’t import record if any required fields are missing
Database Utilities
8-6
06/04/15
Importing Database Tables
Advanced Import Options
Escaped Conversions:
Convert \n to New Line
Convert \r to Carriage Return
Convert \t to Tab
Convert \\ to \
Convert \’ to ‘
Convert \” to “
Convert \? to?
Convert \0 to Null
When importing data produced by Unix systems or certain
scripting languages (e.g., Perl and Awk), certain values may be
expressed as escaped characters
These values typically start with \ (the Unix equivalent of Esc)
Should each of the escaped-character sequences shown be
converted into the corresponding value during the import?
Text Input Options
Quote character
Field delimiter
Comment character
Character in import file used to denote text fields
Character in import file used to separate field values
Character in import file used to denotes remarks
Characters following the comment character are not imported
Input Format
Date format
Date separator
Time separator
Decimal separator
Maximum rows
Maximum field length
Format of dates in the import file
Character to format dates (e.g., / or ,)
Character used to format times (e.g., :, ., or ;)
Character used to separate integers from decimals (e.g., . or ,)
Import only this many records (useful for import testing)
Import only this many characters per column. Truncates if longer
Error Handling
Log file
Max errors
Database Utilities
Name and location of import error log (shows line# & field#)
Stop import if this many errors occur
8-7
06/04/15
Importing Data Using Data Interchange
Select Data Interchange > Database Import
 Provides an enhanced version of Database Import
 Allows you to import data from a .csv file format
 Simplifies the process of mapping fields and configuring various import settings,
which can be saved for future use
Database Utilities
8-8
06/04/15
Exporting Data Using Data Interchange
Select Data Interchange > Database Export
 Provides an enhanced version of Database Export
 Allows you to export data to a .csv file format
 Simplifies the process of mapping fields and configuring various export settings,
which can be saved for future use
Database Utilities
8-9
06/04/15
Migrating Data
Select System > Utilities > Data Migration
 Use this function to upgrade data from Counterpoint V7 or other third-party
software product into NCR Counterpoint
For more information about this process read Data Migration Guide in the Online Help.
Database Utilities
8-10
06/04/15
Encrypting Credit Card Numbers
Select System > Utilities > Encrypt Credit Card Numbers
 Use this function to encrypt credit card numbers in tables
Select the table to check for credit card
numbers, then click
to find tables
that have unencrypted card numbers.
Tables with unencrypted card numbers remain
selected after the check process.
In this example, there are no unencrypted card
numbers.
If there are tables with unencrypted card
numbers, click
card numbers.
to encrypt the credit
PCI Alert!
Data Transport Encryption


Counterpoint uses an encryption algorithm with 128-bit encryption
strength to protect cardholder data.
For additional protection, you should implement security protocols
such as secure sockets layer (SSL) / transport layer security (TLS)
and Internet protocol security (IPSEC) to safeguard sensitive
cardholder data during transmission over open, public networks.
Database Utilities
8-11
06/04/15
Purging Messages
Select System > Utilities > Purge Messages
 Use this function to purge messages from NCR Counterpoint
Database Utilities
8-12
06/04/15
Working with Saved Report Parameters
Select System > Utilities > Saved Report Parameters
 Use this function to work with (add, edit, delete) all saved parameters for reports
 Limited changes are allowed
 Click
Database Utilities
to generate the report
8-13
06/04/15
Working with Saved Import/Export Parameters
Select System > Utilities > Saved Import > Export Parameters
 Use this function to work with (add, edit, delete) all saved parameters for these
import/export functions
-
Database Import
Database Export
Inventory Adjustments Import
Receivings Import
Transfer out Import
Transfer in Import
Limited changes are allowed
Database Utilities
8-14
06/04/15
Testing Ticket Entry Performance
Select System > Utilities > Ticket Performance Test
 Use this function to test timing of entering and posting tickets
 Track how environment changes, customizations, and different setup options
affect Ticket Entry performance on your system
NOTE: Testing should not be performed on live systems because real tickets are
created and then posted.
Parameters tab
Enter the parameters
for the test.
Specify the
number of
items to add
NOTE: Items you add to the item list must have a Tracking method of Normal.
Click
to perform the test.
Database Utilities
8-15
06/04/15
Testing Ticket Entry Performance
Current Results tab
Displays the results and details of the test.
Last Results tab
Compare the Current Results to the previous
test.
Chart tab
Displays a line graph that maps the results of all
tests that have been run.
Red line = average line item creation time
Green line = average ticket completion time
Blue line = average ticket posting time
Space Used Chart tab
Displays a line graph that maps the results all
tests that have been run.
Database Utilities
8-16
06/04/15
Using the System Configuration Utility
Browse to Start > Programs > CounterPoint SQL > Utilities > System
Configuration Utility
 Designed to serve as a launching point for various Counterpoint utilities,
collecting them into a single “dock” window
The System Configuration Utility includes:
The Companies button, which allows you to access the
Company Names utility.
and
the Scheduled Tasks button, which allows you to
schedule Automated Data Transfer (ADT) for NCR
CP Online, History Conversion, Purge Messages,
Post Tickets, or Settle Credit Cards.
Select the task and enter the parameters for running
the task.
Provide Windows login values to authorize running
the task.
PCI Alert!
You must create a separate NCR Counterpoint user ID for use with the Post Tickets and
Settle Credit Cards tasks and restrict that user ID from accessing cardholder data.
Database Utilities
8-17
06/04/15
Using the NCR Counterpoint Management Console
Browse to Start > Programs > NCR Counterpoint > Utilities >
Management Console




Manage server relationships
Initiate top-level directory synchronization
Configure e-mail capabilities
Aggregate data used by the Dashboard, forecasting, and certain reports
Click
to connect to a NCR Counterpoint server. The Service Connection
window appears. The Service URI field is populated with the suggested server URI for
your system . If the server displayed is not the server you wish to connect to,click
to manually enter a different server connection.
Database Utilities
8-18
06/04/15
Using the NCR Counterpoint Management Console
After you have entered your server connection
information, click
.
You will then be prompted to login into the
Management Console.
Select the company to log into, and then enter
the User ID and password of a Counterpoint
user for that company who is authorized for
system administration. Then click Login.
The NCR Counterpoint Management Console window opens.
Database Utilities
8-19
06/04/15
Using the NCR Counterpoint Management Console
Click the server name to see information about the server.
Summary tab – shows a summary of information about the selected server, including
the server’s Machine Name, the shared Top-level directory on the server, the
Counterpoint software version and CP Services URL.
Communication Status tab – lists each server and workstation at the selected site and
indicates each system’s connection status, the date and time of the last CP Services
event for each system, the number of packages sent to and received from each system,
and the number or errors that occurred during the last CP Services event.
Mail tab – allows you to define e-mail settings to enable Counterpoint users to send
receipts, reports, and customer statements via e-mail.
Database Utilities
8-20
06/04/15
Using the NCR Counterpoint Management Console
Click
next to a Company name or access store or station information, as well as
database maintenance schedules and data aggregation tasks.
Workstations tab – shows the Point of Sale stations that have been created for the
stores that the selected server manages, along with the workstations that are assigned
to them by default, sorted by Workgroup.
Db Maintenance tab – allows you to specify a daily maintenance schedule for the
selected Counterpoint database.
Data Aggregation tab – allows you to schedule Counterpoint’s various data
aggregation tasks, which summarize the necessary sales history data for the
Dashboard, forecast data for the forecast-driven replenishment, and transaction log
data for the Point of Sale Exceptions report.
Database Utilities
8-21
06/04/15
Using the NCR Counterpoint Management Console
Click a store to view information
about the store.
Summary tab – for a store with offline ticket entry workstations, allows you to initiate an
incremental extract, a full extract or a total rebuild of all of the offline ticket entry
workstations' databases for the store.
Checksums tab – use to compare checksum values received from an offline ticket
entry workstation to those computed by the store, based on what the store received on
the site server.
Click a workstation to view
information about the workstation.
Summary tab – for an offline ticket entry workstation, provides access to on-demand
file and data synchronization functions.
Communication Detail tab – for an offline ticket entry workstation, shows packages
sent from and received by workstation, as well as type of package and status
Database Utilities
8-22
06/04/15
Adding a Maintenance Window
From the NCR Counterpoint Management Console, select the Company in the Object
Explorer and then click the Db Maintenance tab.
Click
.
Select the Day, Start Time, and
End Time for the maintenance window and
then click
.
During each specified time period, CP Services will suspend all operations, allowing
you to perform any SQL Server maintenance functions that require complete access to
your server database.
Database Utilities
8-23
06/04/15
Aggregating Data
From the NCR Counterpoint Management Console, select the Company in the Object
Explorer and then click the Data Aggregation tab.
Data Aggregation is automatically enabled for a company. It collects data from various history
tables into Data Aggregation tables so that the resulting data can be used for Dashboard
functions, Forecast-driven replenishment, and the POS transaction log.
By default, each data aggregation task runs for only 15 minutes which may not be long enough
to aggregate a large amount of history data.
Follow these steps to allow aggregation to run for longer than 15 minutes.
1. Open the AggSumarization.xml file in the \Bin subdirectory of your Counterpoint
installation directory (e.g., C:\Program Files (x86)\Radiant Systems\Counterpoint\
CPSQL.1\Bin).
2. Find the following entry in the <parameters> section:
<param name="AggRuntimeMinutes" value="15"/>
Change the parameter value to the number of minutes you want the aggregation
tasks to run each time they are scheduled. For example, to allow the aggregation
tasks to run for an hour, change the value to "60" (as indicated below).
<param name="AggRuntimeMinutes" value="60"/>
Set the value so that it is less than the time specified for "Set interval".
3. Save the changes and restart CPServices.
Database Utilities
8-24
06/04/15
Backing Up a Database
Backing up your database provides an important safeguard for protecting
your data from potential loss including: media failure, user error, and loss of
server.
A backup copy of your database can also be used when moving your
database to a new system.
If you have customized the Data Dictionary, Text Dictionary, Filters, Lookups, Zooms,
PSForms, Reports, added images, or added other custom files, copy the corresponding
custom files to the new system. They will be located in sub-folders under C:\Program
Files (x86)\Radiant Systems\CounterPoint\CPSQL.1\TopLevel\<Company Name>\
Configuration.
Create a backup of your database
Start SQL Server Management
Studio.
After connecting to the server,
right-click the database you want to
backup, select Tasks, and then
Backup.
Complete the General page with the
parameters for the backup, and then
click OK.
The backup file will be created in the
Destination location that you specify.
Database Utilities
8-25
06/04/15
Moving a Database
There are occasions when you will have to move a company database from
one computer to a different one.
If you selected to use the default location when initially creating the database, the
database .mdf and .ldf files will be located in Program Files (or Program Files(X86) >
Microsoft SQL Server > MSSQL10_50.MSSQLSERVER > Data on the current
system. Copy the two database files to the same location on the new system.
Note: Do not copy the Counterpoint system database (CPSystem_CPSQLxxx).
If you have customized the Data Dictionary, Text Dictionary, Reports, or added
customer or item images, also copy the Company\Configuration folder to the new
system.
WARNING: Do not follow these directions if your database is part of a Data Xtend
replication network. Instead, refer to the instructions provided in the Counterpoint MultiSite training manual for moving a replicating database. If you have Offline Ticket Entry
workstations, you will also need to reregister them with the new server. Refer to the
Offline Ticket Entry training manual for instructions on reregistering an offline
workstation.
Perform these steps to move a database to a different system:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Detach database from current SQL server.
Copy database files to new system.
Attach database to SQL server on new system.
Set connection string to the database.
Update DB_CTL table for new location.
Step 1 can be accomplished using SQL Server Management Studio. Right-click the
database name, select Tasks and then select Detach.
Step 2 - Navigate to the Data folder that contains the database and copy the .mdf and
.ldf files for the database.
Step 3 - A database must be "attached" to
the SQL server in order for the server
to recognize it and before you can set a
connection string to it. In SQL Server
Management Studio, right-click Databases
and select Attach.
Database Utilities
8-26
06/04/15
From the Attach Databases
dialog, click
.
Locate the database to attach and click
.
The details for the attached database
appear in the Attach Databases dialog.
Click
.
Database Utilities
8-27
06/04/15
The attached database now appears in the
Databases list.
Step 4 - On the server on the new system, run the SQL Script Utility (from Start/All
Programs/NCR Counterpoint/Utilities) and start the Companies Editor.
If an entry does not already exist for the new database, add a new company.
(Refer to the instructions provided for setting the connection string after
creating a new database, in Section 1 of this manual.) If an entry is already
present for the new database, verify that the server name and database are
accurate.
Step 5 - The first time the database was used in Counterpoint on the old system,
the top-level Counterpoint directory name was written to the DB_CTL table in
the database.
If the database is later moved to a different location or drive, the value in the
DB_CTL table is not automatically updated. Instead, it must be changed using
an SQL command. Failure to do this will result in the message "Top-level
directory does not match database" when attempting to access this
database.
Use the SQL Script Utility to enter and execute the following command for the
involved database. This clears the directory value so that the next time the
database is used in Counterpoint, the new top-level directory name will be
written to the DB_CTL table:
UPDATE DB_CTL SET SHARED_DIR = NULL
Database Utilities
8-28
06/04/15
If restoring the database after creating a backup using SQL Server Management
Studio:
Step 3 - Restore the database to a new (created on the fly) database with new physical
files. Right-click Databases and select Restore database… Complete the
General and Options area of the dialog with the parameters for the restore
process and then click OK.
Step 4 - Add a Counterpoint connection string for the new database, using the
Companies Editor in the SQL Script Utility.
Step 5 - Update the DB_CTL table
Database Utilities
8-29
06/04/15
Shrinking the Database
 Use this function to reduce the size of the database. Purging does not shrink the
database size.
Note: Only shrink a database when it has grown for reasons other than normal use.
Shrinking a database can cause index fragmentation that can negatively impact
performance.
Using SQL Server Management Studio
Select Start > All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server > SQL Server Management
Studio. After connecting to the server, right-click the database you want to shrink.
Select Tasks, then Shrink, and then Database. When the dialog appears, enter the
parameters to use and select the percentage of free space to allow.
You can also set up a maintenance plan to schedule database shrinking at designated
frequencies.
Database Utilities
8-30
06/04/15
Using the Crystal Reports Viewer
Browse to C:\Program Files (or Program Files(x86)\Radiant Systems\
CounterPoint\CPSQL.1\Bin\CRView.exe
 Use to view and print Counterpoint reports outside of Counterpoint
 Can export report contents to several different formats
Select the report to view
For each report viewed on a
workstation, set the default data
source.
To set the data source once for all
reports, create CRView.ini with the entry DefaultDataSource=<Name>.
Put CRView.ini in the same folder as CRView.exe.
.
Note: To avoid 'raw' column headings (such as shown below) when viewing
standard Counterpoint reports, first preview the report in Counterpoint, export it
to a Crystal Report file, and then open the exported file using CRView.exe.
Database Utilities
8-31
06/04/15
Using the Crystal Reports Viewer
Exporting a Report
Supported formats:
- Word (.doc)
- Excel (.xls)
- HTML (.htm)
- XML (.xml)
- Rich Text Format (.rtf)
- Portable Doc Format (.pdf)
- Comma Separated Value (.csv)
- Text (.txt)
- Crystal Reports (.rpt)
Running the Viewer from a Command Line
where ReportFilename is the path
and file name of the report. Enclose
in quotes if filename contains spaces.
CRView.exe "ReportFilename"
Printing to the Default Windows Printer from a Command Line
CRView.exe "ReportFilename" print
Exporting from a Command Line
CRView.exe "ReportFilename" ExportFilename.ext
Database Utilities
8-32
See Supported Formats
and extensions above.
06/04/15
Creating a Practice Company
Browse to Start > All Programs > NCR Counterpoint > Utilities >
Update Practice Company
 Can only be run on a server
 Use to create a “practice” database that’s a copy of the live company data
 Run when no one is using the database that you want to copy
Select the location of your SQL Server
from the SQL Server dialog.
Enter SQL User Information.
Confirm the path to your SQL Server files.
Database Utilities
8-33
06/04/15
After reading the Welcome dialog,
click Next to continue.
Select the live database you want to
copy for the practice database.
Click Next from the Start Update
window to continue creating the
practice company.
Click Finish to complete the process.
Database Utilities
8-34
06/04/15
After creating the practice company, you can log in to that company.
 Database name is automatically named CPPractice
 Company name is set to NCR Counterpoint Practice Company
 All title bars and reports show "**Practice**"
 Accounting Interface is disabled – set to "None"
 Credit cards (CPGateway): Operating Mode field is set to "Simulate" for all
CPGateway stores
Note: After updating the Practice company, be sure to use Setup>Point of
Sale>Stores to change the Payment gateway field to "CP Gateway" for
any store set up to use NCR Secure Pay. This will avoid creating any
credit card transactions while processing tickets in the Practice company.
Database Utilities
8-35
06/04/15
Translating Counterpoint Text
Text labels in Counterpoint can be translated into other languages. This includes:
- field and button labels
- window titles
- menu selection names
- report titles
- report column labels
- messages
- touchscreen codes
- and more.
Areas that cannot be translated include:
- Work center
- Device Management
- RDLC form editor
- Other Counterpoint utilities
- Online help
Performing translation
You must be using Counterpoint V8.5 or later to perform translation. The process
of translation involves the following steps:
Step 1 Install the translation components.
Step 2 Create portable object (.po) files.
Step 3 Provide the portable object files to a service or translation tool that will
update the file contents to reflect your selected language
Step 4 Compile the translated portal object files into machine object files for
use in Counterpoint.
Step 5 Modify the NCR Counterpoint shortcut to use the machine object files.
Step 1.
Install the translation components
1.
Browse to the \Bin directory of your Counterpoint installation directory (e.g.,
C:\Program Files (x86)\Radiant Systems\Counterpoint\CPSQL.1\Bin) and
double-click dxgettext-1.2.2.exe to start the installer.
2.
On the Welcome window, click Next.
3.
On the Select Destination Location window, click Next to accept the default
installation directory.
4.
On the Select Start Menu Folder window, enable Don't create a Start Menu
folder, and then click Next.
Database Utilities
8-36
06/04/15
Step 2.
5.
On the Select Additional Tasks window, enable Integrate into desktop
environment and Modify path (required to make it work). Do not enable
Create icon on desktop. Then click Next.
6.
Click Next on the Ready to Install window to begin the installation.
7.
When the installation completes, a message appears, indicating that the
necessary applications have been installed. Click OK to close the message.
8.
On the Completing the GNU Gettext for Delphi and C++ Builder Setup Wizard
window, select Yes, restart the computer now and click Finish to restart your
computer.
Create portable object (.po) files
1.
Click the Start button and type cmd in the search field.
2.
Right-click cmd.exe and click Run as Administrator to open a command
prompt.
3.
Browse to your company directory in your Counterpoint installation directory
(e.g., C:\Program Files (x86)\Radiant Systems\Counterpoint\CPSQL.1\
TopLevel<CompanyName>) and type the following command:
..\..\bin\updateallpo.bat "%cd%"
This command creates the following .po files in the \Toplevel\System\
Dictionary\Locale directory of your Counterpoint installation directory:






Columns.po
default.po
Indexes.po
Messages.po
reports.po
Tables.po
Any previous customizations that you may have made using the Data Dictionary,
Text Dictionary, Menu Editor, or Toolbar Editor are included in the .po files.
Step 3.
Provide the portable object files to a service or translation tool that will
update the file contents to reflect your selected language
Step 4.
Compile the translated portal object files into machine object files for
use in Counterpoint.
1.
Browse to the \Toplevel\System\Dictionary\Locale directory of your
Counterpoint installation directory.
If you have multiple companies and the translation files pertain to only a
specific company, instead browse to the \Toplevel\<CompanyName>\
Configuration\Dictionary directory. Create a new directory named Locale.
2.
Below the Locale directory, create a new language directory for the translated
files. For example, you might create a \fr directory for French, a \sp directory
for Spanish, etc.
Below the language directory, create another new directory named
lc_messages (e.g., \fr\lc_messages).
Database Utilities
8-37
06/04/15
3.
Copy the translated .po files into the lc_messages directory.
4.
Right-click the first .po file (e.g., Columns.po) and select Compile to mo file.
This will create a corresponding .mo file (Columns.mo) in the directory.
Repeat this step for each .po file.
Step 5.
Modify the NCR Counterpoint shortcut to use the machine object files.
This step is what tells Counterpoint to use the translated files.
1.
Right-click the NCR Counterpoint shortcut in the Start > Programs > NCR
Counterpoint program group and select Properties.
2.
On the Shortcut tab, add /locale [dir] to the end of the command in the Target
field, following the quotation mark. Substitute the language directory for [dir].
For example, if your translated files are in the \fr\lc_messages directory, you
would add /locale fr to the Target line.
3.
Click OK to save the change.
When you next start Counterpoint using this shortcut, the translated text appears
throughout the software.
If you have compiled multiple .mo files for different languages, you can create
different shortcuts to point to the translation files for each language.
Database Utilities
8-38
06/04/15
Course Evaluation
Course Name
Training Date
Trainer
Your Name (optional)
Ranking
Please use the following rankings to complete this evaluation:
1 = Unacceptable, 2 = Did Not Meet My Needs, 3 = Meets My Needs, 4 = Exceeded My Expectations
Registration
1.
It was easy to enroll in this course.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Facilities
2.
The workspace available was appropriate for the subject matter being taught.
3. The room was set up effectively for the curriculum – if PC’s were supplied, they were loaded
with the relevant software.
Materials
4.
Manual content was appropriate to the subject being taught.
1
2
3
4
5.
The format of the manual was easy to understand.
1
2
3
4
Experience
6.
The course prerequisites were clearly stated & appropriate to the topic.
1
2
3
4
7.
The practice activities complemented the course.
1
2
3
4
8.
The time allotted for the course was adequate.
1
2
3
4
9.
I was given an opportunity to contribute during discussions.
1
2
3
4
10. What were your expectations for attending this course?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
11. Were your expectations met?
Yes
No
If yes, how were they met?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
If no, why not?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Instructor
12. The instructor was prepared.
1
2
3
4
13. The instructor was knowledgeable about the course content.
1
2
3
4
14. The instructor encouraged questions from participants.
1
2
3
4
15. The instructor covered the course objectives.
1
2
3
4
16. What is your overall rating of this Instructor?
1
2
3
4
Comments
17. The best thing about this course was:
______________________________________________________________________________________
18. This course could be improved by:
_______________________________________________________________________________________
19. Another course that I would like offered is:
_______________________________________________________________________________________
20. I would attend another course offered by Retail Training?
Yes
No
If yes, why?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
If no, why not?
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Thank you for completing this evaluation!
Appendix 1: Account Numbers Worksheet
When setting up your data in Counterpoint, you are asked to specify account
numbers that will be used for updating distributions when various transactions are
posted. In general, you should define at least one account number for each of the
activities shown here. Consider these accounts the "Chart of Accounts" for
Counterpoint.
Use Setup > System > Accounts to define the account numbers so that they are
on file when you are asked to specify account numbers in other setup functions.
Petty Cash
__________________ Finance charges
_________________
Cash in bank
__________________ Freight charges
_________________
Credit card deposits
__________________ Cost of goods sold /returned _________________
Accounts Receivable
__________________ Purchase discounts
Inventory - merchandise __________________ Purchasing tax accrual
__________________
__________________
Inventory transfers
__________________ Inventory adjustments
_________________
Deposits
__________________ Inventory transfer variance
_________________
Accounts Payable
__________________ RTV adjustments
_________________
Uninvoiced receivings
__________________ Tender over or short
_________________
Accrued RTVs
__________________ Bad debt expense
_________________
Store Credit Liability
__________________ Miscellaneous income
_________________
Cust. deposit liabilities
__________________ Forfeited dep. GC’s, SC’s
_________________
Gift certificate liabilities
__________________ Currency rounding
__________________
Loyalty Program Liability __________________ Gain/Loss currency exch. (POS) _______________
Sales tax payable
__________________ Gain/Loss currency exch (Purch) _______________
Sales - merchandise
__________________ Unclassified expense
Sales - discounts
__________________
Sales - allowances
__________________
Sales - returns
__________________
Appendix 1: Account Numbers
A1-1
__________________
06/05/15
Appendix 1: Account Numbers Worksheet
These are the other Setup menu selections in which you will be asked to specify
account numbers that will be used for updating distributions when various kinds of
transactions are posted. Each account also requests a profit center method.
Menu Selection
Requested Account Numbers
Setup > System > Company
Store credit liability
Store credit redemption
Store credit forfeit
Setup > System > Accounting
Interface
Correction*
Invoice variance*
Receivings accrual*
Gain/loss (currency exch)*
A/P account number
Setup > System > Currency Codes
Currency rounding
Gain / loss (POS)
Gain / loss (Purch)
Setup > System > Gift Card Codes
Gift card liability
Gift card redemption
Gift card forfeit
Setup > System > Pay Codes
Cash
EBT
Checks
Loyalty Points
Credit card SVC
GC
SC
Drawer Over / Short Amounts
Define for these Pay Code types:
Setup > System > Stored Value Card SVC liability
SVC cash back
Codes
Setup > System > Tax Authorities
Tax (POS)
Tax (Purchasing)
Setup > Inventory > Control
Transfer Out misc charge
Transfer In misc charge
Quick transfer misc charge
Setup > Inventory > Account codes
B/S Inventory
Receivings accrual
Transfer clearing
RTV accrual
Drop-ship clearing
Sales
Cost-of-goods sold
Customer returns
Cost-of-goods returned
Adjustments
Cost correction
Physical count
Misc item expense
RTV adjustments
Account code ID
“retail”
Assign each item an account code that
directs which accounts to use for
recording activities for the item.
Appendix 1: Account Numbers
A1-2
06/05/15
Menu Selection
Requested Account Numbers
Setup > Customers > Control
Writeoff (bad debt expense)
Setup > Customers > Finance
Charge Codes
Finance charge
Setup > Customers > Terms Codes
Sales discounts given
Setup > Purchasing > Control
Tax accrual
Miscellaneous chgs
Setup > Purchasing >Terms Codes
Purchase discounts taken*
Setup > Point of Sale > Control
Sales – Miscellaneous charges
Setup > Point of Sale > Stores
Store number ______
Order deposits received
Order deposits forfeited
Default pay-in
Default pay-out
Layaway deposit received
Layaway deposit forfeited
Customers > Customers
Accounts receivable*
(A/R charge customers only)
(record on separate
customer wksht)
* Does not request a Profit Center Method
In addition to the above listed accounts, profit center method is requested in these
menu selections
Menu Selection
Profit Center Method
Setup/Inventory > Control
B/S Inventory
Drop-ship clearing
Transfer clearing
These menu selections request entry of an account number to identify the profit center
Menu Selection
Profit Center
Setup > Inventory > Locations
Location profit center
Setup > Inventory > Categories
Category profit center
Setup/ > Inventory >Sub-Categories
Sub-category profit center
Setup > Point of Sale > Stores
Store profit center
Appendix 1: Account Numbers
A1-3
06/05/15
Starter Data Defaults
AREA
DEFAULTS
SYSTEM
Accounts
Calendars
Currency Codes
Gift Certificate Codes
Label Jobs
Menu Codes
Pay Codes
Security Codes
Ship-via Codes
Tax Authorities
Tax Codes
Users
See above
Calendars to 2004 – 2020
Home currency – U.S. Dollars
CG10, GC25, GC50, GCUNLMT
Sys Admin, Manager, Supervisor, POS Clerk, Back
Office
Default all Pay Code associations to all Stores
AR – Accounts Receivable
AMX Credit – American Express Credit Card
CASH – Cash
CHECK – Check
GC – Gift Certificate
LOYALTY – Loyalty Program
MC CREDIT – MasterCard Credit Card
STORE CRED – Store Credit
VSA CREDIT – Visa Credit Card
Sys Admin, Manager, Supervisor, POS Clerk, Back
Office
C = Customer Pickup, F = Federal Express, M =
Mail, O = Other, T = Truck, and U = UPS
Exempt, Local, and Out of State
Exempt, Local, and Out of State
Sys Admin, Manager, Supervisor, POS Clerk, Back
Office
All users: Button Menu Style
1
User Preferences
Workgroup
INVENTORY
Account Codes “Retail”
Barcode IDs 6-pack, 12 Case, 24 Case, Dozen, Each, Item, Pair,
and UPC
Goods, Services, Other, Misc.
Butterfly, Hangtag, Split, and Standard
1
Over 18 and Over 21
Categories
Label Codes
Locations
Prompt Codes
Tare Weight Code
Units 6-Pack, 12-Case, 24-Case, Dozen, Each, Pair
Appendix 1: Account Numbers
A1-4
06/05/15
CUSTOMERS
Categories
Shipping Zones
Statement Codes
Terms Codes
PURCHASING
Terms Codes
Miscellaneous, Other, Retail, Whole
Zone 1 through 8 for both UPS and FEDEX
EOM (End of Month), Mid-Month (Mid-Month)
N30 (Net 30 Days) and N15 (Net 15)
COD (Cash on Delivery), N30 (Net 30 Days), and
N15 (Net 15)
POINT OF SALE
Drawers Drawer 1, 2 ,3, 4, 5
Form Groups Gift Receipts, Hold, Layaway, Order, Pay In/Out,
Security Codes
Stations
Store
Touchscreen Code
User Drawers
Reason Codes
LOYALTY PROGRAM
Pay on Account, Pick, Quote, and Ticket, Void,
Void – Pay In/Out, Void – Pay on Account
Sys Admin, Manager, Supervisor, POS Clerk, Back
Office
Stations 1, 2, 3,4,5
1
Main
Manager = All stores/all drawers, Supervisor = All
stores/all drawers
Returns:
DAMAGE-RTN - Damage - return
NOT LIKE - Did not like
WRNG SIZE – Wrong Size
CHG MIND - Changed Mind
EXCHANGE - Exchanged
Price overrides
MGR-PRIC - Manager Price Over Ride
WRNG PRICE - Wrong Price
DAMAGE-PRC - Damaged - Price
Void completed tickets
WRNG TICKT Wrong Ticket Entry
MGR-TICKET Manager Over Ride - Void Tickt
Tax overrides
WRNG TAX - Incorrect Tax Calculation
Basic Loyalty Program: 1 point per $
-
-
-
Appendix 1: Account Numbers
Earning value = 1, earn points on sales and
over rides, unlimited points per ticket
Redeeming value = 1, same as cash, redeem
points on merchandise, minimum 1 point per
ticket and allow partial payment
Earning when redeeming = reduce for
redemption, point multiplier = 1, zero if fully paid
in points
Loyalty Pay Code associated to Store
A1-5
06/05/15
Basic Loyalty Program: 1 point per $
LOYALTY
PROGRAM
-
-
GIFT CERTIFICATES
Basic Gift Certificate Program
-
STORE CREDITS
Earning value = 1, earn points on sales and over
rides, unlimited points per ticket
Redeeming value = 1, same as cash, redeem points
on merchandise, minimum 1 point per ticket and
allow partial payment
Earning when redeeming = reduce for redemption,
point multiplier = 1, zero if fully paid in points
Loyalty Pay Code associated to Store
Valid at all Stores
Always Valid (never expires)
Amounts of $10, $25, $50 and unlimited
GC Pay Code associated to Store
Basic Store Credit Set Up
-
Valid at all Stores
Always Valid (never expires)
SC Pay Code associated to Store
CUSTOMERS
Customers Cash and Template
ITEMS
Item
Inventory
Barcodes
Item Prices
Item Template
Appendix 1: Account Numbers
A1-6
06/05/15
APPENDIX 2: CONSTRUCTING COLUMN CONSTRAINTS
A constraint is a rule or condition entered into the Data Dictionary to impose a limit on
the scope or the range of values that a column (field) can have. This document serves
as a primer for understanding Data Dictionary Constraints and how to write these DD
constraints. This is not an exhaustive treatment of all the details of this subject, simply
a primer. Typically, someone using this functionality will be competent enough to fill in
the missing details. The expressions available in the constraint were modeled after
Delphi’s own Object Pascal.
CounterPoint SQL does not ship with any DD constraints – these are for users to enforce
site specific data restrictions not covered in our table events and other data validation
routines.
Constructing Column-Level Data Dictionary Constraints
When defining column-level data dictionary constraints, the constraint must evaluate to
a Boolean result that indicates the acceptance or failure of the validity check for that
column. Constraints that do not evaluate to Boolean result will cause errors when a
record is saved. Intermediate results within a constraint expression may evaluate to
any type. For instance, an expression that compares two strings must contain the two
string expressions, but the comparison operator implies a Boolean result. Avoid basing
a constraint on the contents of a different column.
Expression Types
The expression parser can understand 4 expression result types. Boolean expressions
are the simplest and contain only 1 or 0. The constants True and False can be used to
indicate a Boolean expression. Integer expressions can hold any Integer in the
standard signed 32 bit Integer range (–2147483648 to 2147483647). An example of an
Integer expression is “5 > 10” (which of course evaluates to False). Hexadecimal
representation for integers is allowed if the number is preceded by a ‘$’. Floating point
expressions can hold a standard double precision value in the range of 5.0 x 10^–324 to
1.7 x 10^308 with 15–16 significant digits. String expressions can hold any amount of
alpha-numeric data. String constants must be delimited with SINGLE quotes. Use of
double quotes will generate a syntax error at run-time.
Simpler expression types can be promoted to act as a more complex expression type,
but the reverse is not true. For example, an Integer expression can be used as a string
function parameter, but a floating point number can not be used as an Integer
parameter – this is true even if the a mathematical conversion is possible. In this case,
one would have to manually call the Trunc or Round functions on the Float expression
to obtain an Integer.
Appendix 2: Column Constraints
A2-1
06/05/15
Database Functions
The database functions return values as variants, which can be treated as strings,
floating point numbers, Integers, or Boolean values. Any attempt to treat a variant as an
incompatible type will result in an error when a constraint is evaluated. For example, ‘0’
can be operated on as a Boolean value, an Integer, a floating point number, or a string,
5.3 can only be operated on as a floating point number or a string, and ‘this string’ can
only be operated on as a string type.
function V: Variant
Returns the value of the column as a variant (this is the column where the constraint
was entered in the data dictionary). A constraint requiring the field PRC_1 to be less
than the field REG_PRC may be written in any of the following ways:
V < Col(‘REG_PRC’), if written as a constraint on PRC_1
V > Col(‘PRC_1’), if written as a constraint on REG_PRC
Col(‘PRC_1’) < Col(‘REG_PRC’), anywhere
function Col(ColName: string): Variant
Returns the value of the column ColName as a variant. ColName must be a string type
expression and should be a valid column name in the current table. All of the Radiant
Systems column names are upper case.
CounterPoint stores Boolean columns as characters. As a result, comparisons on
Boolean columns should use the strings ‘Y’ and ‘N’. For example:
“Col(‘USE_AVG_COST’) = ‘Y’” is a valid Boolean expression to check if a row’s
USE_AVG_COST column is set to True.
Date and Time Functions
Date and time functions all return standard Delphi floating point values where the
Integer part represents the total number of days since 12/30/1899 (the start of the
Georgian calendar),and the fractional part represents the fraction of a 24 hour day that
has elapsed since midnight.
function Date: Float
Returns the current date as a Float (the time is zero, equivalent to Trunc(Now))
function Time: Float
Returns the current time as a Float (the date is zero, equivalent to Frac(Now))
Arithmetic operations on dates and times are perfectly valid. For example, “Date – 1”
results in yesterday’s date and “Time – (1 / 24)“ subtracts an hour form the current time.
Appendix 2: Column Constraints
A2-2
06/05/15
Integer Ages
In some constraints, you will want to return an integer after comparing a date to the
current system date. For example, to implement “you must be at least 18”, you could
define a constraint of ”V – Now() > 18 * 365”. However, this is not quite correct since it
does not consider leap years.
To obtain an integer that indicates the number of years between the entered date and
the system date, rounded down, use the AgeYears function.
AgeYears(V)>=18
Additional functions that return integers for months and days are:
AgeMonths
AgeDays
Arithmetic Operators
The following tables show the types of operands and results for arithmetic operations.
Binary arithmetic operators
Operator
Operation Operand type
Result type
^
exponent
Integer type Float
Float type
Float
+
addition
Integer type Integer
Float type
Float
subtraction Integer type Integer
Float type
Float
*
multiplication Integer type Integer
Float type
Float
/
division
Integer type Float
Float type
Float
div
Integer division
Integer type Integer
mod
remainder Integer type Integer
Unary arithmetic operators
Operator
Operation Operand types
+
sign identity Integer type Integer
Float type
Float
sign negation Integer type Integer
Float type
Float
Result type
If one or both operands of a +, -, or * operator are of a Float type, the type of the result is
Float. The value of X / Y is always of type Float regardless of the operand types. An
error occurs if Y is zero. The value of I div J is the mathematical quotient of I / J,
rounded in the direction of zero to an Integer value. An error occurs if J is zero. The
mod operator returns the remainder obtained by dividing its two operands, as in I mod J.
The sign of the result of mod is the same as the sign of I, and an error occurs if J is zero.
Appendix 2: Column Constraints
A2-3
06/05/15
Relational Operators
The types of operands and results for relational operations are shown in the following
table:
Operator
=
<>
<
>
<=
>=
Operation
Operand types Result type
equal
compatible Boolean
not equal
compatible Boolean
less than
compatible Boolean
greater than
compatible Boolean
less than or equal to
compatible Boolean
greater than or equal to
compatible Boolean
Comparing numeric types
When the operands =, <>, <, >, >=, or <= are of numeric type, they must be compatible;
however, if one operand is of a Float type, the other can be of Integer type. A numeric
column containing a null is compared as though it contained a zero.
Comparing strings
The relational operators =, <>, <, >>, >=, and <= compare strings according to the
ordering of the extended ASCII character set. Any two string values can be compared.
For example, ‘C’ = ‘C’, but ‘C’ < ‘D’. An empty string is considered less than any other
string.
Logical Operators
Boolean logical operators
The types of operands and results for Boolean operations are shown in the following
table:
Operator
Operation Operand types
Result type
not
negation
Boolean type
Boolean
and
logical and Boolean type
Boolean
or
logical or
Boolean type
Boolean
xor
logical xor
Boolean type
Boolean
Appendix 2: Column Constraints
A2-4
06/05/15
Arithmetic Functions
Trunc(X: Float):Integer
The Trunc function truncates X, a Float value, to an Integer value. Trunc returns an
Integer value that is the value of X rounded toward zero.
Round(X: Float): Integer
The Round function rounds X, a Float value, to an Integer value. Round returns an
Integer value that is the value of X rounded to the nearest whole number. If X is exactly
halfway between two whole numbers, the result is the number with the greatest
absolute magnitude.
Frac(X: Float): Float
The Frac function returns the fractional part of the argument X. X is a Float expression.
The result is the fractional part of X; that is: Frac(X) = X - Int(X).
String operators
String types support one operation, +, which results in the concatenation of two strings.
The result of the operation S + T, where S and T are string expressions is the
concatenation of S and T.
String Functions
Upper(S: string): string
The Upper function returns a string containing the same text as S, but with all 7-bit
ASCII characters between 'a' and 'z' converted to uppercase.
Lower(S: string): string
Lower returns a string with the same text as the string passed in S, but with all letters
converted to lowercase. The conversion affects only 7-bit ASCII characters between 'A'
and 'Z'.
Copy(S: string; Index, Count: Integer): string
The Copy function returns a substring of a string expression, S. The result is a string
containing Count characters starting at S[Index]. If Index is larger than the length of S,
Copy returns an empty string. If Count specifies more characters than are available,
then only the characters from S[Index] to the end of S are returned. First character is
numbered 1, not 0.
Appendix 2: Column Constraints
A2-5
06/05/15
Pos(Substr: string; S: string): Integer
Pos searches for a substring, Substr, in a string, S. Substr and S are string expressions.
Pos searches for Substr within S and returns an Integer value that is the index of the
first character of Substr within S. Pos ignores case-insensitive matches. If Substr is not
found, Pos returns zero.
Length(S: string): Integer
The Length function returns the number of characters in the string S.
Conditional Expressions
If(Condition: Boolean, TrueResult, FalseResult): ResultType
Condition is a Boolean expression. When the expression is evaluated, it returns
TrueResult if Condition is true, otherwise, it returns FalseResult. TrueResult and
FalseResult need not be of the same type; the ResultType of the If expression may
change depending on Condition.
Order of Operation (Operator Precedence)
Operators
not
^
*, /, div, mod, and, shl, shr, as
+, -, or, xor
=, <>, <, >, <=, >=
Precedence
first (high)
second
third
fourth
fifth
Categories
unary operators
exponent operator
multiplying operators
adding operators
relational operators
Expressions in parentheses are evaluated first, and then the order of operation further
determines the evaluation. Evaluation occurs from left to right.
Constructing Constraint Errors
%f
%t
%d
%v
Example:
=
=
=
=
field name
table name (e.g., “IM_ITEM”)
description of table (e.g., “Item table”)
field value
%f in table %d cannot contain %v
“Percent in Tax Authorities table cannot contain –1”
Appendix 2: Column Constraints
A2-6
06/05/15
APPENDIX 3: USING PICTURE MASKS
Picture masks force users to enter only the certain characters, digits and special
characters that you allow them to, and only in those specific positions within a field that
you predefine.
To define a picture mask, use the following special characters for the definition of
required characters, digits, repeats, literals, letter case conversion, and optional entries,
along with any other character as a constant:
Character Description
#
Any digit (0-9)
?
Any letter (a-z or A-Z)
&
Any letter (a-z or A-Z, automatically convert to uppercase)
~
Any letter (a-z or A-Z, automatically convert to lowercase)
@
Any character
!
Any character (letters automatically convert to uppercase)
;
Use next character literally, not as a picture mask character
*
Repeat the following character any number of times. For example,
*& means convert any number to characters to uppercase.
To specify a specific number of times, follow the * with a number.
For example, to specify 5 numbers in a row, you would use *5(#).
[abc]
{a,b,c}
Optional sequence of characters abc that do not need to be
entered by the end-user
Grouping operator. Set of a, b, or c. The user must choose either
a, b, or c. For example, {Red,Green,Blue} means the user must
choose either Red, Green, or Blue.
Note: The picture mask must be constructed to avoid situations where one
element completely contains another element in the group. For example, if you
have three valid choices of Auto, Automobile, and Car, do NOT set the picture
mask to {Auto,Automobile,Car}. Instead, set it to {Auto[mobile],Car}.
If you enter any other character in a picture mask, the character is treated as a
constant and during entry in the field, the constant value is automatically filled in.
Appendix 3: Using Picture Masks
A3-1
06/05/15
Simple examples of picture masks:
#####[-####]
Standard USA 5-digit postal code with optional 4-digit suffix.
#&#&#&
Standard Canadian postal code (e.g., 1A2B3C)
*!
Any number or any character with all letters automatically converts to
uppercase (e.g., 123abc becomes 123ABC)
{Yes,No}
Either "Yes", "No", or blank (since the braces indicate optional entry).
The user should be able to type either "y" or "n" and the respective
value will automatically be entered.
&*?
Letters, with the first letter capitalized
#[#][#]
Numeric of 3 digits or less
{Red,Gr{ay,een},B{l{ack,ue},rown},White,Yellow}
Enter only the colors Red, Gray, Green, Black, Blue, Brown,
White, or Yellow. Automatically completes entry as soon as first
character following "{" is specified.
Appendix 3: Using Picture Masks
A3-2
06/05/15
Appendix 4: Avoiding Replication Errors
You can reduce replication errors by configuring your NCR Counterpoint data
properly, and by observing certain guidelines in your use of the software.
This appendix provides the data configuration settings and "best practices" that
help avoid the errors. A blank Site Chart is also provided to assist with recording
the setup information for each site.
Data Configuration
Menu Selection
Recommended Settings
Setup > System > Company
 For Gift cards and Store credits, clear the Valid at
any store check box. (If you must allow them to be
used at any store, set up a manual procedure to
permit each gift card and store credit to be used
only once.)
 Do not use the Set up batches button to create
DEFAULT batches.
Setup > System > Users
 Assign each user to the workgroup for that user's
site
 Clear the Allow other workgroups check box.
 For a user who works at different sites, create an
additional user for each site and assign the
workgroup for the site.
 Click the Set up batches button to create userspecific batches. (Or you can choose to use
Workgroup batches, for a single batch per
workgroup/site.)
 Assign a security code whose menu code either
restricts or provides access to the menu
selections shown below in Restricted Menu
Selections. Access to the restricted selections
should be provided only to specific users at a
single site.
Setup > System > Workgroups
 Define a separate workgroup for each site, with
the appropriate location and store for the site.
 Assign each site to a different workgroup when
the site registers with the Hub server.
 Click the Set up batches button to create
workgroup-specific batches (rather than userspecific batches).
 Assign unique series of values to the Next
numbers for each workgroup, and select to Always
auto-assign each number.
 At the Hub, after all remote databases are
activated, assign the Hub to its own workgroup
and restrict the site ID.
Appendix 4: Multi-Site
A4-1
06/05/15
Menu Selection
Recommended Settings
Setup > System > Menu Codes
 Define a menu code that provides access to the
menu selections shown below in Restricted Menu
Selections.
 Define additional menu codes that do not provide
access to the restricted menu selections.
Setup > System > Security Codes
 Assign the menu code that provides access to the
restricted menu selections to a single security
code.
 Assign menu codes that do not provide access to
restricted selections to other security codes.
 Clear the Allow other locations and Allow other
stores check boxes for all security codes.
Setup > Point of Sale > Stores
 If you select to assign document numbers from
the store, assign unique series of values to the
Next document numbers for each store and select
to Always auto-assign each number.
 Clear the Allow access to other stores' orders
check box.
Setup > Point of Sale > Stations
 If you selected for a store to assign document
numbers from the station, assign unique series of
values to the Next document numbers for each
station and select to Always auto-assign each
number.
 For Offline Ticket Entry, assign unique series of
values to the Next document numbers for each
station. Use a prefix such as "OFF" to ensure that
offline numbers and non-offline numbers do not
overlap. Also select to Always auto-assign the
numbers.
Restricted Menu Selections
Make these menu selections available only at a single site, to avoid data conflicts
during replication.
System > Gift Cards > Maintain Gift Cards
System > Store Credits > Maintain Store Credits
Inventory > Prices > Contract Prices
Inventory > Prices > Promotional Prices
Inventory > Prices > Special Prices
Inventory > Prices > Planned Promotions
Customers > Utilities > Maintain A/R Documents
Customers > Utilities > Reapply A/R Documents
Setup > xxxxxx > Control (all Control functions)
Setup > System > Company
Setup > System > Tax Codes
System > Utilities > Database Import
Appendix 4: Multi-Site
A4-2
06/05/15
Best Practices to Avoid Replication Errors
Logging in
When logging in, restrict a user to the workgroup associated with
the site where the login occurs.
This can be done by disallowing other workgroups in workstation
configuration (Setup > System > Workstations) or by restricting the
site ID in each workgroup (Setup > System > Workgroups).
Posting
If unposted transactions replicate to another site, it is important to
prevent them from being posted at the other sites.
This can be achieved by using user-specific batch IDs and by
clearing the Allow other locations and Allow other stores check
boxes in the security codes assigned to users. An additional
safeguard would be to subscribe each site to only its own location
and store history work set slices.
Deletions
Deleting or purging items, customers, account numbers can cause
replication errors at other sites if the other sites still have open
activity for those records.
You can minimize these errors by deleting or purging only after a
successful replication session, and then replicating again right after
deleting or purging the records.
Inserting or
Deleting
Avoid adding, deleting or purging large amounts of data at the
same time. This can result in a “replication storm” at your sites and
severely impact performance. Instead, add or delete in chunks over
a few days to spread the load out over a longer time period.
Renumbering
You can safely renumber items, customers, and vendors using the
Counterpoint renumbering utilities. If your own business practices
allow it, it is also safe to allow multiple sites to use these utilities –
as long as they don't renumber the same item, customer, or vendor.
Be aware that if you develop your own scripts to change/renumber
a primary key, the change will not be replicated. In order for the
change to be replicated, your script must delete the original record
and insert a new record.
Appendix 4: Multi-Site
A4-3
06/05/15
Item Merges
Customer Merges
Item or Customer merges can only be done on the Hub system.
Before merging, replicate first and then merge. Immediately after
merging, replicate again. This ensures that no new data is
introduced at a remote site while the merge is occurring.
Gift Cards
Store Credits
If you find it necessary to allow gift cards and/or store credits
to be redeemed at any store in the replication network, consider
replicating frequently during the day.
NCR CP Online
All NCR CP Online operations (publishing and importing) should be
performed only at a single site.
Database
Maintenance
Be sure to implement a regularly scheduled maintenance plan for
each of your sites, performing such tasks as checking DB integrity
and updating statistics.
Backups
It is important to do regularly scheduled database backups. In
addition to backing up the database itself, also backup the DXRE
installation folder (C:\Program Files\Progress\DataXtend, by
default) and the DXRE registry entries (using RegBackup.exe).
Appendix 4: Multi-Site
A4-4
06/05/15
Blank Site Chart
Print and complete this chart for each site in your DXRE replication network.
DXRE site name:
Location:
Store:
Stations:
Next document number:
From:
Station
Store
Next hold ID:
Station
Store
Next quote number:
Station
Store
Next order number:
Station
Store
Next layaway number:
Station
Store
Workgroup:
Next item number:
Next customer #:
Next vendor number:
Next purchase request #:
Next PO number:
Next receiver #:
Next RTV #:
Next transfer #:
Next gift card number:
Next store credit number:
Next event number:
Next barcode:
Next A/R doc #:
Users:
Batches:
Drawers:
Offline Ticket Entry:
Yes
No
Next document number (Offline):
Next hold ID (Offline):
Next quote number (Offline):
Next order number (Offline):
Next layaway number (Offline):
Next store credit number (Offline):
Next gift card number (Offline):
Next customer number (Offline):
Appendix 4: Multi-Site
A4-5
06/05/15
Appendix 4: Multi-Site
A4-6
06/05/15
Appendix 5 - Setting Up Legacy Devices
Select Setup > Point of Sale > Devices

If Use Legacy Device Framework is enabled in Setup > Point of Sale >
Stores, Setup > Point of Sale > Devices opens a different window to identify and
configure legacy devices.

Use if you plan to use .xml receipt forms

Devices must be configured on each workstation; settings stored in Windows
registry

Install manufacturer device drivers in advance
Supported
Devices
Click
to save workstation’s device configuration
Click
to import device registry settings from a .xml file
Click
to start the Windows add-printer wizard
Appendix 5: Legacy Device Setup
A5-1
06/05/15
Click
to import device registry settings from an .xml file
If you are using one of the Radiant POS terminals or Bundles, browse to TopLevel >
System > Devices subdirectory for the device group file.
The settings for the selected device group display on the Devices form. Modify these
settings as needed. (Refer to the Online Help for additional information about setting up
your Radiant terminal.)
Appendix 5: Legacy Device Setup
A5-2
06/05/15
Determine which Windows printer and Crystal printer type you will be using when
printing Crystal-format receipts on the workstation
Does not have to be the same as the workstation’s default Windows printer
Configuring the Printer
Click
the device
to configure
Click
to browse and
select a different printer
Click
to select a
Network printer
Testing the Printer
Click
to test
the configured device
Use if test copy shows lines
printed on top of each other
Print 100 lines of text
Percentage of cut
Specify image name, then click Set bitmap and Print bitmap
Click in sequence,
then click Print (or
Print & Journal, etc.)
Appendix 5: Legacy Device Setup
Click in
sequence, then
click Exit
A5-3
06/05/15
Determine which OPOS printer you will be using when printing XML-format receipts on
the workstation
Configuring the Printer
Click
to configure the device
Only active if selected “Device”
is a GenericPOS device
Select a Radiant certified
device file.
Then click
and
indicate which port the device
is connected to
Testing the Printer
Click
function
on the main Devices form or
from within the Configure
Force CR/LF
Enable if multiple ticket lines print on a single line (clear if extra
skipped lines print)
Stream printing
Send information to the printer in one large job, instead of one line at
a time
Device connection
Determine connection method for device: Open/Close, Keep
connected, or Keep claimed
Appendix 5: Legacy Device Setup
A5-4
06/05/15
Configuring the Cash Drawer
Allows for a GOPOS cash drawer to output to a Windows printer
NOTE: Compulsory cash drawers require users to close the cash drawer before starting
a new ticket. It requires an OPOS-compatible printer and cash drawer. The cash
drawer must support open-closed sensing, and you must use the manufacturer's
OPOS drivers.
Appendix 5: Legacy Device Setup
A5-5
06/05/15
Configuring the Line Display
Do not clear display
Allows display to remain visible; enable to speed up Ingenico
devices when using display functions
Device connection
Determine the connection method for the device: Open/Close,
Keep connected, Keep claimed
Offset by 1
Add 1 to starting positions for all rows and columns. Use if mfr's
OPOS drivers that do not adhere to the OPOS standard
Force uppercase
Force text to display in uppercase (Verifone)
Threaded operation
Allow other tasks to proceed as an event occurs vs wait until event
completes before proceeding (disable for IBM and Verifone)
Row
Column
Row and Column position where text should start
Width
Number of characters allowed for text; changes dynamically as
text is entered or resized
Delay
Number of milliseconds to wait between characters (0=no delay)
Attribute
Normal or blinking text
Justification
Align text to left, right, or centered
Value type
What kind of value can display? Text is literal text, Field is the
value of a data field, Label is the data dictionary display label for a
data field, and Macro is a list of canned text macros, such as date
and time.
Field For Value types of Field and Label, what field should be used
Macro For Macro Value types, which macro should be used
Text For Text Value types, text to be displayed
Appendix 5: Legacy Device Setup
A5-6
06/05/15
Configure text to display for each event
Event
When does it occur?
Wait
When the Ticket Entry Login Dialog is dismissed
Ready
Whenever a new ticket is started
Line
When saving a line
Total
When the payment dialog is displayed in Regular Ticket Entry and
when a button page with payment buttons is displayed in Touchscreen
Tender
When saving a payment
Auth
When attempting to authorize certain payments
Signature
Prior to capturing signature on signature capture device
Signature OK
After successful capture from signature capture device
Change
When the ticket has been completed and before the completion dialog is
displayed
Not Ready
As ticket entry is shutting down
Testing the Line Display
Appendix 5: Legacy Device Setup
A5-7
06/05/15
Configuring the Customer Display
Use to display text, images, animations, video, manufacturer’s advertisements, or other
media to your customers . Several predefined layouts are included in the TopLevel >
System > HTML folder of Counterpoint.
Select a different layout
configuration
Available panels
for use in the layout
Add a new panel to the Customer Display Setup list of available panels
Edit an existing panel
Delete a panel from the list
Drag and drop the
panels into new positions
using the split bar, or
resize a panel using
the move handles.
Split bar
Move
handles
Appendix 5: Legacy Device Setup
A5-8
06/05/15
Configuring the Magnetic Stripe Reader
“None” = OPOS device
For OPOS only, one track
from which to read data
Ask operator to enter last 4 digits of card
number after successfully reading card
For keyboard wedge only, data that
precedes and denotes start of credit
card data, and data that follows and
denotes end of credit card data
Testing the MSR
Advanced Test
Appendix 5: Legacy Device Setup
A5-9
06/05/15
Configuring the Pin Pad
The text to show on the
display area of the PIN pad
is configured in Payment
Display.
Testing the Pin Pad
Leave "Merchant ID" and
Terminal ID blank (not used
by either supported PIN pad)
Click in sequence, swipe
debit card and enter amount,
then click Begin EFT Trans
and Enable PIN Entry
Appendix 5: Legacy Device Setup
A5-10
Click End EFT Trans,
click these buttons in
sequence, then click Exit
06/05/15
Configuring the Payment Display
Configure text to display for each event
Event
When does it occur?
Wait
When the Ticket Entry Login Dialog is dismissed
Swipe Card
When the user should be prompted to swipe their card
Debit Pin Entry
When the user is instructed to enter their pin number
Tender
When saving a payment
Auth
When attempting to authorize certain payments
Payment
Approved
When an authorization attempt has been approved
Payment
Declined
When an authorization attempt has been declined
Signature
Prior to capturing signature on signature capture device
Signature OK
After successful capture from signature capture device
Idle
On ticket entry startup
Not Ready
As ticket entry is shutting down
Appendix 5: Legacy Device Setup
A5-11
06/05/15
Testing the Payment Display
Click in sequence,
then click Wait Text
(or Swipe Card, etc.)
to see if text displays
Appendix 5: Legacy Device Setup
A5-12
Click in sequence,
then click Exit
06/05/15
Configuring the Signature Capture
Testing the Signature Capture
Click in sequence, then
click Begin Capture
and sign the device.
Appendix 5: Legacy Device Setup
If the test works, click End
Capture. Then click Disable,
Release, Close in sequence,
and then click Exit.
A5-13
06/05/15
Use to show defined forms during Ticket Entry and capture customer input from the
Ingenico form display device into ticket profile fields
Supports scrolling receipts
Configuring the Forms Display
Appendix 5: Legacy Device Setup
A5-14
06/05/15
Configuring the Magnetic Ink Character Recognition
Testing the MICR
Advanced test
Appendix 5: Legacy Device Setup
A5-15
06/05/15
Configuring the Scale
Operating mode
Select the mode in which to operate: Asynchronous or
Synchronous
Minimum weight
Readings from scale below this value are not considered a weight
and software will continue to wait for the ‘real’ weight
Enter small value such as .1 pounds
All weights returned as 3-decimal value
Poll interval (ms)
Determine the interval in which to obtain readings from the scale
Display field 1, 2, 3
If scale has display capability, select the field to display and
number of characters
Up to three fields can be shown, with a single space separating
each
Length
Reset on error
Close and open device after each attempt to get weight (required
by some OPOS drivers)
Suppress OPOS
time out error 112
Suppress the time out error message
Additional setup:
Use Inventory > Items (Other tab) to select the Weighed checkbox
for any item that will need to be weighed. Ensure the Qty decimals
setting for these items allows for fractional weights, if necessary.
Appendix 5: Legacy Device Setup
A5-16
06/05/15
Configuring the Moneris SPED
Use to process Canadian Debit; also supports Visa, MasterCard, and AmEx.
Customer Receipt Printing
-
Certain receipt properties must be made available to both OPOS and Crystal receipts.
Printed customer receipts should be produced for all payment transaction types except voids.
All submitted Canadian debit transactions, including those declined, must print a customer receipt.
The following requirements apply to all printed customer receipts:

The customer receipt must be printed in the language of the cardholder.

For refunds, the word Refund (Remise D’Achat in French) MUST appear after the dollar
amount.

Amount must be printed.

Merchant number (store id) must not be printed.

Merchant name and address must be printed.

Transaction type must be printed, e.g. Purchase, Refund, etc.

Masked card number must be printed. The processor may have different masking
requirements for different card types, so it is the responsibility of the external EDC
processor to return a correctly masked card number.

Card expiration date must not be printed.

Debit receipts must include the account type selected by the cardholder, e.g. Chequing,
Savings. If the account type is Unknown, it should not be printed.

Card type must be printed, e.g. Visa, MasterCard, etc.

Transaction date and time must be printed.

Authorization code must be printed.

Receipt message must be printed.

Processor reference number must be printed.

Credit receipts must include a signature line and cardholder agreement text.

Two copies of credit receipts must be printed.

Entry method indicator must be printed, e.g. S or Swiped, M or Manual (Moneris does not
provide translations for the words, but they do use the letters on their French examples).
Appendix 5: Legacy Device Setup
A5-17
06/05/15
Appendix 5: Legacy Device Setup
A5-18
06/05/15
Appendix 6: Form Editor - OPOS .xml format
Click
Displays “Custom” if previously edited
The first time you edit a Standard form, you are asked
if you want to create a new custom form.
Answer Yes to make changes. The custom form will
be saved in the PSForms directory for your company.
Appendix 6: Form Editor
A6-1
06/05/15
Each OPOS form consists of 8 bands, where you can position and edit fields:
Red Outlined Box = Field
Black Outlined Box = Text
Green Outlined Box = Images
Green triangle = 'print on top' field
Red triangle = conditioned field
R
Header
Items
Item totals
Gift cert
SVCs
e
d
O
u
t
l
i
n
e
d
B
o
x
=
Totals
F
i
e
l
d
s
Payments
Footer
Appendix 6: Form Editor
A6-2
06/05/15
Changing a column on the form
From the
Design tab,
click the column
to be changed.
Use the
toolbar buttons to
change alignment
of the column
within its width.
To print a different
column in this
position, select
the new column.
To insert a database column in front of the current column, click
/Field and select the new field.
To insert text in front of the current column, click
the text.
on the toolbar or use Insert
or use Insert/Text on the toolbar and enter
To insert a new blank row or column that extends across or down the entire form, click a band
name (e.g.,Header) and select Insert/Columns or Insert/Rows from the toolbar.
To insert an image click
or select Insert / Image from the toolbar and browse and select
the image. The image will automatically be stored in the Company’s image folder. Only the
filename will show.
Click the Preview tab to
see an example of how the
form looks (images and
fields are not shown).
Click
to save the layout as an XML file in the Export folder for your
company and to close the editor.
Click
to save the form group ID.
Appendix 6: Form Editor
A6-3
06/05/15
Changing the Properties of a Band on the form
Click an unassigned block in the band. Then
click
or select Edit/Band Properties.
You can change the number of rows in the
band.
Changing the Properties of a Column on the form
Double-click the column.
You can also click the column and then
click
or select Edit/Label
Properties.
Print if empty
Print column heading even if no value in field?
Print on top
If two or more fields overlap, which field prints?
Displays with green triangle on Design tab
Display format
For Numeric and Date/Time fields, the Delphi specifier that
sets the display format of the field
Width
Width of this field
Alignment
Align the field to the left, to the right, or centered within the
field width
Print only if…
Field
Operator
Value
To condition printing of field. Displays with red triangle on
Design tab
Select the field on which the condition is based,
identify the operation (e.g., equal, more than, less than, etc.)
and value to which conditioned field is compared
Appendix 6: Form Editor
A6-4
06/05/15
Specialty Retail
(800) 852-5852 —www.CounterPointPOS.com
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement